Skip to main content

Full text of "Lebanon Valley College Catalog"

See other formats


CATALOG  ISSUE /DECEMBER  1967 


l 

(£  Lebanon  Valley  College  Bulletin 

(£  Published  four  times  yearly  by 

(£  Lebanon  Valley  College/ 

%.  Volume  I/December,  1967, 

S  Number  41 

k  Entered  as  second-class  matter 

y>  at  Annville,  Pennsylvania  17003 

/r  under  the  Act  of  August  24,  1912. 

(£  Ann  K.  Monteith,  editor 


1968-1969  CATALOG 


r 


college  calendar  1967/1968 

1967  First  Semester 

Sept.  7  Thursday,  6:30  p.m Faculty  Retreat  Dinner 

8  Friday     Faculty  Retreat 

9  Saturday     Board  of  Trustees  Retreat 

11-13  Monday  through 

Wednesday Freshmen  Orientation 

12,  13  Tuesday,   Wednesday    .  .  .Registration 

14  Thursday,  8:00  a.m Classes  begin 

14  Thursday,    11:00   a.m.    .  .Opening  Convocation 

Oct.  10  Tuesday,  11:00  a.m Religion  and  Life  Lecture 

28  Saturday     Homecoming  Day 

31 -Nov.  1  Tuesday,  Wednesday  .  .  .  .Balmer  Showers  Lecture 

Nov.  8  Wednesday Mid-semester  grades  due 

1 1  Saturday Board  of  Trustees  meeting 

22  Wednesday,  1:00  p.m.   .  .Thanksgiving  vacation  begins 

27  Monday,  8:00  a.m Classes  resume 

29-Dec.  6  Wednesday  through 

Wednesday Pre-registration  for  second  semester 

Dec.  15  Friday,  5:00  p.m Christmas  vacation  begins 

1968 

Jan.  3  Wednesday,  8:00  a.m.    .  .Classes  resume 

15-24  Monday  through  follow- 
ing Wednesday  ......  .First  semester  examinations 

24  Wednesday,   11:15  a.m.   .  Mid-year  Commencement 
24  Wednesday,  5:00  p.m.   ..  First  semester  ends 


Jan. 

29 

30 

Feb. 

20 

Mar. 

8 

18 

Mar. 

25-28 

April 

2 

11 

16 

21 

23 

24- 

May  1 

April 

28 

May 

4 

14 

18 

20-29 

29 

31 

June 

1 

2 

2 

Second  Semester 

Monday    Registration 

Tuesday,  8:00  a.m Classes  begin 

Tuesday,  11:00  a.m Founders'  Day 

Friday,  5:00  p.m Spring  Vacation  begins 

Monday,  8:00  a.m Classes  resume 

Monday  through 

Thursday    Religious  Emphasis  Week 

Tuesday    Phi  Alpha  Epsilon  Day 

Thursday,  5:00  p.m Easter  vacation  begins 

Tuesday,  8:00  a.m Classes  resume 

Sunday,  3:00  p.m Spring  Music  Festival 

Tuesday,  11 :00  a.m Religion  and  Life  Lecture 

Wednesday  through 

Wednesday Pre-registration  for  1968-1969 

Sunday,  3:00  p.m Spring  Music  Festival 

Saturday May  Day 

Tuesday,  11 :00  a.m Awards  and  Recognition  Day 

Saturday Spring   Orientation   for   incoming 

freshmen 
Monday  through  follow- 
ing Wednesday    Second  semester  examinations 

Wednesday,  5:00  p.m.    ..  Second  semester  ends 

Friday Board  of  Trustees  meeting 

Saturday Alumni  Day 

Sunday,  10:30  a.m Baccalaureate  Service 

Sunday,  2:30  p.m 99th  Annual  Commencement 


V 


1968  Summer  Sessions:  June  10- August  30. 


College  Calendar  1968/ 1969 


A 


1968  First  Semester 

Sept.  5  Thursday,  6:30  p.m Faculty  Retreat  Dinner 

6  Friday Faculty  Retreat 

7  Saturday Board  of  Trustees  Retreat 

9-11  Monday  through 

Wednesday Freshmen  Orientation 

10,  11   Tuesday,  Wednesday  .  .  .  .Registration 
12  Thursday,  8:00  a.m Classes  Begin 

12  Thursday,  11:00  a.m.  ...  Opening  Convocation 
Oct.            8  Tuesday,  11:00  a.m Religion  and  Life  Lecture 

29,  30  Tuesday,  Wednesday  ....  Balmer  Showers-  Lecture 

Nov.  2  Saturday Homecoming  Day 

6  Wednesday Mid-semester  grades  due 

9  Saturday Board  of  Trustees  meeting 

27  Wednesday,   1:00  p.m.   .  .Thanksgiving  vacation  begins 

Dec.  2   Monday,  8:00  a.m Classes  resume 

4-11   Wednesday  through 

Wednesday Pre-registration  for  2nd  semester 

20  Friday,  5:00  p.m Christmas  vacation  begins 

1969 

Jan.  6   Monday,  8:00  a.m Classes  resume 

13-22  Monday  through 

Wednesday First  semester  examinations 

22  Wednesday,  5:00  p.m.  .  .  .First  semester  ends 

Second  Semester 

27  Monday    Registration 

28  Tuesday,  8:00  a.m Classes  begin 

25  Tuesday,  11:00  a.m Founders'  Day 

8-12  Saturday  through 

Wednesday Religious  Emphasis  Week 

25  Tuesday    Phi  Alpha  Epsilon  Day 

28  Friday,  5:00  p.m Easter  vacation  begins 

8  Tuesday,  8:00  a.m Classes  resume 

13  Sunday,  3:00  p.m Spring  Music  Festival 

22  Tuesday,  11:00  a.m Religion  and  Life  Lecture 

23-30  Wednesday  through 

Wednesday Pre-registration  for  1969-1970 

27  Sunday,  3:00  p.m Spring  Music  Festival 

13  Tuesday,  11:00  a.m Awards  and  Recognition  Day 

17  Saturday Spring  orientation  for  incoming 

freshmen 
19-28  Monday  through 

Wednesday Second  semester  examination 

28  Wednesday,  5:00  p.m.   ..  Second  semester  ends 

30  Friday Board  of  Trustees  meeting 

31  Saturday Alumni  Day 

June  1   Sunday,  9:00  a.m Baccalaureate  Service 

1   Sunday,  1 1 :00  a.m.  ....  100th  Annual  Commencement 


Jan. 

Feb. 
Mar. 


Apr. 


May 


1969  Summer  Sessions:  June  9-August  29 


tf.r    ? 


ft* 


*- 


«•: 


v  *>4 

■  .'•    -  .V, 


\i\W 


ii 


^JfT 


II 


■**^  ''3^91 


a"    ■-  -~si ':m~m* 


College  Profile    7 

General  Information    31 

Academic  Program 53 

Student  Activities    83 

Courses  of  Study 95 

Directories    169 


i 


*cr\ 


lans. 


.  ^'W^pjpiiiPs.-' 


fi£t" 


<#** 


hhhh 


(£  College  History   9 

<E 

K  Principles  and  Objectives 16 

^  Location  and  Environment 18 

/r  Support  and  Control 23 

^  Looking  to  the  Future 29 


The  provisions  of  this  bulletin  are  not  to  be  regarded  as  an  irrevocable 
contract  between  the  student  and  the  College.  The  College  reserves  the 
right  to  change  any  provisions  or  requirements  at  any  time  within  the 
student's  term  of  residence. 


College  History 


An  Act  to  Incorporate  Lebanon  Valley  College 

Whereas,  Rudolph  Herr,  John  H.  Kinports,  George  A. 
Marks,  Jr.,  L.  W.  Craumer,  George  W.  Hoverter  and  others,  citi- 
zens of  Annville  and  vicinity,  bought  the  Annville  Academy, 
located  at  Annville,  Lebanon  county,  Pennsylvania,  and  presented 
the  same  to  the  East  Pennsylvania  Conference  of  the  Church  of 
the  United  Brethren  in  Christ,  on  condition  that  they  would 
establish,  and  maintain  forever,  an  institution  of  learning,  of  high 
grade,  which  is  in  accordance  with  the  design  of  said  conference: 

And  Whereas,  Said  conference  accepted  said  gift,  and  ap- 
pointed a  board  of  trustees  to  receive  and  control  the  same: 

And  Whereas,  Said  board  of  trustees,  agreeably  to  the  in- 
structions of  said  conference,  leased  said  property  with  all  addi- 
tional buildings  to  be  erected,  to  George  W.  Miles  Rigor  and 
Thomas  Rees  Vickroy,  until  the  fifteenth  day  of  July,  one  thou- 
sand eight  hundred  and  seventy-one,  said  parties  having  obligated 
themselves  to  provide  instruction  in  the  elements,  the  sciences, 
ancient  and  modern  languages  and  literature,  the  ornamental 
branches,  and  biblical  literature  and  exegesis,  with  the  privilege  of 
teaching  such  other  branches,  as  are  usually  taught  in  universities: 

And  Whereas,  Said  parties  have  successfully  organized  said 
institution,  having  invested  their  own  means,  and  gathered  a 
number  of  students  from  different  sections  of  the  country,  the 
said  school  being  under  the  principalship  of  Professor  Thomas 
Rees  Vickroy: 

And  Whereas,  The  Said  conference  have  appropriated 
twenty-five  thousand  dollars  for  the  purpose  of  purchasing  addi- 
tional grounds,  and  erecting  thereon  suitable  buildings;  therefore, 

Section  1.  Be  it  enacted  by  the  Senate  and  House  of  Repre- 
sentatives of  the  Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania  in  General 
Assembly  met,  and  it  is  hereby  enacted  by  the  authority  of  the 
same,  That  there  be  and  is  hereby  erected  and  established,  at  the 
village  of  Annville,  in  Lebanon  county,  in  this  commonwealth,  a 
college  for  the  education  of  persons  of  both  sexes,  the  name,  style 
and  title  of  which  shall  be  Lebanon  Valley  College. 


This  is  a  portion  of  the  Charter  of  Lebanon  Valley  College  as  it  is 
recorded  in  the  Laws  of  the  General  Assembly  of  the  State  of 
Pennsylvania  Passed  at  the  Session  of  the  State  of  Pennsylvania. 


COLLEGE  HISTORY 

Through  its  adoption,  the  College,  which  had  opened  its  doors  May  7, 
1866,  under  the  presidency  of  Dr.  Thomas  Rees  Vickroy,  was  offi- 
cially incorporated. 

The  College  began  operations  in  the  building  of  the  Annville 
Academy  (the  building  still  exists  on  the  campus  as  South  Hall).  Ac- 
cording to  the  late  Dr.  Hiram  H.  Shenk,  the  Academy  was  known  to 
be  in  operation  in  a  blacksmith  shop  in  1834  but  was  not  officially 
chartered  until  May  28,  1840.  The  property  was  made  available  to 
the  East  Pennsylvania  Conference  of  the  Church  of  the  United  Breth- 
ren in  Christ  according  to  the  terms  stated  in  the  Charter.  This  body 
had  taken  action  at  its  Annual  Session  in  Lebanon,  Pennsylvania,  in 
March,  1865,  to  establish  an  institution  of  higher  learning  in  a  town 
conveniently  located  within  the  bounds  of  the  Conference.  Prior  to 
this  time,  the  Conference  had  had  quasi-official  connections  with  col- 
leges of  the  denomination  in  other  areas  of  the  country,  according 
to  Dr.  Phares  B.  Gibble  {History  of  the  East  Pennsylvania  Confer- 
ence, pp.  546-548).  However,  the  distance  of  these  colleges — one  in 
Mt.  Pleasant,  Westmoreland  County,  Pennsylvania,  and  one  in  Wester- 


The  Lebanon  Valley  College  Campus  as  it  looked  during  its  earlier  years. 
South  Hall,  the  building  in  the  foreground,  still  stands. 

10 


COLLEGE  HISTORY 

ville,  Ohio — from  the  Conference  Area  created  problems  for  those 
young  people  of  the  Conference  who  desired  to  attend  them. 

According  to  the  action  taken  at  Lebanon,  five  persons  were  ap- 
pointed to  meet  with  five  persons  of  the  Pennsylvania  Conference  to 
give  further  attention  to  establishing  a  local  college.  Within  the  next 
year,  this  committee  recommended  the  following:  "First,  the  estab- 
lishing of  a  school  of  high  grade  under  the  supervision  of  the  church; 
second,  to  accept  for  this  purpose  the  grounds  and  buildings  of  what 
was  known  as  the  Annville  Academy,  tendered  as  a  gift  to  the  Con- 
ference; and,  third,  to  lease  the  buildings  and  grounds  to  a  responsible 
party  competent  to  take  charge  of  the  school  the  coming  year." 
(Gibble,  p.  548) 

The  new  college,  in  order  to  provide  itself  with  a  secure  financial 
foundation,  availed  itself  of  the  goodwill  of  the  old  Annville  Academy 
and  accepted  students  for  work  in  the  lower  grades.  At  first,  as  Presi- 
dent Vickroy  afterwards  declared,  there  was  not  even  a  nucleus  of 
college  students.  From  the  start,  however,  Lebanon  Valley  College 
offered  an  advanced  curriculum.  Before  long,  the  College  was  at- 
tracting students  who  were  fully  prepared,  and  it  slowly  evolved  into 
a  full-fledged  institution  of  higher  education. 

The  Growth  of  the  College 

With  a  student  body  of  forty-nine,  the  College  opened  on  May  7, 
1866.  Dr.  Thomas  Rees  Vickroy  served  as  its  president  during  the 
first  five  years  of  its  existence  and  issued  diplomas  to  its  first  gradu- 
ates. President  Lucian  Hammond,  his  successor,  gathered  the  nucleus 
of  a  college  library,  secured  some  scientific  apparatus,  and  founded 
the  Alumni  Association.  During  succeeding  years  the  institution  gpew 
in  numbers  and  facilities.  In  1890,  the  College  received  the  Mary  A. 
Dodge  Scholarship  of  $10,000,  which  enabled  it  to  close  its  first 
quarter  century  with  increased  confidence  for  the  future. 

In  1897,  under  the  presidency  of  Dr.  Hervin  U.  Roop,  the  Col- 
lege entered  a  period  of  expansion  during  which  Engle  Hall,  the 
Carnegie  Library,  and  North  Hall,  later  Keister  Hall,  were  built  (the 
latter  building  was  recently  razed,  and  in  its  place  was  built  the 
College  Chapel).  During  this  period  the  destruction  by  fire  of  the 
old  Administration  Building  tested  the  loyalty  of  College  supporters 
but  did  not  interfere  with  a  program  of  expansion.  The  friends  of 
the  College  rallied  to  build  a  new  and  larger  Administration  Building, 

11 


COLLEGE  HISTORY 

a  men's  residence  hall,  and  a  heating  plant.  Under  Dr.  Roop's  presi- 
dency, improved  quarters  and  modern  equipment  were  provided  for 
the  science  departments.  His  vision  and  initiative  laid  the  foundation 
for  the  continuing  success  of  Lebanon  Valley  College. 

The  inauguration  of  George  Daniel  Gossard  as  President  in  1912 
was  the  beginning  of  an  era  of  prosperity  for  Lebanon  Valley  Col- 
lege. During  his  term  of  office  the  student  body  tripled  in  numbers, 
the  faculty  increased  in  size  and  attainments,  and  the  elimination  of 
all  phases  of  secondary  education  raised  the  institution  to  true  college 
status.  During  this  period  two  successful  endowment  campaigns  were 
completed. 

Dr.  Gossard  was  succeeded  by  Dr.  Clyde  A.  Lynch,  who  built 
soundly  upon  the  foundations  previously  laid.  Under  his  administra- 
tion the  bonds  of  affection  between  the  College  and  the  church  were 
strengthened,  the  active  support  of  the  alumni  was  vastly  stimulated, 
academic  standards  were  raised,  the  services  of  the  College  were  ex- 
tended over  a  wider  area,  and  as  a  visible  symbol  of  his  energetic  ad- 
ministration, a  physical  education  building  was  erected. 

Following  Dr.  Lynch's  death  in  1950,  the  Trustees  elected  to  the 
presidency  Dr.  Frederic  K.  Miller,  one  of  the  members  of  the  faculty. 
His  election  was  greeted  with  warmest  enthusiasm  by  both  faculty  and 
constituents.  Under  his  leadership  the  curriculum  has  been  expanded, 
the  administrative  staff  reorganized,  and  relationships  with  the  local 
community  and  alumni  strengthened. 

The  story  of  Dr.  Miller's  first  decade  in  this  office  can  be  told  in 
many  ways.  In  terms  of  facilities,  it  becomes  the  story  of  the  erec- 
tion of  new  buildings  and  the  renovation  of  existing  buildings.  The 
spotlight  falls  specifically  upon  the  Mary  Capp  Green  Residence  Hall 
(1957),  the  Gossard  Memorial  Library  (1957),  Science  Hall  (1957), 
The  College  Dining  Hall  (1958),  Carnegie  Lounge  (1959),  Vickroy 
Hall  (1961),  and  Keister  and  Hammond  Halls  (1965).  The  new 
Chapel,  with  a  seating  capacity  of  1,000,  in  addition  to  classroom, 
office,  and  lecture  hall  facilities,  was  dedicated  on  October  30,  1966. 

In  terms  of  organization,  it  becomes  the  story  of  expanding  ser- 
vices through  the  establishing  of  the  separate  offices  of  Dean  of  the 
College,  Dean  of  Men  and  Dean  of  Women  (functioning  jointly  as 
the  Student  Personnel  Office),  College  Chaplain,  Assistant  to  the 
President,  and  Director  of  Development,  to  name  but  a  few  of  the 
administrative  changes.  In  February,  1967,  the  office  of  Vice  Presi- 

12 


COLLEGE  HISTORY 

dent  was  established,  at  which  time  three  vice  presidents  were  ap- 
pointed. 

In  terms  of  academic  growth,  it  becomes  the  story  of  curriculum 
changes,  expanded  recognition  of  the  College's  alumnae  by  the  Amer- 
ican Association  of  University  Women,  the  recognition  of  the  Chem- 
istry Department  by  the  American  Chemical  Society,  the  use  of  the 
services  of  the  College  Entrance  Examination  Board  and  the  College 
Scholarship  Service,  the  inauguration  of  an  Honors  Program  and  a 
Teacher  Intern  Program  for  the  students,  the  establishing  of  a  recog- 
nized curriculum  in  Elementary  Education,  and  the  granting  of  pro- 
gram approval  status  by  the  Pennsylvania  Department  of  Public  In- 
struction by  which  automatic  teacher  certification  privileges  can  be 
used  by  the  College. 

In  January,  1967,  Dr.  Frederic  K.  Miller  announced  his  retire- 
ment from  the  presidency  of  Lebanon  Valley  College  to  become 
effective  on  April  1,  1967.  The  Board  of  Trustees  later  voted 
to  confer  upon  him  the  title  of  "President  Emeritus'"  and  elected  Dr. 
Allan  W.  Mund,  Board  President,  to  serve  as  Acting  President  until 
a  successor  to  Dr.  Miller  could  be  chosen. 

The  Present  Academic  Status — (Accreditation) 

Lebanon  Valley  College,  through  its  Board  of  Trustees,  adminis- 
trative staff,  and  faculty,  has  endeavored  to  adhere  to  its  initial  ob- 
jective of  being  a  coeducational  institution  of  high  learning  fostering 
high  standards  of  scholarship  in  a  Christian  atmosphere. 

Lebanon  Valley  College  is  accredited  by  the  Middle  States  As- 
sociation of  Colleges  and  Secondary  Schools,  the  Department  of 
Public  Instruction  of  Pennsylvania,  the  National  Association  of 
Schools  of  Music,  and  the  American  Chemical  Society.  It  is  a  mem- 
ber of  the  American  Council  on  Education,  the  Association  of  Amer- 
ican Colleges,  the  College  Entrance  Examination  Board,  the  College 
Scholarship  Service,  the  Council  of  Protestant  Colleges  and  Univer- 
sities, the  Pennsylvania  Foundation  for  Independent  Colleges  and  the 
American  Association  of  Colleges  for  Teacher  Education.  It  is  on 
the  approved  list  of  the  Regents  of  the  University  of  the  State  of  New 
York  and  the  American  Association  of  University  Women. 

The  College  currently  operates  on  a  two-semester  system  with  a 
twelve-week  summer  school,  an  evening  school  on  the  campus 
throughout  the  regular  semesters,  and  a  cooperative  relationship  with 
the  Pennsylvania  State  University,  the  University  of  Pennsylvania, 

13 


COLLEGE  HISTORY 

Temple  University,  and  Elizabethtown  College  in  the  University  Cen- 
ter at  Harrisburg. 

The  Evangelical  United  Brethren  Church 

Even  as  the  College  has  changed  through  the  years,  so  has  the 
denomination  which  gave  it  birth  and  continues  to  offer  its  support. 
The  Church  of  the  United  Brethren  in  Christ  merged  with  the  Evan- 
gelical Church  at  Johnstown,  Pennsylvania,  November  16,  1946. 
Both  of  these  denominations  originated  as  outgrowths  of  an  evan- 
gelical religious  awakening  among  the  German-speaking  people  of 
southeastern  Pennsylvania  and  northern  Maryland  in  the  late  eigh- 
teenth century.  The  Church  of  the  United  Brethren  in  Christ,  which 
founded  Lebanon  Valley  College  in  1866,  was  officially  organized  in 
1800  and  was  the  first  Christian  church  indigenous  to  the  United 
States.  The  Evangelical  Church  was  organized  shortly  thereafter.  Both 
churches  spread  west  rapidly;  but  growth  was  slow  in  the  South,  prin- 
cipally because  of  the  limitation  imposed  by  the  exclusive  use  of  the 
German  language  in  the  church  in  the  beginning  and  because  of  the 
church's  outspoken  opposition  to  slavery. 

The  Evangelical  United  Brethren  Church  by  tradition  emphasizes 
evangelism,  rather  than  liturgical  or  doctrinal  matters.  That  is,  its  em- 
phasis has  been  placed  on  personal  religious  experience  and  morality 
in  practical  living,  rather  than  on  ritual  or  creedal  orthodoxy.  In  the 
main,  its  worship  forms  have  been  simple;  and  its  theology  has 
stressed  the  individual  freedom  and  responsibility  of  man  in  his  rela- 
tionship to  God  rather  than  the  overwhelming  divine  power  which  is 
characteristic  of  Calvinistic  theology. 

In  organization  the  church  is  similar  to  the  Methodist  Church. 
It  possesses  a  modified  episcopacy,  although  the  highest  governing 
power  is  vested  in  a  General  Conference  which  meets  every  four  years 
and  is  composed  of  ministers  and  lay  members  from  the  whole  de- 
nomination. Next  to  the  General  Conference,  authority  is  vested  in 
the  annual  conferences,  composed  of  ministers  and  lay  representatives 
of  local  congregations  and  circuits.  The  Church  employs  the  itinerant 
system  for  its  ministry,  i.e.,  ministers  are  appointed  to  local  churches 
by  the  bishop  of  the  area  and  the  superintendent  or  superintendents 
of  the  conferences. 

According  to  the  7967  Year  Book,  the  Evangelical  United 
Brethren  Church  is  made  up  of  4,156  local  churches,  3,740  ministers, 
and  749,600  members  in  the  Continental  United  States.  In  size  it  is 
fourteenth  among  the  Protestant  denominations  in  the  United  States. 

14 


COLLEGE  HISTORY 

The  church  operates  nine  educational  institutions  and  ten  homes  for 
orphans  and  the  aged.  In  1961  its  income  from  contributions  was 
over  $54  million.  Geographically  the  church  extends  across  the 
United  States,  from  New  England  to  the  Pacific  Coast,  although  it  is 
strongest  numerically  in  Pennsylvania,  Ohio,  and  Indiana.  Denomina- 
tional headquarters  are  in  Dayton,  Ohio. 

The  denomination  to  which  Lebanon  Valley  College  is  related 
is  a  constituent  member  of  the  National  Council  of  Churches  of 
Christ  in  the  U.S.A.,  and  of  the  World  Council  of  Churches,  with 
official  representatives  in  each  body. 

There  is  no  tendency  on  the  part  of  Lebanon  Valley  College  to 
illiberal  religious  views.  Though  there  are  required  religion  courses 
for  all  students  and  weekly  chapel  services  with  modified  attendance 
requirements,  the  students  are  encouraged  to  seek  their  own  religious 
development  under  the  guidance  of  the  College  Chaplain,  by  partici- 
pating in  the  various  religious  activities  open  to  them  on  the  campus 
(See  page  84)  and  by  attending  worship  services  in  one  of  the 
several  churches  of  the  community. 

In  April,  1968,  the  Evangelical  United  Brethren  Church  will 
unite  formally  with  the  Methodist  Church  to  form  the  new  United 
Methodist  Church. 


Presidents 

Rev.  Thomas  Rees  Vickroy,  Ph.D 1866-1871 

Lucian  H.  Hammond,  A.M 1871-1876 

Rev.  D.  D.  DeLong,  A.M 1876-1887 

Rev.  E.  S.  Lorenz,  A.M.,  B.D 1887-1889 

Rev.  Cyrus  J.  Kephart,  A.M 1889-1890 

E.  Benjamin  Bierman,  A.M.,  Ph.D 1890-1897 

Rev.  Hervin  U.  Roop,  A.M.,  Ph.D.,  LL.D 1897-1906 

Rev.  Abram  Paul  Funkhouser,  B.S 1906-1907 

Rev.  Lawrence  Keister,  S.T.B.,  D.D 1907-1912 

Rev.  George  Daniel  Gossard,  B.D.,  D.D.,  LL.D 1912-1932 

Rev.  Clyde  Alvin  Lynch,  A.M.,  B.D.,  D.D., 

Ph.D.,  LL.D 1932-1950 

Frederick  K.  Miller,  A.M.,  Ph.D.,  Litt.D.,  L.H.D. 

Acting  President  1950-1951 
President  1951-1967 
Allan  W.  Mund,  LL.D Acting  President  1967- 


15 


Principles  and  Objectives 


The  aim  of  Lebanon  Valley  College  is  to  give  its  students  the  op- 
portunity to  procure  a  liberal  education  of  the  highest  quality. 
That  is,  it  seeks,  first  of  all,  to  acquaint  them  with  the  basic  facts  and 
principles  of  the  cultural  heritage  of  mankind,  including  its  spiritual, 
scientific,  literary,  artistic,  and  social  elements.  Second,  it  seeks  to 
develop  in  its  students  the  capacity  to  use  their  full  intellectual  re- 
sources in  dealing  with,  formulating  and  communicating  ideas,  and 
making  reasoned  judgments.  Third,  it  seeks  to  cultivate  those  qualities 
of  personality  and  character,  of  moral  and  social  responsibility  and 
concern,  that  characterize  personal  maturity  and  constitute  the  basis 
of  a  free  society. 

The  liberal  education  aims  of  Lebanon  Valley  College  are  set 
within  the  context  of  commitment  to  the  Christian  faith  and  Christian 
values,  and  are  ordered  by  the  conviction  that  sincere  faith  and  sig- 
nificant learning  are  inseparable,  that  all  truth  has  its  origin  and  end 
in  God,  and  that  therefore  learner  and  teacher  alike  not  only  can  be, 
but  must  be  free  to  subject  all  claims  to  truth  and  value,  both  religious 
and  secular,  to  the  tests  of  honest  and  humble  inquiry,  analysis,  reflec- 
tion, and  redefinition.  And  implicit  in  this  conviction  is  the  correlate 
that  keeping  the  doors  open  for  exploration  and  application  of  Chris- 
tian truth  and  value  does  not  bar  the  way  to  the  exploration  of  the 
truth  and  value  to  be  found  in  other  religious  and  philosophical  tradi- 
tions of  mankind.  Finally,  in  the  Christian  understanding  of  man  as 
creature  of  God  is  found  the  basis  of  the  College's  concern  for  all 
its  members  as  persons,  as  God-related  as  well  as  man-related  and 
world-related  beings.  Thus  through  commitment  to  the  ideal  of 
Christian  higher  education  does  the  College  seek  to  serve  the  Church 
and  the  Christian  community  which  nourishes  and  sustains  it. 

In  its  policy  of  providing  programs  of  a  professional  and  pre- 
professional  nature,  Lebanon  Valley  College  does  not  seek  simply 
to  help  educate  persons  who  will  make  their  own  useful  contribution 
to  the  work  of  the  world  and  to  the  service  of  mankind  in  certain 
professions  and  vocations.  The  College  insists  that  for  its  students 
engaged  in  such  preparation  the  purposes  of  a  Christian  liberal 
education  apply  completely  and  must  be  neither  ignored  nor  depre- 

16 


PRINCIPLES  AND  OBJECTIVES 

cated  for  the  sake  of  technical  or  utilitarian  ends  or  in  the  name  of 
pragmatic  or  material  values.  Indeed,  a  liberally  educated  professional 
is  a  more  complete  person,  while  through  his  practice  his  knowledge 
and  interests  are  applied  and  made  relevant  to  the  world. 

It  is  in  relation  to  these  general  principles  that  the  following 
more  specific  educational  objectives  of  Lebanon  Valley  College  are 
to  be  understood: 

1.  To  provide  an  opportunity  for  qualified  young  people  to 
procure  a  liberal  education  and  to  develop  their  total  personalities 
under  Christian  influences. 

2.  To  help  provide  the  church  with  capable  and  enlightened 
leaders,  both  clerical  and  lay. 

3.  To  foster  Christian  ideals  and  to  encourage  faithfulness  to 
the  Church  of  the  student's  choice. 

4.  To  help  train  well-informed,  intelligent,  and  responsible 
citizens,  qualified  for  leadership  in  community,  state,  and  nation. 

5.  To  provide  pre-professional  students  with  the  broad  prelim- 
inary training  recommended  by  professional  schools  and  professional 
associations. 

6.  To  provide,  in  an  atmosphere  of  liberal  culture,  partial  or 
complete  training  for  certain  professions  and  vocations. 

7.  To  provide  opportunity  for  gifted  students  to  pursue  inde- 
pendent study  for  the  purpose  of  developing  their  intellectual  powers 
to  the  maximum. 


ROCHESTER  365  miles 


BUFFALO  305  miles 


BOSTON   365  miles 


CLEVELAND  345 


PITTSBURGH  210   miles 


ALLENTOWN   70   miles 


HAGERSTOWN   95   miles 


PHILADELPHIA  80   miles 
\     \ 
WILMINGTON   90  miles 


\ 


BALTIMORE  100   miles 

/  ATLANTIC   CITY  145   miles 

WASHINGTON   125  miles 


Location  and  Environment 


Lebanon  Valley  College  is  located  in  Annville,  Lebanon  County, 
i Pennsylvania,  twenty  miles  east  of  Harrisburg  and  five  miles  west 
of  Lebanon.  The  campus  faces  U.S.  Highway  422  on  the  south  and 
Pennsylvania  Highway  934  on  the  west.  Highway  422  is  an  east-west 
highway  paralleling  U.S.  Highway  22  to  the  north  and  the  Pennsyl- 
vania Turnpike  to  the  south.  Highway  934  is  a  north-south  route  pro- 
viding direct  access  to  Highway  22,  U.S.  Highway  322,  and  the  Penn- 
sylvania Turnpike  (using  the  Lebanon-Lancaster  Interchange,  Penn- 
sylvania Highway  72,  and  Highway  322). 

Bus  service  between  Reading  and  Harrisburg  over  Highway  422 
provides  rail  and  air  connections  at  Harrisburg  for  Philadelphia,  New 
York,  Baltimore,  Washington,  Pittsburgh,  and  other  major  cities. 

Annville  is  a  residential  community  of  about  3,500  people  situ- 
ated in  the  agricultural  country  of  the  Pennsylvania  Germans.  Of 
historical  significance  in  nearby  areas  are  the  Cornwall  Charcoal 
Furnace,  which  dates  back  to  1742  and  which  supplied  cannonballs 
for  Washington's  army,  and  the  adjacent  Cornwall  Ore  Mines  which 


18 


LOCATION  AND  ENVIRONMENT 

are  still  operated  by  the  Bethlehem  Steel  Corporation;  the  Union 
Canal  Tunnel  (the  oldest  tunnel  in  the  United  States)  and  remnants 
of  the  locks  used  from  1828  to  1885  by  the  canal  which  provided 
access  from  the  Susquehanna  River  to  Philadelphia;  and  the  first 
Municipal  Water  Works  in  America  at  Schaefferstown. 

Lebanon  Valley  College  offers  cultural  programs  in  the  form  of 
concerts  by  students,  faculty  members,  and  musical  organizations  in 
the  Department  of  Music,  and  lectures  sponsored  by  the  various  de- 
partments of  the  College.  In  addition,  the  neighboring  communities 
of  Harrisburg,  Hershey,  and  Lebanon  offer  concerts,  lectures,  and 
other  cultural  activities  throughout  the  year. 

There  are  nine  churches  of  different  denominations  in  Annville 
itself.  Other  parishes  of  major  religious  groups  not  found  in  Annville 
are  located  within  a  five-mile  radius  of  the  College. 

Campus,  Buildings,  and  Equipment 

The  campus  of  thirty-five  acres  is  situated  in  the  center  of  Ann- 
ville. The  college  plant  consists  of  twenty-six  buildings  including: 

The  Administration  Building — Administrative  Offices  (Presi- 
dent, Vice  President  and  Dean  of  the  College,  Vice  President  and 
Assistant  to  the  President,  and  Vice  President  and  Controller)  are 
located  on  the  main  floor.  The  remainder  of  the  building  is  devoted  to 
classrooms,  laboratories,  faculty  offices,  and  administrative  services. 

Gossard  Memorial  Library — Containing  the  most  modern,  ap- 
proved facilities,  The  Gossard  Memorial  Library  was  opened  in  June, 
1957.  The  more  than  83,000  volumes  on  its  shelves  contain  an  excel- 
lent collection  of  standard  reference  works.  In  addition  to  the  books 
used  by  the  various  departments  of  the  College,  a  diversified  collection 
of  periodicals  is  also  available. 

The  Hiram  Herr  Shenk  Collection  (which  includes  the  Heilman 
Library)  and  the  C.  B.  Montgomery  Memorial  Collection  contain 
many  valuable  works  dealing  with  the  history  and  customs  of  the 
Pennsylvania  Germans.  These  collections  are  housed  in  the  Historical 
Collection  Room  and  are  open  for  reference  use  under  staff  super- 
vision. 

A  separate  room  houses  the  Archives  of  the  Historical  Society 
of  the  Eastern  Conference  of  the  Evangelical  United  Brethren  Church. 
The  materials  in  this  collection  are  available  for  reference  under  the 
supervision  of  the  Conference  Historian. 

Special  equipment  of  the  library  includes  a  music  and  listening 
room  outfitted  with  turntables  and  earphones,  typing  booths  for  stu- 

19 


^#7  1 


dents,  conference  rooms,  microfilm  readers,  and  carrels  for  in- 
dividual study.  In  addition  to  the  library  proper,  the  building  con- 
tains an  audio-visual  room  equipped  with  a  loud  speaker  system  and 
adaptable  to  the  exhibiting  of  works  of  art. 

Carnegie  Lounge — The  former  Carnegie  Library  building  has 
been  converted  into  a  modified  student  services  center.  The  basement 
contains  a  snack  bar  and  the  first  floor  is  equipped  with  three  at- 
tractive lounges  for  the  use  of  faculty  and  students.  The  second  floor 
houses  the  offices  of  the  Dean  of  Men,  the  Dean  of  Women,  the  stu- 
dent newspaper  (La  Vie  Collegienne),  the  college  yearbook  (The 
Quittapahilla),  and  conference  rooms. 

South  Hall — Formerly  a  women's  residence,  South  Hall  houses 
the  Registrars'  Office,  the  Teachers  Placement  Bureau,  Admissions 
Office,  and  faculty  offices. 

Residence  Halls — There  are  five  residence  halls  for  women 
(Centre,  Green,  North,  Sheridan,  and  Vickroy)  and  six  for  men 
(East,  Hammond,  Keister,  Laughlin,  Kreider,  and  West). 

20 


LOCATION  AND  ENVIRONMENT 

Lynch  Memorial  Physical  Education  Building — This  modern 
plant  is  well  equipped  for  physical  education,  recreation,  and  campus 
meetings.  It  houses  the  Department  of  Economics  and  Business  Ad- 
ministration. 

Infirmary — Staffed  by  a  Head  Nurse  and  resident  nurses,  the  in- 
firmary is  available  to  all  students.  The  College  Physician  is  on  call  at 
all  times.  Adjacent  to  the  Infirmary  is  the  art  studio. 

Engle  Hall — This  building  houses  the  Music  Department  and 
includes  an  auditorium,  classrooms,  studios,  offices,  and  private  prac- 
tice rooms.  It  is  augmented  by  facilities  in  the  Music  Department 
Annex  adjacent  to  West  Hall. 

Science  Hall — The  first  floor  of  Science  Hall  contains  the  labora- 
tories, library,  class  and  conference  rooms,  and  offices  of  the  Chem- 
istry Department.  The  second  floor  is  equipped  with  similar  facilities 
and  a  greenhouse  for  the  Biology  Department. 


21 


The  College  Dining  Hall — It  has  facilities  for  serving  approxi- 
mately six  hundred. 

The  College  Book  Store — All  textbooks>  school  supplies,  sta- 
tionery, as  well  as  souvenirs,  are  available  at  the  College  Book  Store. 

Say  lor  Hall — The  offices  of  the  College  Relations  Area  (Alumni, 
Development,  and  Public  Relations)  are  located  in  Saylor  Hall. 

112  College  Avenue — This  building  houses  the  offices  of  the 
Department  of  English  and  of  the  Department  of  Foreign  Languages. 

Chapel — This  building  houses  the  main  sanctuary  and  medita- 
tion chapel,  the  Office  of  the  Chaplain,  faculty  offices  of  Departments 
of  Religion,  Philosophy,  and  Sociology,  classrooms,  a  fellowship 
room,  and  the  Student  Christian  Association  room. 

22 


Support  and  Control 


Lebanon  Valley  College  receives  support  from  the  Christian 
j  Service  Fund  Budget  of  the  Evangelical  United  Brethren  Church, 
individual  congregations  of  the  denomination  in  the  Eastern  and 
Susquehanna  Conferences,  endowments,  and  the  Pennsylvania  Foun- 
dation for  Independent  Colleges.  Also,  since  at  Lebanon  Valley  Col- 
lege as  at  most  other  institutions  of  higher  learning  the  tuition  and 
other  annual  charges  paid  by  the  student  do  not  cover  the  total  cost 
of  his  education,  additional  income  is  derived  through  the  Lebanon 
Valley  College  Fund.  The  Fund  is  supported  by  industry,  alumni,  par- 
ents of  students,  and  other  friends  of  the  College. 

Total  assets  of  Lebanon  Valley  College  exceed  $9,000,000,  in- 
cluding endowment  funds  in  excess  of  $2,151,000.  Aside  from  general 
endowment  income  available  for  unrestricted  purposes,  there  are  a 
number  of  special  funds  designated  for  specific  uses  such  as  professor- 
ships, scholarships,  and  the  library. 

Control  of  the  College  is  vested  in  a  Board  of  Trustees  composed 
of  47  members,  32  of  whom  represent  the  Eastern,  Susquehanna  and 
Virginia  Conferences;  3  of  whom  represent  the  alumni  of  the  institu- 
tion; and  12  of  whom  are  elected  at  large.  Members  of  the  college 
faculty  who  are  departmental  chairmen  are  ex-officio  members  of  the 
Board  of  Trustees. 

Endowment  Funds 
(June  30,  1966) 

UNRESTRICTED 

For  General  Purposes 

RESTRICTED 

Professorship  Funds 

Chair  of  English  Bible  and  Greek  Testament 

Josephine  Bittinger  Eberly  Professorship  of  Latin  Language 

and  Literature 
John  Evans  Lehman  Chair  of  Mathematics 
The  Rev.  J.  B.  Weidler  Endowment  Fund 
The  Ford  Foundation 

23 


SUPPORT  AND  CONTROL 

Restricted  Other 

Bishop  J.  Balmer  Showers  Lectureship  Fund 
Karl  Milton  Karnegie  Fund 

Special  Fund— Faculty  Salaries 
The  Batdorf  Fund 
E.  N.  Funkhouser  Fund 
Mr.  and  Mrs.  C.  H.  Horn  Fund 
Mary  I.  Shumberger  Memorial  Fund 
Woodrow  W.  Waltermeyer  Professorship  Fund 

Library  Funds 

Library  Fund  of  Class  of  1916 

Class  of  1956  Library  Endowment  Fund 

Dr.  Lewis  J.  and  Leah  Miller  Leiby  Library  Fund 

Maintenance  Funds 

Hiram  E.  Steinmetz  Memorial  Room  Fund 

Equipment  Funds 

Dr.  Warren  H.  Fake  and  Mabel  A.  Fake  Science  Memorial 

Fund 
Williams  Foundation  Endowment  Fund 

Publicity  Funds 

Harnish-Houser  Publicity  Fund 

Scholarship  Funds 

Allegheny  Conference  C.E.  Scholarship  Fund 

A.F.S.  Scholarship  Fund 

Alumni  Scholarship  Fund 

Dorothy  Jean  Bachman  Scholarship  Fund 

Lillian  Merle  Bachman  Scholarship  Fund 

Baltimore  Fifth  Church,  Otterbein  Memorial  Sunday  School 

Scholarship  Fund 
E.  M.  Baum  Scholarship  Fund 
Andrew  and  Ruth  Bender  Scholarship  Fund 
Cloyd  and  Mary  Bender  Scholarship  Fund 
Biological  Scholarship  Fund 
Eliza  Bittinger  Scholarship  Fund 
Mary  A.  Bixler  Scholarship  Fund 
I.  T.  Buffington  Scholarship  Fund 
Alice  Evers  Burtner  Memorial  Award  Fund 
Mr.  and  Mrs.  D.  Clark  Carmean  Scholarship  Fund 
Collegiate  Scholarship  Fund  of  Evangelical  United  Brethren 

Church 

24 


Isaiah  H.  Daugherty  and  Benjamin  P.  Raab  Memorial 

Scholarship  Fund 
Senator  James  J.  Davis  Scholarship  Fund 
William  E.  Duff  Scholarship  Fund 
Derickson  Scholarship  Fund 

East  Pennsylvania  Conference  C.E.  Scholarship  Fund 
East  Pennsylvania  Branch  W.S.W.S.  Scholarship  Fund 
Samuel  F.  and  Agnes  F.  Engle  Scholarship  Fund 
M.  C.  Favinger  and  Wife  Scholarship  Fund 
Fred  E.  Foos  Scholarship  Fund 
C.  C.  Gingrich  Scholarship  Fund 
G.  D.  Gossard  and  Wife  Scholarship  Fund 
Margaret  Verda  Graybill  Memorial  Scholarship  Fund 
Peter  Graybill  Scholarship  Fund 
Jacob  F.  Greasly  Scholarship  Fund 
Harrisburg  Otterbein  Church  of  The  United  Brethren 

In  Christ  Scholarship  Fund 
Harrisburg  Otterbein  Sunday  School  Scholarship  Fund 
Alice  M.  Heagy  Scholarship  Fund 
J.  M.  Heagy  and  Wife  Scholarship  Fund 
Bertha  Foos  Heinz  Scholarship  Fund 
Harvey  E.  Herr  Memorial  Scholarship  Fund 
Edwin  M.  Hershey  Scholarship  Fund 
Merle  M.  Hoover  Scholarship  Fund 
Judge  S.  C.  Huber  Scholarship  Fund 
Cora  Appleton  Huber  Scholarship  Fund 
H.  S.  Immel  Scholarship  Fund 
Henry  G.  and  Anna  S.  Kauffman  and  Family  Scholarship  Fund 


25 


SUPPORT  AND  CONTROL 

John  A.  H.  Keith  Fund 

Barbara  June  Kettering  Scholarship  Fund 

Rev.  and  Mrs.  J.  E.  and  Rev.  A.  H.  Kleffman  Scholarship  Fund 

Dorothea  Killinger  Scholarship  Fund 

A.  S.  Kreider  Ministerial  Scholarship  Fund 

W.  E.  Kreider  Scholarship  Fund 

Maude  P.  Laughlin  Scholarship  Fund 

Lebanon  Steel  Foundry  Foundation  Scholarship  Fund 

The  Lorenz  Benevolent  Fund 

Mrs.  Edwin  M.  Loux  Scholarship  Fund 

Lykens  Otterbein  Church  Scholarship  Fund 

Mechanicsburg  U.B.  Sunday  School  Scholarship  Fund 

Medical  Scholarship  Fund 

Elizabeth  Meyer  Endowment  Fund 

Elizabeth  May  Meyer  Musical  Scholarship  Fund 

Mrs.  Elizabeth  H.  Millard  Memorial  Scholarship  Fund 

Harry  E.  Miller  Scholarship  Fund 

Bishop  J.  S.  Mills  Scholarship  Fund 

The  Ministerial  .Student  Aid  Gift  Fund  of 

The  Evangelical  United  Brethren  Church 
Elizabeth  A.  Mower  Beneficiary  Fund 
Neidig  Memorial  Church  Ministerial  Scholarship  Fund 
Grace  U.B.  Church  of  Penbrook,  Penna.  Scholarship  Fund 
Pennsylvania  Branch  W.S.W.S.  Scholarship  Fund  in  Memory  of 

Dr.  Paul  E.  V.  Shannon 
Pennsylvania  Conference  C.E.  Scholarship  Fund 


26 


SUPPORT  AND  CONTROL 

Pennsylvania  Conference  Youth  Fellowship  Scholarship  Fund 

People's  National  Bank  Achievement  Award  in  Economics 

Philadelphia  Lebanon  Valley  College  Alumni  Scholarship  Fund 

Rev.  H.  C.  Phillips  Scholarship  Fund 

Sophia  Plitt  Scholarship  Fund 

Quincy  Evangelical  United  Brethren  Orphanage  and  Home 

Scholarship  Fund 
Ezra  G.  Ranck  and  Wife  Scholarship  Fund 
Levi  S.  Reist  Scholarship  Fund 
G.  A.  Richie  Scholarship  Fund 
Emmett  C.  Roop  Scholarship  Fund 
Harvey  L.  Seltzer  Scholarship  Fund 
Rev.  and  Mrs.  Cawley  H.  Stine  Scholarship  Fund 
Dr.  Alfred  D.  Strickler  and  Louise  Kreider  Strickler 

Pre-Medical  Scholarship  Fund 
Washington,  D.  C  Memorial  E.U.B.  Ministerial  Scholarship 

Fund 
Henry  L.  Wilder  Scholarship  Fund 
J.  C.  Winter  Scholarship  Fund 

Student  Loan  Funds 

Mary  A.  Dodge  Loan  Fund 
Daniel  Eberly  Scholarship  Fund 

Prize  Funds 

Bradford  C.  Alban  Memorial  Award  Fund 

The  L.  G.  Bailey  Award 

Henry  H.  Baish  Memorial  Fund 

Andrew  Bender  Memorial  Chemistry  Fund 

The  Class  of  1964  Quittapahilla  Award  Fund 

Governor  James  H.  Duff  Award 

The  French  Club  Prize  Fund 

Florence  Wolf  Knauss  Memorial  Award  in  Music 

La  Vie  Collegienne  Award  Fund 

Max  F.  Lehman  Fund 

The  David  E.  Long  Memorial  Fund 

Pickwell  Memorial  Music  Award 

The  Rosenberry  Award 

Wallace-Light-Wingate  Award 

The  Salome  Wingate  Sanders  Award  in  Music  Education 

Annuity  Funds 
Rev.  A.  H.  Kleffman  and  Erma  L.  Kleffman 
E.  Roy  Line  Annuity 
Ruth  Detwiler  Rettew  Annuity  Fund 

27 


3^ 

r,%, 

4< 

+* 

•    ll 

V 

ift 

| 

■  W       ~'«t 

~fj*n"« 

Lftji; 

Hi 

Looking  lo  the  Future 


Lebanon  Valley  College  concluded  its  Centennial  observance  on 
j  April  6-8,  1967,  with  a  Symposium  on  the  liberal  arts  and  sciences 
and  a  final  academic  Convocation.  These  programs  celebrated  the 
one  hundredth  anniversary  of  the  granting  of  the  College  Charter  and 
brought  to  an  end  a  fifteen  month  period  of  outstanding  commemo- 
rative events. 

During  this  same  period  of  time  a  long  range  development  pro- 
gram based  on  a  study  by  Howell  Lewis  Shay  and  Associates  was 
put  into  effect.  As  a  part  of  this  program  a  most  successful  Centen- 
nial Fund  campaign  resulted  in  the  raising  of  almost  $1.5  million 
among  the  supporting  Church,  alumni,  and  friends  of  Lebanon  Valley 
College.  Visible  evidence  of  the  success  of  the  development  program 
is  offered  by  the  beautiful  new  Chapel  which  has  risen  on  the  center 
campus,  as  well  as  by  the  renovated  Lynch  Memorial  Physical  Educa- 
tion building.  Plans  are  well  along  for  a  College  Center  which  will 
serve  as  a  focal  point  for  social  life  on  campus,  and  additional  science 
and  fine  arts  facilities  are  in  the  offing. 

All  these  things  are,  of  course,  means  to  an  end  rather  than  ends 
in  themselves.  They  are  meant  to  be  the  instruments  by  which  the 
College  can  continue  to  carry  on  a  high  level  educational  program  in 
all  its  phases,  academic,  spiritual,  social,  and  physical.  As  Lebanon 
Valley  College  begins  its  second  century  of  service,  it  is  very  conscious 
of  the  dream  of  its  forefathers,  expressed  in  its  founding  instrument, 
that  it  be  "an  institution  of  learning  of  high  grade."  It  aims  to  be 
essentially  what  it  is  now,  a  college  of  the  liberal  arts  and  sciences  that 
takes  its  historic  Christian  origin  and  current  relationship  seriously. 

It  will  continue  to  be  a  relatively  small  institution,  with  a  cur- 
riculum appropriate  both  in  size  and  type  to  such  an  institution. 
It  will  seek  to  maintain  and  add  to  its  faculty  persons  who  are  both 
thoroughly  prepared  in  their  discipline  and  just  as  thoroughly  com- 
mitted to  the  cause  of  liberal  education  in  a  church  related  college. 
It  will  seek  to  attract  students  who  will  be  able  to  show  the  greatest 
intellectual  and  personal  growth  from  what  the  College  has  to  offer 
them.  And  thus  begin  the  exciting  years  of  the  second  century. 

29 


General  Information 


/r  Admission    32 

Q  Student  Finances   36 

d 

([  Financial   Aid    40 

<E 

\  Academic  Procedures    42 

JS  Administrative  Regulations   46 

/r  Auxiliary  Schools 49 

(£  Enrollment  Statistics   51 


Admission 


Students  are  admitted  to  Lebanon  Valley  College  on  the  basis 
of  scholarly  achievement,  intellectual  capacity,  character,  per- 
sonality, and  ability  to  profit  by  college  experience. 

General  Information 

1.  All  communications  concerning  admission  should  be  ad- 
dressed to  the  Director  of  Admissions,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  Ann- 
ville,  Pennsylvania. 

2.  Applications  should  be  submitted  as  early  as  possible  in  the 
latter  part  of  the  junior  or  the  beginning  of  the  senior  year  of  high 
school  or  preparatory  school. 

3.  Applications  must  be  filed  on  forms  provided  by  the  Office 
of  Admissions. 

4.  Each  application  must  be  accompanied  by  an  application  fee 
of  $10.00.  This  fee  is  not  refundable. 

5.  A  transcript  of  the  secondary  school  record,  on  a  form  pro- 
vided by  the  college  for  that  purpose,  must  be  sent  by  the  principal 
to  the  Director  of  Admissions.  May  1  is  the  deadline  for  receiving 
applications. 

6.  A  student  transferring  from  another  collegiate  institution 
must  present  an  official  transcript  of  his  scholastic  record  and  evidence 
of  honorable  dismissal. 

7.  All  new  students  are  required  to  present  on  or  before  August 
20  the  official  Health  Record  showing  a  physician's  report  of  medical 
examination;  certification  of  vaccination  within  a  period  of  five  years 
and  immunization  against  flu,  polio,  and  tetanus  given  just  prior  to 
the  student's  entrance  to  college. 

Admission  is  based  on  total  information  submitted  by  the  appli- 
cant or  in  his  behalf.  Final  decision,  therefore,  cannot  be  reached  until 
all  information  has  been  supplied  by  the  applicant. 

Factors  Determining  Admission 
Each  candidate  for  admission  will  be  considered  individually  and 
the  decision  of  the  Admissions  Committee  with  respect  to  admission 
will  be  based  on  the  following  factors: 

32 


ADMISSION 

1.  The  transcript  of  the  applicant's  secondary  school  record. 

2.  Recommendation  by  the  principal,  teachers,  and  other  re- 
sponsible persons  as  to  the  applicant's  special  abilities,  integrity,  sense 
of  responsibility,  seriousness  of  purpose,  initiative,  self-reliance,  and 
concern  for  others. 

3.  A  personal  interview,  whenever  possible,  with  the  Director 
of  Admissions  or  his  designate. 

4.  College  Entrance  Examination  Board  test  results:  (a)  Scho- 
lastic Aptitude  Test,  (b)  three  achievement  tests — English  composi- 
tion and  two  optional  tests.  All  candidates  for  admission  are  required 
to  take  the  Scholastic  Aptitude  Test  and  three  achievement  tests — 
English  composition  and  any  other  two.  Those  seeking  entrance  in 
September  are  advised  to  take  these  tests  no  later  than  in  the  preced- 
ing December  and/or  January.  Full  information  concerning  dates  and 
locations  of  these  test  administrations  may  be  obtained  by  writing  to: 
College  Entrance  Examination  Board,  P.O.  Box  592,  Princeton,  N.  J. 

5.  Additional  test  results  which  may  be  required  in  special  cases 
by  the  Committee  on  Admissions. 

Department  of  Music 

An  applicant  to  the  Music  or  Music  Education  curriculum  is 
expected  to  satisfy  the  general  requirements  for  admission.  In  addi- 
tion, the  candidate  must  appear  for  an  audition  before  members  of 
the  music  faculty  and  show  evidence  of: 

a.  An  acceptable  singing  voice  and  a  fairly  quick  sense  of  tone 
and  rhythm; 

b.  Ability  to  sing  at  sight  hymn  and  folk  tunes  with  a  fair  degree 
of  accuracy  and  facility; 

c.  Ability  to  sing  or  to  play  the  piano,  organ,  or  some  orchestral 
instrument  at  a  level  representing  three  years  of  study. 


ADMISSION 

Recommended  Units  for  Admission 

It  is  recommended  that  all  candidates  offer  sixteen  units  of  en- 
trance credit  and  graduation  from  an  accredited  secondary  school  or 
submit  an  equivalency  certificate  acquired  through  examination. 

Ten  of  the  sixteen  units  offered  for  admission  must  be  from  the 
following  subjects:  English,  foreign  language,  mathematics,  science, 
and  social  studies. 

An  applicant  for  admission  whose  preparatory  courses  do  not 
coincide  with  the  distribution  of  subject  units  (see  below)  may  be 
considered  by  the  Committee  on  Admissions  if  his  academic  record 
is  of  high  quality  and  if,  in  the  opinion  of  the  Committee,  he  appears 
to  be  qualified  to  do  college  work  satisfactorily.  All  entrance  defi- 
ciencies must  be  removed  before  sophomore  academic  status  will  be 
granted. 

DISTRIBUTION  OF  SUBJECT  UNITS 

English 4  units 

^Foreign  Language  (in  one  language) 2     " 

Mathematics    2     " 

Science  (laboratory)    1     " 

Social  Studies 1     " 

Electives 6     " 

Total  required   16     " 

Transfer  Credit 

A  student  applying  for  advanced  standing  at  Lebanon  Valley 
College  after  having  attended  another  accredited  institution  of  higher 
education  shall  submit  an  official  transcript  of  his  record  and  evidence 
of  good  standing  to  the  Director  of  Admissions.  He  must  also  submit 
College  Board  Aptitude  and  Achievement  Test  scores. 

Credits  are  accepted  for  transfer  provided  the  grades  received 
are  C  (2.0)  or  better  and  the  work  is  equivalent  or  similar  to  work 
offered  at  Lebanon  Valley  College.  Grades  thus  transferred  count 
for  hours  only,  not  for  quality  points. 

Students  transferring  from  two-year  institutions  are  required  to 
have  sixty  hours  of  work  at  a  four-year  institution  as  well  as  to  meet 
the  residence  requirements  at  Lebanon  Valley  College.  (See  page  55.) 


*  If  an  applicant  cannot  present  the  two  units  of  foreign  language,  he  will  be  required  to 
take  a  minimum  of  two  years  of  one  language  in  college.  His  credits  for  this  work  will  be 
counted  toward  graduation  requirements. 

34 


ADMISSION 

Transfer  students  may  be  required  to  take  placement  examina- 
tions to  demonstrate  adequate  preparation  for  advanced  courses 
at  Lebanon  Valley  College. 

Subject  to  the  conditions  listed  in  the  second  paragraph,  Lebanon 
Valley  College  will  recognize  for  transfer  credit  a  maximum  of  fifteen 
hours  of  USAFI  course  work  provided  such  credit  is  recommended 
by  the  American  Council  on  Education  publication,  A  Guide  to  the 
Evaluation  of  Experiences  in  the  Armed  Services. 

Credit  will  not  be  granted  for  correspondence  courses. 

Advanced  Placement 

Advanced  placement  and/or  credit  may  be  granted  to  entering 
students  who  make  scores  of  3,  4,  or  5  on  the  College  Board  Ad- 
vanced Placement  examination. 

Advanced  placement  without  credit  may  be  granted  on  the 
basis  of  the  Achievement  Tests  of  the  College  Board  Examinations  or 
such  other  proficiency  tests  as  may  be  determined  by  the  Dean  of 
the  College  and  by  the  chairman  of  the  department  in  which  ad- 
vanced placement  is  sought. 


35 


Student  Finances 


Lebanon  Valley  College  is  a  private  non-profit  institution.  It 
i  derives  its  financial  support  from  endowment  and  gifts  from  the 
Evangelical  United  Brethren  Church,  alumni,  industry,  and  friends 
and  from  the  tuition,  fees,  and  other  charges  paid  by  the  students. 
The  cost  to  the  student  is  maintained  at  a  level  consistent  with  ade- 
quate facilities  and  high  quality  instruction. 

Fees  and  Deposits 

An  application  fee  of  $10.00  which  is  not  refundable  is  charged 
each  applicant  to  apply  against  the  cost  of  processing  his  application 
for  admission.  An  admission  deposit  of  $100.00,  payable  within  ten 
days  of  notification  of  acceptance,  is  required  of  all  new  (including 
transfer)  students.  Until  this  deposit  is  paid  the  student  is  not  guaran- 
teed a  place  in  the  entering  class.  The  admission  deposit  is  not  re- 
fundable; it  will  be  applied  to  the  student's  account  upon  registration. 

1968-1969  Fee  Structure  for  full-time  degree  candidates: 

Resident  Non-Resident 

Standard  Charges  Each  Semester  Each  Semester 

Tuition  and  Fees $    900  $900 

Room  and  Board 450 


$1,350  $900 

Students  may  be  subject  to  the  following  additional  fees  and 
charges,  depending  upon  their  program: 

Laboratories,  in  excess  of  one  per  semester: 

Science,  Languages   $15.00  per  semester 

All   other  laboratories    10.00    " 

Student  Teaching: 

Elementary    90.00  per  semester 

Secondary    45.00    " 

Music     30.00    " 

Music  Fees: 

Private  music  instruction  ( Vz  hour  per 

week,  15  weeks)   60.00.  " 

36 


STUDENT  FINANCES 

Class  music  instruction 

( 1  hour  per  week)    40.00  per  semester 

Organ,  practice  rental 

(per  hour  per  week)    8.00    " 

Band  and  orchestral  instrument  rental  15.00    " 
Transcript,  in  excess  of  one  per  year  ....        1.00 

The  insurance  fee  in  the  amount  of  $15.00  is  collected  in  the 
first  semester  of  the  student's  enrollment  and  a  pro-rata  charge  ap- 
plies to  the  student  who  first  enrolls  in  the  second  semester. 

The  contingency  deposit  in  the  amount  of  S25.00  must  be  made 
before  registration  and  is  required  of  all  full-time  students  and  will 
be  refunded  upon  graduation  or  withdrawal  from  college  provided 
no  damage  has  been  caused  by  the  student.  All  student  breakage  that 
occurs  in  college-operated  facilities  will  be  charged  against  this  de- 
posit and  the  amount  must  be  repaid  to  the  College  within  30  days  of 
notice  to  the  student. 

A  fee  of  $10.00  is  charged  each  student  who  does  not  register 
for  classes  during  any  prescribed  registration  period.  A  fee  of  $2.00  is 
charged  for  every  change  of  course  made  at  the  student's  request  after 
registration  day. 

The  fee  for  part-time  students  (less  than  12  credit  hours  per 
semester)  is  $60.00  per  semester  credit  hour  plus  a  $2.00  registration 
fee;  the  fee  for  credit  hours  in  excess  of  16  credit  hours  per  semester 
is  $40.00;  fractional  hours  of  credit  are  charged  proportionately. 

Auxiliary  School  Fee  Structure  (Evening  and  Summer) 
Tuition,  $40.00  per  semester  credit  hour 
Registration  Fee,  $2.00 

Payment  of  Fees  and  Deposits 

Semester  charges  are  due  and  payable  in  full  on  September  1 
(first  semester)  and  January  1  (second  semester)  as  a  condition  for 
registration.  Those  preferring  to  pay  semester  charges  in  monthly  in- 
stallments are  invited  to  consult  with  the  business  office  regarding  de- 
ferred payment  plans  offered  by  various  financial  institutions.  Arrange- 
ments for  deferred  payment  plans  shall  be  completed  prior  to  the 
above  dates  and  as  a  condition  for  registration. 

A  satisfactory  settlement  of  all  college  accounts  is  required  be- 
for  grades  are  released,  honorable  dismissal  granted,  or  degree  con- 
ferred. 

37 


Refund  Policy 

Refunds,  as  indicated  below,  are  allowed  only  to  students  who 
officially  withdraw  from  the  College  by  completing  the  clearance 
procedure: 

Period  of  student's  attendance  in  college 

from   date  classes  begin  %  of  tuition  refunded 

Less  than  two  weeks   75% 

Between  two  and  three  weeks 50% 

Over  three  weeks   0% 

A  refund  on  board  charge  is  allowed  for  the  period  beginning 
after  honorable  official  withdrawal. 

No  refund  is  allowed  on  student  charges  when  a  student  retains 
his  class  standing  during  his  absence  from  college  because  of  illness  or 
for  any  other  reason. 

No  refund  is  allowed  on  room  charges.  No  refund  is  allowed  on 
room  deposit  except  when  withdrawal  results  from  suspension  or  dis- 
missal by  College  action  or  when  withdrawal  results  from  entrance  into 
active  military  service. 

Residence  Halls 

Residence  hall  rooms  are  reserved  only  for  those  returning  stu- 
dents who  make  an  advance  room  reservation  deposit  of  $50.00. 
(Receipt  must  be  presented  at  the  time  of  room  sign-up  which  occurs 
immediately  after  the  Easter  Vacation.) 

Occupants  are  held  responsible  for  all  breakage  and  loss  of 
furniture,  or  any  damage  for  which  they  are  responsible. 

Each  room  in  the  men's  residence  halls  is  furnished  with  chests 

38 


STUDENT  FINANCES 

of  drawers,  book  case,  beds,  mattresses,  chairs,  and  study  tables. 
Students  must  provide  bedding,  rugs,  lamps,  and  all  other  furnishings. 

Each  room  in  the  women's  residence  halls  is  furnished  with  beds, 
mattresses,  chairs,  dressers,  book  case,  and  study  tables.  Drapes  are 
provided  in  Mary  Green  Hall  and  Vickroy  Hall.  Other  desired  fur- 
nishings must  be  supplied  by  the  student. 

Students  rooming  in  residence  halls  may  not  sublet  their  rooms 
to  commuting  students  or  to  others. 

Since  Lebanon  Valley  College  is  primarily  a  boarding  institu- 
tion, all  students  are  required  to  live  in  college-owned  or  controlled 
residence  halls.  Exceptions  to  the  above  are:  married  students,  stu- 
dents living  with  immediate  relatives,  or  those  living  in  their  own 
homes  who  commute  daily  to  the  campus. 

Should  vacancies  occur  in  any  of  the  residence  halls,  the  college 
reserves  the  right  to  require  students  rooming  in  the  community  to 
move  into  a  residence  hall. 

The  College  reserves  the  right  to  close  all  residence  halls  dur- 
ing vacations  and  between  semesters. 

The  College  reserves  the  right  to  inspect  students1  rooms  for 
disciplinary  purposes. 

The  College  is  not  responsible  for  loss  of  personal  possessions  by 
the  students. 

Lounges  are  provided  by  the  College  for  resident  and  commuting 
students. 

Meals 

All  resident  students  are  required  to  take  their  meals  in  the 
College  Dining  Hall.  Commuting  students  may  arrange  for  meals 
Monday  through  Friday,  if  space  is  available. 


Financial  Aid 


Lebanon  Valley  College  offers  financial  assistance  to  deserving 
j  students  who  have  been  accepted  for  admission  and  who  apply 
for  such  aid  insofar  as  its  aid  funds  permit.  Financial  aid  is  offered  on 
the  basis  of  academic  attainment,  promise  or  special  talent,  and  finan- 
cial need  in  the  form  of  scholarships,  grants,  loans,  and  employment 
or  a  combination  thereof. 

Recognizing  our  relationship  to  the  Evangelical  United  Brethren 
Church,  financial  assistance  is  available  to  the  children  of  the  Evan- 
gelical United  Brethren  clergymen  and  preministerial  students. 

Students  applying  for  financial  aid  must  submit  the  Parents' 
Confidential  Statement  through  the  College  Scholarship  Service,  Box 
176,  Princeton,  New  Jersey,  08540.  High  School  seniors  may  obtain 
these  forms  in  the  High  School  Guidance  Office;  students  enrolled  in 
College  may  obtain  these  forms  in  the  College  Financial  Aid  Office. 

Inasmuch  as  financial  aid  can  be  offered  by  the  College  only 
after  a  Parents'  Confidential  Statement  is  on  file  in  the  College  Finan- 
cial Aid  Office,  all  students  applying  for  financial  aid  should  submit 
this  form  as  early  as  possible  but  no  later  than  April  1. 

Applicants  for  financial  aid  and  students  receiving  financial  aid 
are  obligated  to  report  the  excess  above  $100  of  all  aid  from  non- 
college  controlled  sources  (prizes,  awards,  grants,  scholarships,  and 
loans).  The  College  reserves  the  right  to  review  and  revise  the  recipi- 
ent's financial  aid  package  in  view  of  any  outside  aid  that  he  receives. 

Employment 

Financial  assistance  is  available  in  the  form  of  waiterships,  jani- 
torships,  laboratory  aids,  clerical  aids,  library  aids  and  other  forms  of 
work  assignments.  Employment  is  granted  to  deserving  students  on  the 
basis  of  the  requirements  of  the  College. 

Loans 

The  National  Defense  Education  Loan  Program  is  available  to 
students  at  Lebanon  Valley  College.  Application  must  be  made  no 
later  than  April  1. 

The  Lebanon  Valley  College  Loan  Fund  is  also  available  to  stu- 
dents on  a  short  term  basis.  Loans  are  interest-free  while  the  student 
is  in  College.  A  nominal  rate  of  interest  is  charged  following  gradua- 
tion or  withdrawal  from  College. 

40 


Academic  Procedures 


Registration 

Students  are  required  to  register  for  classes  on  official  registra- 
tion days  of  each  semester  and  on  designated  pre-registration  days. 
Information  concerning  the  dates  for  official  registration  is  listed 
in  the  College  Calendar,  pages  2-3. 

Late  Registration 

Students  registering  later  than  the  days  specified  will  be  charged 
a  late  registration  fee  of  ten  dollars.  Students  desiring  to  register  later 
than  one  week  after  the  opening  of  the  semester  will  be  admitted  only 
by  special  permission  of  the  Dean  of  the  College.  Students  who  do  not 
pre-register  during  the  designated  time  will  be  charged  a  late  pre- 
registration  fee  of  ten  dollars. 

Change  of  Registration 

Change  of  registration,  when  necessary,  must  be  made  over  the 
signature  of  the  adviser.  Registration  for  a  course  will  not  be  per- 
mitted after  the  course  has  been  in  session  for  one  full  week.  A  stu- 
dent may  withdraw  from  a  course  at  any  time  within  the  first  six 
weeks  of  classes  in  a  semester  without  prejudice. 

Orientation  for  New  Students 

A  spring  orientation  day  is  held  annually  for  incoming  fresh- 
men. At  this  time  the  activities  include  a  general  orientation  to  the 
College,  diagnostic  testing,  counseling  with  academic  advisers  and 
registration  for  courses.  Special  sessions  for  parents  are  a  vital  part 
of  the  program. 

An  orientation  day  for  transfer  students  is  held  in  early  summer. 
At  that  time,  academic  counseling  and  registration  for  courses  are 
held. 

An  orientation  period  of  several  days,  Freshman  Week,  at  the 
beginning  of  the  college  year  is  provided  to  help  new  students,  both 
freshmen  and  transfers,  to  become  familiar  with  their  academic  sur- 
roundings. This  time  is  devoted  to  discussion  of  summer  reading 
books,  lectures,  social  activities,  and  informal  meetings  with  mem- 
bers of  the  faculty. 

42 


During  the  first  semester  all  freshmen  and  transfer  students  are 
required  to  participate  in  an  orientation  course  which  includes  a 
series  of  lectures  and  discussions  on  campus  activities  and  methods 
of  study. 

Discontinuance  of  Course 

The  College  reserves  the  right  to  withdraw  or  discontinue  any 
course  for  which  an  insufficient  number  of  students  have  registered. 

Repetition  of  Courses 

No  student  shall  be  permitted  to  repeat,  either  for  credit  or  for 
quality  points,  a  course  for  which  he  has  already  received  a  passing 
grade. 

Concurrent  Courses 

A  student  enrolled  for  a  degree  at  Lebanon  Valley  College  may 
not  carry  courses  concurrently  at  any  other  institution  without  the  con- 
sent of  his  major  adviser  and  the  Dean  of  the  College.  Neither  may  a 
regular  student  carry  work  concurrently  in  evening  or  extension 
courses  without  the  permission  of  the  major  adviser  and  the  Dean  of 
the  College. 

A  student  registered  at  Lebanon  Valley  College  may  not  obtain 
credit  for  courses  taken  in  other  colleges  during  the  summer  unless 
such  courses  have  prior  approval  of  the  major  adviser  and  the  Dean 
of  the  College. 

Auditing  Courses 

Full-time  students  are  permitted  to  register  to  audit  courses  with 
the  consent  of  the  instructor  and  the  academic  adviser.  The  regular 

43 


ACADEMIC  PROCEDURES 

tuition  fee  is  charged.  Neither  grade  nor  credit  is  given  either  at  the 
time  the  course  is  audited  or  thereafter. 

Faculty  Advisers 

Each  student  is  assigned  a  faculty  adviser  who  serves  in  the 
capacity  of  friendly  counselor. 

The  student,  before  registering  for  the  second  year,  or  the  third 
year,  at  the  latest,  must  choose  a  department  or  a  curriculum  in  which 
to  pursue  work  of  special  concentration.  This  department  or  curricu- 
lum shall  be  known  as  his  major.  The  head  of  the  department  or  the 
curriculum  in  which  the  student  has  elected  to  major  becomes  the 
adviser  for  that  student.  The  adviser's  approval  is  necessary  before  a 
student  may  register  for  or  discontinue  any  course. 

Arrangement  of  Schedules 

Each  student  arranges  his  course  of  study  and  his  class  schedule 
in  consultation  with,  and  approval  of,  his  faculty  adviser.  Students 
already  in  attendance  do  this  during  pre-registration  periods.  Informa- 
tion concerning  faculty  advisers  is  given  to  new  students  at  the  Spring 
Orientation  Day. 

Limit  of  Hours 

To  be  classified  as  full-time,  a  student  must  take  at  least  twelve 
semester  hours  of  work.  Sixteen  semester  hours  of  work  is  the  maxi- 
mum permitted  without  special  permission  of  the  Dean  of  the  College; 
Physical  Education  carries  no  credit. 

The  privilege  of  carrying  extra  hours  will  be  granted  only  for 
compelling  reasons  and  only  when  a  satisfactory  grade  level  has  been 
maintained  for  the  previous  semester.  An  additional  charge  will  be 
made  for  all  hours  above  sixteen. 

Academic  Classification 

Students  are  classified  academically  at  the  beginning  of  each  year. 
Membership  in  the  sophomore,  junior,  or  senior  classes  is  granted  to 
those  students  who  have  earned  a  minimum  of  28,  56,  or  84  semester 
hours  credit  respectively. 

All  entrance  deficiencies  must  be  removed  before  the  academic 
status  of  sophomore  is  granted. 

Counseling  and  Placement 

Lebanon  Valley  College  recognizes  as  part  of  its  responsibility  to 
its  students  the  need  for  providing  sound  educational,  vocational,  and 

44 


ACADEMIC  PROCEDURES 

personal  counseling.  Measures  of  interest,  ability,  aptitude,  and  per- 
sonality, in  addition  to  other  counseling  techniques,  are  utilized  in  an 
effort  to  help  each  student  come  to  a  fuller  realization  of  his  capabili- 
ties and  personality.  An  important  part  of  the  counseling  program 
consists  of  a  series  of  lectures  and  discussions  conducted  as  a  non- 
credit  orientation  course  for  new  students. 

Placement  services  are  provided  by  the  College  for  aiding  stu- 
dents in  procuring  part-time  employment  while  in  college  and  in  ob- 
taining positions  upon  graduation.  A  current  file  is  maintained  which 
contains  information  about  positions  in  various  companies  and  insti- 
tutions, Civil  Service  opportunities  and  examinations,  entrance  to  pro- 
fessional schools,  assistantships,  and  fellowships.  Representatives  of 
business,  industry,  and  educational  institutions  visit  the  campus  an- 
nually to  interview  seniors  for  prospective  employment.  A  file  of 
credentials  and  activities  of  those  students  availing  themselves  of  the 
services  is  available  to  prospective  employers.  Graduates  may  keep 
their  individual  files  active  by  reporting  additional  information  to  the 
Director  of  Placement  Services. 

A  Teacher  Placement  Bureau  is  maintained  which  assists  students 
in  finding  positions. 

Records  of  students'  credentials  in  all  areas  of  the  students' 
activities  are  on  file. 


45 


Administrative  Regulations 


The  rules  of  the  college  are  designed  to  provide  for  proper 
regulation  of  the  academic  community.  The  rules  and  regulations 
as  stated  in  this  bulletin  are  announcements  and  in  no  way  serve  as  a 
contract  between  the  student  and  the  College.  Attendance  at  the  Col- 
lege is  a  privilege  and  not  a  right.  The  student  by  his  act  of  registration 
concedes  to  the  College  the  right  to  require  his  withdrawal  any  time 
deemed  necessary  to  safeguard  the  ideals  of  scholarship  and  character, 
and  to  secure  compliance  with  regulations.  It  is  expected  that  the  con- 
duct of  all  campus  citizens  will  conform  to  accepted  standards.  All  stu- 
dents are  required  to  respond  to  communications  sent  by  any  duly 
constituted  authority  of  the  College. 

Class  Attendance 

Each  student  is  held  responsible  for  knowing  and  meeting  all 
requirements  for  each  course,  including  regular  class  attendance. 
Because  of  differences  in  various  disciplines,  specific  regulations  gov- 
erning class  attendance  are  set  by  each  department,  approved  by  the 
Dean  of  the  College,  and  administered  by  the  instructor.  At  the  open- 
ing of  each  course  the  instructor  will  clearly  inform  the  students  of  the 
regulations  on  class  attendance.  Violations  of  class  attendance  regula- 
tions will  make  the  student  liable  to  being  dropped  from  the  course 
with  a  failing  grade,  upon  the  recommendation  of  the  instructor  and 
with  the  approval  of  the  Dean  of  the  College. 

Excused  absences  are  granted  by  the  Registrar's  office  only  for 
bona  fide  medical  and  compelling  personal  reasons,  or  for  participation 
in  official  functions  of  the  College.  Students  on  academic  probation 
are  permitted  only  excused  absences. 

Excused  absences  do  not  absolve  the  student  from  the  necessity 
of  fulfilling  all  course  requirements. 

Chapel  Attendance 

Chapel  service  is  conducted  once  a  week.  Attendance  is  required  of 
all  full-time  students.  Five  absences  are  allowed  during  a  semester.  For 
each  additional  unexcused  absence  one  hour  will  be  added  to  the  re- 
quired hours  for  graduation. 

46 


ADMINISTRATIVE  REGULATIONS 

Hazing 

Hazing  is  strictly  prohibited.  Any  infringement  by  members  of  other 
classes  upon  the  personal  rights  of  freshmen  as  individuals  is  inter- 
preted as  hazing. 

Cars  and  Student  Parking 

Resident  students  of  the  three  upper  classes  may  have  cars  on 
campus.  Resident  freshmen  students  are  not  permitted  to  have  cars. 

All  cars  owned  or  operated  by  Lebanon  Valley  College  students 
must  be  registered  with  the  student  Men's  Senate  Parking  Commit- 
tee. Violations  of  parking  regulations  established  by  the  Senate  Park- 
ing Committee  may  result  in  fines. 

Transcripts 

Each  student,  former  student,  or  graduate  is  entitled  to  one 
transcript  of  his  college  record  without  charge.  For  each  copy  after  the 
first,  a  fee  of  one  dollar  is  charged. 

Regulations  Regarding  Academic  Probation, 
Suspension,  Dismissal,  Withdrawal 

A.  Probation 

A  student  can  be  placed  on  academic  probation  by  the  Dean 
of  the  College  or  suspended  or  dismissed  if  his  academic  standing  fails 
to  come  up  to  the  grade-point  average  shown  in  the  following  table: 

Probation  Suspension  or  dismissal 

1st    semester    1.25 

2nd  semester   1.50  1.25  cumulative 

3rd  semester    1.50 

4th  semester    1.70  1.50  cumulative 

5th  semester    1.75 

6th  semester    1.75  1.65  cumulative 

7th  and  8th  semesters 1.75  in  all  courses 

A  student  placed  on  academic  probation  is  notified  of  such 
status  by  the  Dean  of  the  College  and  informed  of  the  College  regula- 
tions governing  probationers.  Students  on  probation  are  required  to 
regulate  their  work  and  their  times  so  as  to  make  a  most  determined 
effort  to  bring  their  work  up  to  the  required  standard. 

When  a  student  is  placed  on  academic  probation,  faculty  and 
parents  are  notified  by  the  Dean  of  the  College.  The  Dean  of  the  Col- 
lege may  terminate  the  period  of  probation  of  any  student.  Usually 
this  occurs  at  the  end  of  a  final  marking  period. 

47 


Infraction  of  the  following  regulations  governing  probationers 
render  a  student  liable  to  dismissal: 

1.  No  unexcused  class  absences  will  be  permitted. 

2.  Any  office  or  activity  in  any  College  organization  that  in- 
volves such  expenditure  qf  time  as  to  jeopardize  the  success- 
ful pursuit  of  academic  work  must  be  relinquished. 

B.  Suspension 

1 .  A  student  who  obviously  fails  to  achieve  at  a  level  commen- 
surate with  his  measured  ability  may  be  suspended  for  at  least  one 
semester. 

2.  A  student  suspended  for  academic  reasons  is  not  eligible  for 
reinstatement  for  at  least  one  semester,  preferably  two. 

3.  A  student  seeking  reinstatement  to  Lebanon  Valley  College 
must  apply  in  writing  to  the  Dean  of  the  College. 

4.  Students  suspended  for  academic  reasons  are  not  permitted 
to  register  for  work  in  the  Auxiliary  Schools  except  for  the  most  com- 
pelling reasons  and  then  only  with  the  approval  of  the  Dean  of  the 
College. 

C.  Dismissal 

A  student  dismissed  for  academic  reasons  is  not  eligible  for  re- 
admission. 

D.  Withdrawal  from  College  and  Readmission 

Official  withdrawal  from  College  is  accomplished  only  by  the 
completion  of  the  withdrawal  form  obtained  in  the  Registrar's  Office. 
This  is  the  sole  responsibility  of  the  student. 

Application  for  readmissions  will  be  considered  only  if  the  formal 
withdrawal  procedure  has  been  followed  at  the  time  of  withdrawal. 

48 


Auxiliary  Schools 


Summer,  Extension,  Evening 

Summer  sessions,  evening  classes  on  campus,  and  classes  in  the 
University  Center  at  Harrisburg  have  enabled  teachers,  state  em- 
ployees, and  others  in  active  employment  to  attend  college  courses  and 
secure  academic  degrees.  By  a  careful  selection  of  courses,  made  in 
consultation  with  the  appropriate  adviser,  students  can  meet  many  of 
the  requirements  for  a  baccalaureate  degree.  Some  courses  may  be 
taken  for  permanent  teaching  certification;  others  may  be  taken  with 
the  aim  of  transferring  credit  to  another  institution.  Many  courses 
lead  to  professional  advancement  or  are  of  direct  benefit  to  persons 
in  business  or  industry,  while  others  assist  in  broadening  the  student's 
vocational,  social,  and  cultural  background. 

Summer  School 

Regularly  enrolled  students  may,  by  taking  summer  school 
courses,  meet  the  requirements  for  the  bachelor's  degree  in  three 
years. 

A  course  in  Student  Teaching  (Education  40)  is  offered  in  the 
summer  session  at  Hershey,  Pennsylvania.  It  is  designed  to  meet  the 
minimum  student  teaching  requirements  in  the  secondary  field  toward 
teacher  certification  in  the  Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania. 


Campus  Evening  Classes 

Evening  classes  are  offered  on  the  campus,  Monday  through 
Thursday,  and  carry  residence  credit. 

Separate  brochures  are  published  for  the  Summer  School  and  the 
Evening  Classes.  For  copies  or  for  other  information  pertaining  to 
Summer  School  or  Evening  Classes  write  to  Director  of  Auxiliary 
Schools,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  Annville,  Pennsylvania. 

University  Center  at  Harrisburg 

Extension  classes  are  offered  in  the  William  Penn  High  School, 
Third  and  Division  Streets  and  at  the  Center's  Campus,  2991  North 
Front  Street,  Harrisburg,  17110,  on  Monday  through  Thursday  eve- 
nings. Lebanon  Valley  College's  extension  program  in  Harrisburg  is 
carried  on  in  conjunction  with  Elizabethtown  College,  Temple  Univer- 
sity, the  Pennsylvania  State  University,  and  the  University  of  Penn- 
sylvania. 

For  details  pertaining  to  the  University  Center  at  Harrisburg  write 
or  call  the  director  at  2991  North  Front  Street,  Harrisburg,  Pennsyl- 
vania 17110,  at  238-9694. 

50 


Enrollment  Statistics 

Summary  of  College  Year,  1966-1967 — Cumulative 

Day-time  Full-time  Part-time  Total 

Degree  Students  Men  Women  Total          Men  Women  Total  Men  Women  Total 

Seniors      88          67        155                 1  4  5  89  71  160 

Juniors      90          86        176                 0  3  3  90  89  179 

Sophomores    129          93        222                 1  1  2  130  94  224 

Freshmen    181          94       275                 2  1  3  183  95  278 

Non-degree     2            2            4               10  7  17  12  9  21 

Day-time  Total     ..  490        342       832               14  16  30  504  358  862 

Evening— Campus     ...  52  67  119  52  67  119 
Extension 

Harrisburg     333  312  645  333  312  645 

Grand  Total     490        342        832             399  395  794  889  737  1626 

Names  repeated  -2  -2  -4  -2  -2  -4 

Net  Total     490        343        832            397  393  790  887  735  1622 

*  Music    Specials    28  39  67  28  39  67 

Summer  School,  1967 

College    58  57  115  58         57  115 

*Music   Specials    30  21  51  30  21  51 

*  Not  included  in  totals. 


Summary  of  First  Semester — 1967-1968 

Day-time  Full-time                            Part-time  Total 

Degree  Students  Men  Women  Total          Men  Women  Total  Men  Women  Total 

Seniors      88          75        163                 5            8          13  93  83  176 

Juniors      121          76        197                 1            1            2  122  77  199 

Sophomores    110          74        184                4            3            7  114  77  191 

Freshmen    164        112       276                 0            3            3  164  115  279 

Non-degree     —         —         —               10            3          13  10  3  13 

Day-time  Total     .  .  483        337       820              21          18          39  504  355  859 

Evening— Campus     ...  27          47          74  27  47  74 
Extension 

Harrisburg     223        176       399  218  187  405 

Grand  Total     483        337       820            271        241        512  749  589  1338 

Names  repeated  -0         -4         -4  -0  -4  -4 

Net  Total     483        337        820            271        237        508  749  585  1334 

*  Music    Specials    25          28          53  25  28  53 

*  Not  included  in  totals. 


51 


UlUvi&2 

Academic  Program 


ft  Requirements  for  Degrees 54 

^  Special  Plans  of  Study 59 

S  The  College  Honors  Program 80 


Requirements  lor  Degrees 


Lebanon  valley  college  confers  five  bachelor  degrees.  They  are: 
j  Bachelor  of  Arts,  Bachelor  of  Science,  Bachelor  of  Science  in 
Chemistry,  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Nursing,  and  Bachelor  of  Science 
in  Medical  Technology. 

The  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Arts  is  conferred  upon  students  who 
complete  the  requirements  for  graduation  in  the  following  areas,  and 
who  are  recommended  by  the  faculty  and  approved  by  the  Board  of 
Trustees:  Biology,  English,  French,  German,  Greek,  History,  Latin, 
Mathematics,  Music,  Philosophy,  Physics,  Political  Science,  Psychol- 
ogy, Religion,  Sociology  and  Spanish. 

The  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Science  is  conferred  upon  students 
who  complete  the  requirements  in  the  following  areas,  and  who  are 
recommended  by  the  faculty  and  approved  by  the  Board  of  Trustees: 
Biology,  Chemistry,  Mathematics,  Physics,  Actuarial  Science,  Eco- 
nomics and  Business  Administration,  Elementary  Education,  Music 
Education,  Arts-Engineering,  and  Arts-Forestry. 

The  professional  degrees  of  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Chemistry, 
Bachelor  of  Science  in  Nursing,  and  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Medical 
Technology  are  conferred  upon  students  who  complete  the  require- 
ments in  the  respective  professional  areas  and  who  are  recommended 
by  the  faculty  and  approved  by  the  Board  of  Trustees. 

Semester  Hours 

The  requirements  for  degrees  are  stated  in  "semester  hours  of 
credit"  which  are  based  upon  the  satisfactory  completion  of  courses 
of  instruction.  Generally,  one  semester  hour  credit  is  given  for  each 
class  hour  a  week  throughout  the  semester.  In  courses  requiring 
laboratory  work,  not  less  than  two  hours  of  laboratory  work  a  week 
throughout  a  semester  are  required  for  a  semester  hour  of  credit.  A 
semester  is  a  term  of  approximately  seventeen  weeks. 

Candidates  for  degrees  must  obtain  a  minimum  of  120  semester 
hours  credit  in  academic  work  in  addition  to  the  required  courses  in 
Freshman  and  Sophomore  Physical  Education.  However,  a  student 
who  has  a  physical  disability  may  be  excused  (on  recommendation 

54 


REQUIREMENTS  FOR  DEGREES 

from  the  College  Physician)  from  the  requirement  in  physical  edu- 
cation. 

Major 

As  a  part  of  the  total  requirement  of  120  hours  every  candidate 
for  a  degree  must  present  at  least  twenty-four  semester  hours  of  course 
work  in  one  department  (this  is  his  Major).  A  Major  must  be  selected 
before  the  beginning  of  the  junior  year.  A  student  accepted  as  a  Major 
in  any  department  has  the  right  to  remain  in  that  department  as  long 
as  he  is  in  college. 

Examinations 

Candidates  for  degrees  are  required  to  take  end  of  course  exami- 
nations and  the  Graduate  Record  Examination  in  the  major  field. 

Graduate  Record  Examination 

Candidates  for  degrees  must  take  the  Advanced  Test  of  the  Grad- 
uate Record  Examination  in  their  major  field.  This  examination  is 
prepared  and  scored  by  the  Educational  Testing  Service.  The  tests 
cover  the  entire  field  of  concentration.  The  results  are  made  available 
to  the  student  and  become  a  part  of  his  permanent  record. 

Residence  Requirement 

Degrees  will  be  conferred  only  upon  those  candidates  earning  in 
residence  a  minimum  of  thirty  semester  hours  out  of  the  last  thirty-six 
taken  before  the  date  of  the  conferring  of  the  degree,  or  before  the 
transfer  to  a  cooperating  program.  Residence  credit  is  given  for  course 
work  completed  in  regular  day  classes,  and  in  evening  and  summer 
school  courses  taken  on  campus. 

Grade  Point  Average 

Candidates  for  degrees  must  also  obtain  a  cumulative  grade  point 
average  of  1.75,  computed  in  accordance  with  the  grading  system 
indicated  below. 

In  addition,  candidates  must  earn  a  grade  point  average  of  2.0  in 
the  major  field  of  study. 

System  of  Grading  and  Quality  Points 

The  work  of  a  student  in  each  subject  is  graded  A,  B,  C,  D,  or  F, 
with  the  plus  and  minus  available  to  faculty  members  who  wish  to  use 
them.  These  grades  have  the  following  meanings: 

55 


REQUIREMENTS  FOR  DEGREES 

A — distinguished  performance 

B — superior  work 

C — general  satisfactory  achievement 

D — course  requirements  and  standards  satisfied  at  a  minimum 
level 

F — course  requirements  and  standards  not  satisfied  at  a  mini- 
mum level 

When  a  grade  of  F  has  been  received,  the  student  may  not  pro- 
ceed with  any  part  of  the  course  dependent  upon  the  part  in  which 
the  grade  of  F  has  been  received.  If  a  student  fails  in  a  subject  twice, 
he  may  not  register  for  a  third  time. 

In  addition  to  the  above  grades  the  symbols  "I,"  "W,"  "WP," 
and  "WF"  are  used  on  grade  reports  and  in  college  records.  "I"  indi- 
cates that  the  work  is  incomplete  (that  the  student  has  postponed 
with  the  consent  of  the  instructor,  certain  required  work),  but  other- 
wise satisfactory.  This  work  must  be  completed  within  the  semester 
following,  or  the  "I"  will  be  converted  to  an  F. 

W  indicates  withdrawal  from  a  course  any  time  within  the  first 
six  weeks  of  classes  of  a  semester  without  prejudice  to  the  student's 
standing.  In  case  of  withdrawal  from  a  course  after  six  weeks  the 
symbol  WP  will  be  entered  if  the  student's  work  is  satisfactory,  and 
WF  if  his  work  is  unsatisfactory.  The  grade  WP  will  be  considered 
as  without  prejudice  to  the  student's  standing,  but  the  grade  WF  will 
be  counted  as  an  F.  If  a  student  withdraws  from  a  course  after  twelve 
weeks,  without  a  reason  satisfactory  to  the  Registrar,  a  grade  of  WF 
will  be  recorded. 

For  courses  in  which  no  academic  credit  is  involved,  student 
work  is  evaluated  as  either  S  (Satisfactory)  or  U  (Unsatisfactory). 

For  each  semester  hour  credit  in  a  course  in  which  a  student 
is  graded  A,  he  receives  4  quality  points;  A—,  3.7;  B-)-,  3.3;  B,  3; 
B— ,  2.7;  etc.  F  carries  no  credit  and  no  quality  points. 

Transfer  Students 

Students  transferring  from  two-year  institutions  are  required  to 
have  sixty  hours  of  work  at  a  four-year  institution  as  well  as  to  meet 
the  residence  requirements  at  Lebanon  Valley  College.  (See  page  55.) 

Students  transferring  from  other  institutions  must  secure  a  grade 
point  average  of  1.75  or  better  in  work  taken  at  Lebanon  Valley 
College. 

56 


REQUIREMENTS  FOR  DEGREES 

Attendance  at  Baccalaureate  and  Commencement  Programs 

All  seniors  are  required  to  attend  the  Baccalaureate  and  Com- 
mencement programs  at  which  their  degrees  are  to  be  conferred. 

Degrees  will  be  conferred  in  absentia  only  for  the  most  compel- 
ling reasons  and  only  upon  a  written  request  approved  by  the  Dean 
of  the  College.  Such  requests  must  be  submitted  two  weeks  prior  to 
the  date  of  Commencement. 

Faculty  approval  is  required  for  the  conferring  of  the  degree  and 
the  issuance  of  the  diploma  in  any  case  of  wilful  failure  to  comply 
with  these  regulations. 


57 


REQUIREMENTS  FOR  DEGREES 

GENERAL  AND  DISTRIBUTION  REQUIREMENTS-EFFECTIVE  SEPTEMBER,  1965 

I.  General  Requirements:  semester  Hours 

English  Composition*   6 

Foreign  Language   (Intermediate  level)*    6 

Mathematics  (First  year  level)  *    3 

Religion   12  and   13    6 

Physical  Education   (two  years)    0 

II.  Distribution  Requirements: 

Humanities:  Three  one-semester  courses  (not  more  than 
two  from  one  field)  to  be  chosen  from 
among  Art/Music;  literature  as  offered  by 
the  Department  of  English  or  the  Depart- 
ment of  Foreign  Languages;  Philosophy.  9 
Social  Sciences:  Three  one-semester  courses  (not  more  than 
two  from  one  field)  to  be  chosen  from 
among  Economics,  History,  Political 
Science,  Sociology.  9 

Natural  Sciences:  Three  one-semester  courses  (not  more  than 
two  from  one  field)  to  be  chosen  from 
Biology,  Chemistry,  Physics,   Psychology.     9-12 


48-51 


Distribution  requirements  shall  be  met  from  among  the  following 
courses: 

Humanities:  Art  12,  21;  English  20,  21,  24,  26,  37;  Foreign  Literature 
courses  above  10  level;  Music  19;  Philosophy  10,  30;  Religion 
22,  42. 

Social  Sciences:  Economics  20;  History  13,  14,  17,  23;  Pol.  Sci.  10, 
30,  33;  Sociology  20,  21,  33. 

Natural  Sciences:  Biology  14,  18;  Chemistry  13;  Physics  10,  17;  Psy- 
chology 20,  25,  37,  44. 

Notes: 

1.  No  course  in  the  major  field  shall  be  used  to  meet  general  or 
distribution  requirements. 

2.  No  course  taken  as  a  general  requirement  may  count  toward  a 
major. 

3.  No  credit  is  given  for  an  elementary  language  course  if  two  or 
more  years  of  the  same  language  have  been  taken  in  secondary 
school.  Credit  is  given  for  any  other  elementary  language  course. 


*  Requirement  can  be  met  by  proficiency  examinations  selected  by  the  chairman  of  the 
department  involved  in  consultation  with  the  Dean  of  the  College,  or  through  the  Advanced 
Placement  Programs. 

58 


Special  Plans  ol  Study 


Actuarial  Science 

Adviser:  Dr.  Bissinger 
Consultant:  Actuaries  Club  of  Philadelphia 


Course  Number 

Mathematics     11 

English     10a— 10b 

Foreign  Language    ....  10 

Mathematics    12 

Music    19 

or  Art 11 

Physics    17 

Physical  Educ 10 


First  Year 


Course  Title 


Hours   Credit 

1st        2nd 
Sem.     Sem. 


.  Elementary  Analysis  I  &  II  ...  .  3 

.  English  Composition    3 

.Intermediate  French  or  German  3 

.  Elementary  Statistics    — 

.History  and  Appreciation  of 
Music  or  History  and  Appre- 
ciation of  Art 3 

,  Principles  of  Physics   4 

Health,  Hygiene  and  Phys.  Ed.  0 


16     16 
59 


.  I 


SPECIAL  PLANS  OF  STUDY 


Mathematics    21 

Mathematics   37 

English    20 

Economics     20 

Economics     23 

Physical  Educ 20 

Elective 

Mathematics   25 

Mathematics     40.1 

History    23 

Psychology    20 

Sociology 20 

Religion     12 

Religion     13 

Economics 32 


Second  Year 

.  Intermediate  Analysis  I  &  II  .  .  3  3 

.  Mathematical  Statistics    3  3 

.  Comparative  Literature   3  3 

.  Principles  of  Economics 3  3 

.  Principles  of  Accounting 4  4 

.  Physical  Education 0  0 

16  16 
Third  Year 

.  To  be  selected 3  3 

.Development  of  the  Number 

System     —  3 

.  Mathematics  Seminar — Finite 

Differences  and  Compound 

Interest    1  1 

.  Political  &  Social  Hist,  of  U.  S. 

&  Pa 3  — 

.  General  Psychology   —  3 

.  Introductory   Sociology    3  — 

.  Introduction  to  Biblical  Thought  3  — 
.Introduction  to  the  Christian 

Faith    —  3 

.  Business  Law    3  3 


16     16 


Mathematics    41 

Mathematics     40.1 

Economics     36 

Economics     44 

Economics     45 

Philosophy    10 

Electives    


Fourth  Year 

.Probability     3 

.  Mathematics  Seminar — Life 

Contingencies    1 

.  Money  and  Banking — 

.Corporation  Finance    3 

.  Investments — 

.  Introduction  of  Philosophy   ...  3 

.  To  be  selected 6 


16     16 

Part  1  of  the  Examination  of  the  Society  of  Actuaries  may  be  taken 
in  May  of  the  freshman  year  or  November  or  May  of  the  sophomore 
year.  Part  2  of  the  Examination  may  be  taken  in  May  of  the  sophomore 
year  with  the  summer  to  be  spent  in  the  home  office  of  one  of  the  life 
insurance  companies.  Part  3  of  the  Examination  may  be  taken  in  May 
of  the  junior  year  and  should  be  taken  by  May  of  the  senior  year. 

The  college  is  a  testing  center  for  the  Society  of  Actuaries  and  the 
major  can  take  each  of  the  examinations  on  campus. 

Upon  the  satisfactory  completion  of  the  above  curriculum  and  tests, 
the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Science  with  a  Major  in  Actuarial  Science  is 
granted. 


61 


Chemistry 

Students  entering  with  advanced  placement  in  chemistry   are 
asked  to  consult  the  adviser. 

Adviser:  Dr.  Neidig 

First  Year 


Course  Number 

Chemistry    13 

English    10a— 10b 

German 11 

Mathematics    11 

Phys.  Education 10 

Religion     12 

Religion     13 


Course  Title 


Hours  Credit 

1st        2nd 
Sem.     Sem. 


Principles  of  Chemistry 4  4 

English  Composition    3  3 

Scientific   German    3  3 

Elementary  Analysis  I  &  II  .  .  .  3  3 

Health,  Hygiene  and  Phys.  Ed.  0  0 

Introduction  to  Biblical  Thought  3  — 
Introduction  to  the  Christian 

Faith    —  3 


Chemistry    25 

Chemistry    24 

Distribution  Requirements 

Mathematics    21 

Phys.  Education 20 

Physics    17 


16  16 

Second  Year 

.Reaction  Kinetics  and  Chemical 

Equilibria     4  — 

.  Chemistry  of  the  Covalent  Bond  —  4 

,  The  Social  Sciences 3  3 

.  Intermediate  Analysis  I  &  II  .  .  .      3  3 

,  Physical  Education 0  0 

,  Principles  of  Physics 4  4 


14     14 


62 


Chemistry    36 

Chemistry    37 

Chemistry    38 

Distribution  Requirements 
Physics    27 


SPECIAL  PLANS  OF  STUDY 

Third  Year 

Physical  Chemistry 4  4 

Organic  Chemistry 5  — 

Instrumental  Analysis —  5 

The  Humanities    3  3 

Principles  of  Physics  II 4  4 


Chemistry   41 

Chemistry    44 

Chemistry    45 

Chemistry    47 

Distribution  Requirements 
Distribution  Requirements 
Distribution  Requirements 
Electives    


16  16 

Fourth  Year 

,  Advanced  Organic   3  — 

,  Special  Problems    2  2 

Advanced  Analytical    —  3 

.Advanced  Inorganic 3  3 

The  Social  Sciences   3  — 

The  Humanities    —  3 

,  The  Sciences 3  — 

—  3 


14     14 

Curriculum  leading  to  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Chemistry 
(American  Chemical  Society  certified  degree) 


63 


Department  of  Economics  and  Business  Administration 
Adviser:  Professor  Tom 

Suggested  program  for  majors  in  Economics  and  Business  Ad- 
ministration. 


Course  Number 

Economics     20 

Economics 23 

English    10a— 10b 

Foreign  Language 10 


Mathematics  1  or  1 1  .... 
Distribution  Requirements 
Phys.  Education 10 


Economics   40.2 

Economics 36 

Economics 

Distribution  Requirements 

Religion 12 

Religion 13 

Phys.  Education 20 


First  Year 


Course  Title 


Hours   Credit 
1st        2nd 
Sem.      Sem. 


.  Principles  of  Economics   3  3 

.Principles  of  Accounting 4  4 

.  English  Composition    3  3 

.  Intermediate    French,    German, 
Greek,     Latin,     Russian,     or 

Spanish    3  3 

.Introductory  Analysis  or  Ele- 
mentary Calculus   3  — 

Humanities,  or  Natural  Sciences, 

or  Social  Sciences    —  3 

.Health,  Hygiene,  and  Phys.  Ed.     0  0 

16  16 

Second  Year 

.  Microeconomic  Analysis   3  — 

.  Money  and  Banking —  3 

.  Electives*    3  3 

.Humanities,  or  Natural  Sciences, 

or  Social  Sciences   6-7  6-7 

.  Intro,  to  Biblical  Thought  ....      3  — 

.  Intro,  to  the  Christian  Faith  .  .   —  3 

.Health,  Hygiene,  and  Phys.  Ed.     0  0 

15-16  15-16 


64 


SPECIAL  PLANS  OF  STUDY 


Economics  . 

48 

35 

Requirements 
40.3 

Third  Year 

.  .Labor  Economics 

3     — 

Economics 
Economics 

.  .  Marketing   

.  .Electives*    

—       3 
3        3 

Distribution 

.  .Humanities,  or  Natural  Sciences, 

or  Social  Sciences   6-7    6-7 

3        3 

Economics 

Fourth  Year 

.  .  Economic  Seminar  .... 

15-16  15-16 
—       3 

Economics 

.  .  Electives*    

6-9    3-6 

Electives    .  . 

6-9    6-9 

15     15 
*  Students  concentrating  in  areas  designated  should  schedule  courses  as 
indicated: 

Economics:      Econ.  37 — Public  Finance 

Econ.  38 — International  Economics 
Econ.  40.1 — History  of  Economic  Thought 
Econ.  40.4 — Macroeconomic  Analysis 
Business  Administration: 

Econ.  32 — Business  Law 
Econ.  44 — Corporation  Finance 
Econ.  45 — Investments  and  Statement  Analysis 
Econ.  49 — Personnel  Administration  and 
Industrial  Management 
Accounting:     Econ.  30 — Intermediate  Accounting 
Econ.  31 — Advanced  Accounting 
Econ.  42 — Income  Tax  Accounting 
Econ.  43 — Cost  Accounting 
Econ.  45 — Investments  and  Statement  Analysis 
Econ.  40.5 — Auditing 
For  students  who   are  interested   in   receiving  the   Automatic  Teaching 
Certification  in  Comprehensive  Social  Studies  with  a  major  in  Economics, 
the  following  courses  are  required: 

Econ.  20 — Principles  of  Economics 
Econ.  23 — Principles  of  Accounting 
Econ.  35 — Marketing 
Econ.  36 — Money  and  Banking 
Econ.  40.2 — Microeconomic  Analysis 
Econ.  40.3 — Economic  Seminar 
Econ.  48 — Labor  Economics 
Econ.  32 — Business  Law,  or  Econ.  37 — Public 
Finance,  or  Econ.  40.1 — History  of 
Economic  Thought 

65 


Elementary  Education 
Advisers:  Dr.  Ebersole,  Mrs.  Herr 

Suggested  Program  for  majors  in  Elementary  Education 


Course  Number 

Education    20 

English    10a— 10b 

Foreign  Language 10 

Distribution  Requirements 
Physical  Education  ....  10 

Psychology    20 

Religion 12 

Religion 13 


First  Year 


Course  Title 


Hours   Credit 

1st        2nd- 

Sem.      Sem. 


Social  Foundations  of  Education  3 

.English  Composition 3 

.  Intermediate    French,    German 

or  Spanish    3 

.Biology,  Chemistry,  or  Physics  3-4 

.  Health,  Hygiene  and  Phys.  Ed.  0 

.  General  Psychology — 

.  Intro,  to  Biblical  Thought  ....  3 

.  Intro,  to  Christian  Faith — 


3 

3-4 

0 

3 


15-16  15-16 


Geography  ....  10a — 10b 
Distribution  Requirements 

Psychology    23 

History    23 

Elementary  Education  .22 
Elementary  Education  .25 
Elementary  Education  .37 
Physical  Education  ...  .20 
Elective    


Second  Year 

.  World  Geography 3 

.Humanities    3 

.  Educational  Psychology 3 

.Pol.  and  Social  History  of  U.S. 

and  Pennsylvania   3 

,  Music  in  the  Elementary  Schools  — 
.  Mathematics  for  Elem.  Grades  — 

.  Children's  Literature    — 

,  Phys.  Education  for  Sophomores     0 
3 


15     15 


66 


Elementary  Education   .34 
Elementary  Education   .23 

Elementary  Education   .36 

Distribution  Requirements 

Psychology    21 

Mathematics    10 

Elective   

Elementary  Education    .40 
Elementary  Education   .43 
Elementary  Education     44 
Distribution  Require- 
ments   

Electives  or  area  of 
concentration    


SPECIAL  PLANS  OF  STUDY 

Third  Year 

.Teaching  of  Reading 3  — 

.  Physical    Sciences    in    the    Ele- 
mentary  School    —  3 

.Communication    and    Group 

Process  in  the  Elem.  School     3  3 

.  Social  Sciences   3  3 

.Child    Psychology    3  — 

.Basic  Concepts 3  — 

—  6 

15  15 
Fourth  Year 

.Student  Teaching   12  — 

.  Health  and  Safety  Education  .  .      3  — 

.  Senior  Seminar —  3 

.  Humanities    —  3 

—  9 

15  15 


SPECIAL  PLANS  OF  STUDY 

Cooperative  Engineering  Program 
Adviser:  Dr.  Bissinger 

Lebanon  Valley  College  offers  a  cooperative  program  in  Engi- 
neering whereby  a  student  may  achieve  a  liberal  arts  degree  from 
Lebanon  Valley  College  and  also  an  engineering  degree  from  the 
University  of  Pennsylvania  or  any  other  institution  with  which  co- 
operative arrangements  are  in  effect. 

A  student  electing  to  pursue  this  curriculum  spends  the  first  three 
years  in  residence  at  Lebanon  Valley  College.  At  the  end  of  these 
three  years  he  may,  if  recommended,  go  to  the  University  of  Penn- 
sylvania or  another  co-operating  institution  for  two  additional  years 
of  work  in  engineering.  Upon  the  successful  completion  of  the  five 
years  of  study,  the  student  will  receive  two  degrees:  the  Bachelor 
of  Science  degree  from  Lebanon  Valley  College  and  a  Bachelor  of 
Science  degree  in  one  of  the  fields  of  engineering  from  the  University 
of  Pennsylvania  or  other  cooperating  institution. 

The  adviser  should  be  consulted  concerning  the  various  cur- 
riculums. 

Cooperative  Forestry  Program 
Adviser:  Mr.  Bollinger 

Lebanon  Valley  College  offers  a  program  in  forestry  in  coopera- 
tion with  the  School  of  Forestry  of  Duke  University.  Upon  successful 
completion  of  a  five-year  coordinated  course  of  study,  a  student  will 
have  earned  the  Bachelor  of  Science  degree  from  Lebanon  Valley 
College  and  the  professional  degree  of  Master  of  Forestry  from  the 
Duke  School  of  Forestry. 

A  student  electing  to  pursue  this  curriculum  spends  the  first  three 
years  in  residence  at  Lebanon  Valley  College.  Here  he  obtains  a  sound 
education  in  the  humanities  and  other  liberal  arts  in  addition  to  the 
sciences  basic  to  forestry.  The  student  devotes  the  last  two  years  of 
his  program  to  the  professional  forestry  curriculum  of  his  choice  at 
the  Duke  School  of  Forestry. 

The  adviser  should  be  consulted  concerning  the  curriculum. 

Medical  Technology  Curriculum 
Adviser:  Dr.  Wilson 
Each  applicant  for  admission  to  this  program  should  secure  ap- 
proval by  the  School  for  Medical  Technologists  for  the  status  of  pre- 
registered  students,  to  be  admitted  on  the  successful  completion  of  the 
academic  part  of  the  curriculum  at  the  college.  The  School  for  Medical 
Technologists  shall  be  the  final  judge  of  a  student's  qualifications  to 
pursue  its  curriculum. 

68 


SPECIAL  PLANS  OF  STUDY 

The  first  three  years  will  be  spent  at  Lebanon  Valley  College  in 
pursuit  of  a  program  of  study  which  includes  all  the  general  require- 
ments for  graduation  and  certain  courses  especially  suitable  as 
preparation  for  the  study  of  medical  technology.  The  adviser  should 
be  consulted  concerning  the  curriculum. 

Following  the  completion  of  this  curriculum  the  student  will 
spend  twelve  months  at  the  Harrisburg  Hospital  School  for  Medical 
Technologists  or  another  approved  school,  in  the  pursuit  of  its 
regular  curriculum  as  prescribed  by  The  American  Society  of  Clinical 
Pathologists.  On  the  successful  completion  of  both  phases  of  the 
curriculum  the  student  will  be  awarded  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of 
Science  in  Medical  Technology  by  Lebanon  Valley  College. 

Pre-Medical,  Pre-Dental,  and  Pre-Veterinary  Curricula 
Adviser:  Dr.  Wilson 

Students  contemplating  admission  to  Medical,  Dental,  or  Veteri- 
nary Colleges  should  pursue  a  science  program  with  a  major  in  either 
biology  or  chemistry.  They  should  register  their  professional  inten- 
tions with  the  adviser  of  these  programs  by  the  end  of  their  freshman 
or  sophomore  years.  At  that  time  their  work  will  be  reviewed  and 
provision  made  to  meet  the  special  requirements  of  the  colleges  of 
their  choice. 

All  students  planning  to  enter  the  medical  profession  should 
confer  with  the  pre-medical  adviser  as  to  the  dates  for  medical  aptitude 
tests  and  other  special  requirements. 

The  adviser  should  be  consulted  concerning  the  curriculum. 

Nursing 
Adviser:  Mr.  Bollinger 

The  five-year  Nursing  Plan  offers  to  young  women  intending  to 
enter  the  field  of  nursing  an  opportunity  to  obtain  a  liberal  arts  educa- 
tion in  connection  with  their  nurses'  training. 

Lebanon  Valley  College  has  an  affiliation  with  a  number  of 
hospital  schools  of  nursing  for  a  five-year  curriculum  in  nursing,  the 
first  two  years  of  which  are  spent  at  Lebanon  Valley  College. 

The  next  three  years  are  spent  at  the  School  of  Nursing  in  pur- 
suit of  the  regular  curriculum.  At  the  end  of  these  five  years  the  stu- 
dent who  has  successfully  completed  both  phases  of  the  curriculum 
will  be  awarded  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Nursing  by 
Lebanon  Valley  College  and  the  diploma  in  nursing  by  the  School 
of  Nursing. 

The  adviser  should  be  consulted  concerning  the  curriculum. 

69 


Course  Number 

English    10a— 10b 

Foreign  Language    ....  10 
Distribution  Requirements 

Health  &  Phys.  Ed 10 

Music   10,  11 

Music   12,  13 

Music   14,  15 

Music    


Music 
First  Year 

Hours  Credit 

1st  2nd 

Course  Title                                                        Sem.  Sem. 

English  Composition    3  3 

.  French,  German,  Spanish 3  3 

Sciences     3  3 

,  Health,  Phys.  Ed.  &  Hygiene  .  .      0  0 

Sight  Singing  I  &  II 1  1 

Ear  Training  I  &  II 1  1 

Harmony  I  &  II 2  2 

Applied  Music"    2  2 


15     15 


Distribution  Requirements 

Mathematics   10 

Phys.  Ed 20 

Religion 12 

Religion 13 

Music    20 

Music    22 

Music    24 

Music 40.1 

Music    

Electives    


Second  Year 

.The  Social  Sciences 3  3 

.Basic  Concepts  of  Mathematics  —  3 

.  Physical  Education 0  0 

.  Introduction  to  Biblical  Thought  3  — 
.Introduction  to  the  Christian 

Faith    —  3 

.Sight  Singing  III 1  — 

.Ear  Training  III 1  — 

.  Harmony  III 2  — 

.  Counterpoint     —  2 

Applied  Music  * 2  2 

3  2 


15     15 


70 


SPECIAL  PLANS  OF  STUDY 


Distribution  Requirements 
Distribution  Requirements 

Music    29 

Music 30a— 30b 

Music   31,  36 

Music    39 

Music    

Electives    


Third  Year 

The  Social  Sciences   3 

.  Humanities    3 

.  Harmony  IV 2 

.  History  of  Music 3 

.  Form  and  Analysis  I  &  II  ...  .  2 

.  Keyboard  Harmony — 

.Applied  Music*    2 


Distribution  Requirements 
Distribution  Requirements 

Music    41 

Music    35 

Music    

Electives    


15  15 

Fourth  Year 

.  Sciences 3  — 

.  Humanities    —  3 

.  Music  Literature  Seminar   ....  3  — 

.  Conducting  I —  2 

.Applied  Music*    2  2 

7  8 


15     15 


Study  of  voice,  organ,  piano,  band  and  orchestral  instruments. 


71 


Course  Number 

English    10a— 10b 

Foreign  Language 10 

Biology    14 

Health  &  Phys.  Ed 10 

Music   10,  11 

Music   12,  13 

Music   14,  15 

Music    


Music  Education 
First  Year 

Hours  Credit 

1st  2nd 

Course  Title                                                        Sem.  Sem. 

.  .  English  Composition    3  3 

.  .French,  German,  Spanish   ....      3  3 

.  .  Human  Biology    3  3 

.  .  Health,  Phys.  Ed.  &  Hygiene  .  .      0  0 

.  .  Sight  Singing  I  &  II 1  1 

.  .  Ear  Training  I  &  II 1  1 

.  .  Harmony  I  &  II 2  2 

.  .Applied  Music*    3  3 


Distribution  Requirements 

Physical  Ed 20 

Psychology    20 

Psychology    23 

Religion 12 

Religion 13 

Music    20 

Music    21 

Music    22 

Music  Ed 23 

Music    24 

Music    


16  16 

Second  Year 

.  Social  Sciences   3  3 

.  Physical  Education 0  0 

.  General  Psychology 3  — 

.  Educational  Psychology —  3 

.  Intro,  to  Biblical  Thought  ....  3  — 

.Intro,  to  Christian  Faith —  3 

.  Sight  Singing  III    1  — 

.Orchestration     &    Scoring    for 

Band    .  . —  2 

.  Ear  Training  III 1  — 

.Methods:  Vocal,  grades  1-3   .  .  —  2 

Harmony   III    2  — 

Applied  Music*    3  3 


16     16 


72 


SPECIAL  PLANS  OF  STUDY 


English    20 

Music 30a— 30b 

Music    31 

Music    32 

Music  Ed 33A 

Music  Ed 33B 

Music  Ed 34A 

Music  Ed 34B 

Music    35 

Music    39 

Music     


Third  Year 

Comparative  Literature    3  3 

History  of  Music   3  3 

.  Form  and  Analysis 2  — 

,  Music  Literature 2  — 

.Methods,  Vocal:  Grades  4-6  .  .  2  — 

Methods,  Instrumental:   Grades 

4-6 1  — 

Methods,  Vocal:  Jr.-Sr.  High  .  .  —  2 
.Methods,  Instrumental:  Jr.-Sr. 

High    —  1 

.  Conducting  I —  2 

.  Keyboard  Harmony —  2 

.Applied  Music"    3  3 


Education    20 

History    23 

Art     11 

Music    36 

Music  Ed 40a— 40b 

Music  Ed 43 


Electives 
Music    . 


16  1-6 

Fourth  Year 

Social  Foundations  of  Education  3  — 
.Pol.  &  Soc.  History  of  U.S.  & 

Pa —  3 

.  History  and  Appreciation  of  Art     3  — 

.  Conducting  II 2  — 

.  Student  Teaching   4  4 

.Seminar,  Adv.  Instrumental 

Problems   —  2 

—  3 

Applied  Music*    4  4 


16     16 


Study  of  voice,  organ,  piano,  band  and  orchestral  instruments. 


Teaching 

Advisers:  Dr.  Ebersole  and  Mrs.  Herr 

The  requirements  listed  below  are  applicable  to  students  certified 
to  teach  in  the  Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania. 

Basic  Regulations— College  Provisional  Certificates 

A.  General  Education 

Certificates  are  based  on  the  completion  of  a  minimum  of  sixty 
(60)  semester  hours  of  acceptable  courses  in  general  education  with 
not  less  than  twelve  (12)  semester  hours  in  the  humanities  and  not 
less  than  six  (6)  semester  hours  in  each  of  the  following  areas:  the 
social  sciences  and  natural  sciences. 

These  requirements  apply  to  both  elementary  and  secondary 
fields. 

B.  Professional  Education  in  Secondary  Education 

Certificates  are  based  on  the  completion  of  a  minimum  of  eigh- 
teen (18)  semester  hours  of  professional  education  distributed  in  the 
following  areas:  social  foundations  of  education,  educational  psychol- 
ogy and  human  growth  and  development,  materials  and  methods  of 
instruction  and  curriculum,  and  not  less  than  six  (6)  of  the  eighteen 
(18)  semester  hours  in  actual  practicum  and  student  teaching  experi- 
ence under  approved  supervision  and  appropriate  seminars  including 
necessary  observation,  participation  and  conferences  on  teaching  prob- 
lems. The  areas  of  methods  and  materials  of  instruction  and  curricu- 
lum, and  student  teaching  shall  relate  to  the  subject  matter  speciali- 
zation field  or  fields. 

74 


SPECIAL  PLANS  OF  STUDY 

C.  Elementary  Education— Subject  Matter  Requirements 

The  provisional  college  certificate  may  be  issued  to  those  who 
have  been  granted  a  baccalaureate  degree  upon  the  completion  of 
thirty-six  (36)  semester  hours  in  the  elementary  field  distributed  as 
follows: 

1.  Eighteen  (18)  semester  hours  of  basic  professional  education 
(same  as  B  above ) . 

2.  A  course  in  the  teaching  of  reading. 

3.  The  remainder  of  the  thirty-six  (36)  semester  hours  selected 
from  a  minimum  of  four  of  the  following  areas:  mathematics, 
arts  and  crafts,  music,  physical  education,  language  arts, 
sciences,  social  studies,  geography,  mental  hygiene,  or  a 
course  dealing  with  exceptional  children. 

4.  The  prospective  elementary  education  teacher  is  required  to 
have  an  academic  major  or  an  area  of  concentration  of  at 
least  18  to  24  semester  hours. 

The  area  of  concentration  may  be  defined  as  follows: 

a.  Study  in  a  single  subject  such  as  history;  study  in  a  broad 
field  such  as  sociology,  psychology,  and  anthropology 
elected  from  social  science;  study  in  an  inter-disciplinary 
field  such  as  courses  elected  from  the  humanities,  social 
science,  or  the  natural  sciences. 

b.  In  lieu  of  the  academic  major  an  area  of  interest  of  18  to 
24  semester  hours  may  be  offered,  contingent  upon  ap- 
proval of  the  program  by  the  Department  of  Public 
Instruction. 

D.  Secondary  Education— Subject  Matter  Requirements 

1.  An  applicant  may  have  a  "single  subject"  written  on  a  certifi- 
cate upon  the  completion  of  at  least  twenty-four  (24)  semester  hours 
of  approved  college  studies  in  the  specialized  subject  field,  unless 
otherwise  specified  in  the  certification  requirements. 

2.  Comprehensive  and  general  certification: 

(a)  Comprehensive  English — 36  semester  hours. 

(b)  General  Science — 24  semester  hours  in  any  two  or  all  of 
the  sciences. 

(c)  Physics  and  Mathematics — 36  semester  hours,  with  a 
minimum  of  12  semester  hours  in  each  field. 

75 


SPECIAL  PLANS  OF  STUDY 

(e)  Comprehensive  Social  Studies  with  a  major  in  Econom- 

ics, History,  Political  Science,  or  Sociology — 36  semes- 
ter hours. 

(f )  History  and  Government — 24  semester  hours. 

E.  Secondary  Student  Teaching  Program 

(To  begin  with  the  1968-1969  academic  year) 
A  student  concentrating  in  a  major  area  of  interest  may,  upon  the 
direction  of  his  adviser  and  approval  of  the  Dean  of  the  College,  enroll 
in  one  of  four  student  teaching  programs. 

I.  SEMESTER  OF  PROFESSIONAL  TRAINING 

A  student  desiring  to  receive,  upon  graduation,  Pennsylvania 
State  teacher  certification  devotes  the  first  semester  of  the  senior  year 
to  professional  preparation.  The  fifteen  weeks  are  organized  as  fol- 
lows: 

Six  Weeks:  Ed.  20.  Social  Foundations  of  Education. 

3:7 ¥2:0.  See  page  112  for  course  description. 
This   course   is   also   offered   outside   the   semester   of   professional 
training. 

Six  Weeks:  Ed.  49.  Practicum  and  Methods. 

3:7 V2:0.  See  page  115  for  course  description. 

This  course  is  given  only  in  the  semester  of  professional  training. 

Some  time  is  devoted  to  the  presentation  of  data  on  Basic  Reading 
instruction  to  fulfill  certification  requirements  for  the  Commonwealth 
of  Pennsylvania. 

Six  Weeks:  Ed.  40.  Student  Teaching. 

6:30:0. 
The  student  enters  on  a  full-time  student  teaching  experience  for  six 
consecutive  weeks.  He  is  under  the  direction  of  a  trained  teacher  in  an 
accredited  public  high  school  and  is  counseled  and  directed  by  the  college 
supervisor  of  secondary  education.  The  student  teacher  also  is  observed  by 
his  major  adviser. 

Three  Weeks:  Ed.  31.  History  and  Philosophy  of  Education. 

3:15:0.  See  page  115  for  course  description. 
This  course  is  given  only  in  the  semester  of  professional  training. 

Prerequisites  for  Student  Teaching:  A  student  must  have  met  the 
following  requirements  to  be  accepted  for  professional  semester  in 
his  senior  year: 

76 


SPECIAL  PLANS  OF  STUDY 

1.  Maintained  satisfactory  academic  standing. 

2.  Completed  the  basic  courses  Psychology  20,  Psychology 
23. 

3.  Secured  written  approval  of  his  major  adviser  and  the 
director  of  student  teaching. 

Major  Requirements  and  Teacher  Certification:  All  academic 
major  requirements  for  the  liberal  arts  degree  and  for  Pennsylvania 
State  certification  must  be  met  either  prior  to  the  professional  semes- 
ter, during  the  semester  following  professional  semester,  or  in  a  pre- 
scribed summer  school  program  approved  by  the  major  adviser. 

II.  POST-GRADUATE  STUDENT  TEACHING 

The  post-graduate  student  teaching  program  is  under  the  direc- 
tion of  Lebanon  Valley  College  or,  by  arrangement,  may  be  pursued 
with  any  other  accredited  institution  which  has  provision  for  super- 
vising student  teaching  in  the  public  schools. 

Students  enroll  for  student  teaching  after  graduation  and  are  em- 
ployed in  the  public  school  as  a  full-time  faculty  member.  Supervision 
of  the  teaching  experience  is  a  joint  responsibility  of  an  assigned  pro- 
fessional teacher  and  a  college  supervisor  of  student  teaching  either  at 
Lebanon  Valley  College  or  a  cooperating  institution. 


77 


SPECIAL  PLANS  OF  STUDY 

Because  of  the  necessity  of  meeting  Pennsylvania  State  certifica- 
tion requirements  of  proper  supervision,  only  a  limited  number  of 
students  are  accepted  in  this  program.  Likewise,  assignments  are 
made  only  to  those  schools  within  the  range  of  the  institution  respon- 
sible for  supervising  the  enrollee. 

III.  GRADUATE  INTERNSHIP 

A  student  may,  upon  counsel  of  his  adviser,  enroll  after  gradua- 
tion in  one  of  many  graduate  internship  programs.  These  programs 
offer,  concurrent  with  full-time  employment  as  a  professional  teacher, 
the  completion  of  an  appropriate  master's  degree  program. 

IV.  SUMMER  SCHOOL  STUDENT  TEACHING  FOLLOWING  GRADUATION 

A  senior  may,  upon  counsel  of  his  adviser,  enroll  for  a  summer 
student  teaching  program  after  graduating  from  the  college. 

The  student  may  enroll  in  the  Hershey  Program  sponsored  by 
Lebanon  Valley  College  or  an  acceptable  summer  student  teaching 
program  elsewhere. 

Addendum 

A  student  selecting  one  of  the  alternatives,  other  than  the  semes- 
ter of  professional  training,  is  able  to  complete  all  formal  course  re- 
quirements for  teacher  certification  except  student  teaching. 

The  following  courses,  all  carrying  three  semester  hours  credit, 
continue  to  be  offered  outside  the  semester  of  professional  training — 
Education  20:  Social  Foundations,  30:  Educational  Measurements, 
41:  An  Introduction  to  Guidance,  42:  The  Education  of  the  Excep- 
tional Child,  45:  Visual  and  Sensory  Techniques;  Psychology  20: 
General,  23 :  Educational. 

Junior  Year  A  broad 

A  Lebanon  Valley  student  who  is  preparing  to  teach  in  the  sec- 
ondary school  may  spend  his  Junior  year  abroad  in  study  under  a 
program  administered  by  an  accredited  American  college  or  univer- 
sity, or  in  a  program  approved  by  Lebanon  Valley  College.  Such  a 
student  must  have  maintained  a  B  average  at  Lebanon  Valley  College, 
must  be  proficient  in  the  language  spoken  in  the  country  in  which  he 
will  study,  and  must  be  a  person  who  in  the  judgment  of  the  Dean 
of  the  College  and  the  faculty  will  be  a  worthy  representative  of  his 
own  country.  His  proposed  course  of  study  must  be  approved  by  the 
chairman  of  his  department  and  the  Dean  of  the  College. 

78 


The  College  Honors  Program 

The  college  honors  program  exists  for  the  following  purposes: 
to  provide  an  opportunity  for  intellectually  able  students  to  de- 
velop their  abilities  to  the  fullest  extent,  to  recognize  and  encourage 
superior  academic  achievement,  and  to  stimulate  all  members  of  the 
College  family  to  greater  interest  and  activity  in  the  intellectual  con- 
cerns of  college  life. 

These  objectives  are  pursued  by  means  of  a  double-phased  pro- 
gram consisting  of  (1)  Honors  Sections  in  a  number  of  courses  in- 
cluded in  the  general  college  requirements  taken  for  the  most  part 
during  the  student's  freshman  and  sophomore  years,  and  (2)  an 
Independent  Study  plan  by  which  a  student  during  his  junior  and 
senior  years  may  do  individual  work  within  the  department  of  his 
major  concentration.  An  Honors  student  may  participate  in  either 
of  these  phases  of  the  program  without  participating  in  the  other.  An 
over-all  grade  point  average  of  3.00  is  a  requirement  for  the  mainte- 
nance of  Honors  status. 

The  two  phases  of  the  Honors  Program  are  related  to  one  an- 
other through  a  series  of  Honors  Colloquia,  special  evening  meetings 
of  Honors  students  having  both  an  academic  and  a  social  purpose. 
These  are  aimed  at  providing  breadth  and  liberalization  for  students 


THE  COLLEGE  HONORS  PROGRAM 

in  the  program.  Discussions  and  presentations  by  Honors  students 
themselves,  faculty  members,  and  outside  guests  are  prominent  fea- 
tures of  the  colloquia. 

Appropriate  recognition  is  given  students  who  successfully  com- 
plete either  phase  or  both  phases  of  the  College  Honors  Program. 

Honors  Section 

Honors  sections  are  offered  in  the  following  general  require- 
ments: English  10a — 10b,  English  Composition;  Religion  12,  Intro- 
duction to  Biblical  Thought;  Religion  13,  Introduction  to  Christian 
Faith;  English  20,  Comparative  Literature;  History  23,  United  States 
and  Pennsylvania  History;  and  Psychology  20,  General  Psychology. 
The  satisfactory  completion  of  eighteen  hours  of  Honors  work  is  re- 
quired for  official  recognition  of  participation  in  this  phase  of  the 
College  Honors  Program. 

Freshmen  are  admitted  to  Honors  sections  on  the  basis  of  their 
academic  standing  in  secondary  school,  performance  in  the  College 
Entrance  Examination  Board  tests,  the  recommendation  of  teachers 
and  counselors,  and  personal  interviews  with  members  of  the  Honors 
Council.  Students  not  accepted  initially  can  be  admitted  to  the  program 
at  the  beginning  of  subsequent  semesters  as  they  demonstrate  ability 
to  do  superior  work.  Students  having  curricular  or  scheduling  limita- 
tions are  permitted  three  years  to  complete  this  phase  of  the  program. 

The  seminar  and  tutorial  methods  are  used  to  the  greatest  pos- 
sible extent,  and  sections  are  kept  small  in  size. 

Independent  Study 

Independent  Study,  formerly  known  as  the  departmental  honors 
program,  is  offered  for  credit  in  the  student's  major  field  in  the  junior 
and  senior  years.  Independent  Study  consists  of  a  reading  and/or 
research  program  producing  a  thesis  or  an  essay.  The  latter  is  done 
on  a  problem  or  subject  of  the  student's  own  choosing  under  the 
direct  supervision  of  a  faculty  adviser.  Opportunity  is  afforded  to  do 
creative  work.  A  maximum  of  nine  hours  credit  can  be  earned  in 
Independent  Study. 

Independent  Study  is  offered  in  the  following  departments: 
Chemistry,  Economics  and  Business  Administration,  Elementary  Edu- 
cation, English,  Foreign  Languages,  History  and  Political  Science, 
Mathematics,  Philosophy,  Physics,  Psychology,  Religion,  and  Sociol- 
ogy. For  further  details  regarding  requirements  and  procedures  in 
Independent  Study,  see  the  appropriate  paragraph  under  each  depart- 
ment in  the  catalog  section  "Courses  of  Study." 

81 


*  j 


m 


r 


W  f* 


w 


* 


*****». :. 


mi 


The  Religious  Life 84 

Faculty-Student  Government 87 

Campus  Organizations 88 

(C  Athletics  and  Recreation 91 


The  Religious  Life 


Lebanon  Valley  College  was  founded  as  a  Christian  College  and 
t  continues  to  be  dedicated  to  this  objective.  All  students  are  in- 
vited and  urged  to  participate  in  some  phase  of  religious  activity. 

Chapel 

A  college  chapel  service  is  held  weekly  in  the  Chapel.  Students 
are  required  to  attend.  Faculty,  students,  regional  clergymen  from 
the  various  denominations,  and  nationally  and  internationally  known 
speakers  participate  in  these  services,  which  constitute  an  integral 
part  of  a  liberal  education  for  every  college  student.  The  Chapel  Choir 
shares  in  most  of  the  services. 

Sunday  Services 

The  Evangelical  United  Brethren  Church  and  the  other  churches 
of  the  community  extend  a  warm  welcome  to  all  college  students  who 
wish  to  attend  Sunday  worship. 

The  Student  Christian  Association 

The  Student  Christian  Association  conducts  weekly  services, 
campuswide  Bible  studies,  special  seasonal  services,  and  intercollegiate 
exchange  religious  programs.  In  addition,  the  Student  Christian  Asso- 
ciation sponsors  social  events  throughout  the  year  and  arranges  for 
the  Big  Sister-Little  Sister  and  the  Big  Brother-Little  Brother  program 
for  incoming  freshmen. 

All  students  are  urged  to  participate  actively  in  the  student- 
centered  religious  programs. 

Religious  Emphasis  Week 

This  is  one  of  the  outstanding  religious  events  of  the  school  year. 
Notable  speakers  are  invited  to  share  their  experiences  with  the  stu- 
dent body  through  classroom  lectures,  seminars,  convocations,  and 
personal  interviews. 

84 


THE  RELIGIOUS  LIFE 

The  Balmer  Showers  Lecture 

This  annual  lectureship  was  established  and  endowed  by  the  late 
Bishop  Emeritus  J.  Balmer  Showers,  '07,  of  the  Evangelical  United 
Brethren  Church.  Under  the  stipulations  of  the  endowment,  the  lec- 
tures are  delivered  by  distinguished  scholars  of  recognized  leadership 
in  the  areas  of  Christian  faith  and  theology,  biblical  archaeology  and 
interpretation,  Christian  ethics  of  the  Christian  ministry. 

Religion  and  Life  Lectureships 

The  purpose  of  the  Religion  and  Life  Lectureships  is  to  deepen 
the  student's  understanding  of  some  of  the  problems  of  life  and  the 
religious  resources  that  are  available  to  meet  such  problems.  Each 
semester  a  Christian  leader  of  national  or  international  reputation  is 
invited  to  spend  a  day  on  campus  in  order  to  confer  with  students  and 
faculty,  to  conduct  seminars,  and  to  address  the  entire  college  com- 
munity. 

Christian  Vocation  Week 

During  this  period  special  emphasis  is  given  to  the  Christian  way 
of  life  as  the  basis  for  all  occupations  and  professions.  Opportunity  is 
provided  for  students  interested  in  full-time  church  vocations  to  con- 
fer with  visiting  teams  of  advisers  and  counselors. 


85 


Delta  Tau  Chi 

Delta  Tau  Chi  is  an  organization  composed  primarily  of  students 
who  have  decided  to  devote  full-time  service  to  church  vocations. 
Membership  is  open,  however,  to  all  students  who  wish  to  participate 
in  the  activities  of  the  organization.  The  group  holds  regularly  sched- 
uled meetings,  daily  morning  prayers,  sends  deputations  to  churches, 
conducts  programs  at  various  hospitals  and  homes,  and  enters  into 
other  community  projects. 

86 


Faculty-Student  Government 


Ultimate  responsibility  for  activities  on  the  college  campus  rests 
with  the  faculty  and  the  administration.  However,  the  faculty  and  the 
administration  have  delegated  powers  and  responsibilities  to  the  stu- 
dent governing  bodies  so  that,  to  a  large  extent,  students  govern  them- 
selves. The  College  encourages  initiative  and  self-government  as  a 
part  of  the  democratic  training  offered. 

Faculty-Student  Council 

The  coordination  of  student  affairs  is  the  responsibility  of  the 
Faculty-Student  Council.  The  Council  is  composed  of  three  faculty 
members  and  a  representative  from  each  of  the  organizations  on  the 
campus.  The  purpose  of  this  organization,  in  addition  to  coordinating 
student  activities,  is  to  consider  matters  pertaining  to  student  welfare, 
to  seek  improvement  of  the  social  life  of  the  campus,  to  serve  as  liaison 
beween  students  and  faculty,  and  to  suggest  and  initiate  programs  for 
the  over-all  improvement  of  the  College. 

Governing  Bodies 

Four  student  governing  bodies  function  on  the  campus.  The  Sen- 
ate is  the  governing  body  for  students  living  in  the  men's  residence 
halls  and  for  men  students  residing  in  the  community  with  other  than 
their  immediate  families;  the  Men's  Day  Student  Congress  is  the  gov- 
erning body  for  commuting  men  students;  the  Resident  Women's 
Student  Government  Association  is  the  governing  body  for  women 
living  in  the  residence  halls;  and  the  Women's  Commuter  Council  is 
the  governing  body  for  commuting  women  students.  These  four  orga- 
nizations, with  the  approval  of  the  faculty,  make  and  administer  the 
rules  which  govern  certain  aspects  of  student  life. 


Campus  Organizations 


Social  Organizations 

Five  organizations  endeavor  to  enrich  the  social  program  of  the 
College  by  sponsoring  social  activities  on  the  campus  and  in  the  com- 
munity, and  by  broadening  the  experience  of  its  members  through 
group  action. 

Phi  Lambda  Sigma  Kappa  Lambda  Nu 

Kappa  Lambda  Sigma  Delta  Lambda  Sigma 

Knights  of  the  Valley 

Recognition  Groups 

Students  who  have  achieved  scholastic  distinction  in  their  aca- 
demic work  or  in  certain  areas  are  eligible  for  membership  in  hon- 
orary scholastic  societies. 

Phi  Alpha  Epsilon  Pi  Gamma  Mu 

Beta  Beta  Beta  Psi  Chi 


88 


Honorary  and  Service  Organizations 

Five  organizations  exist  to  bring  recognition  to  deserving  music 
students  and  participants  in  dramatic  activities  or  to  function  as  ser- 
vice organizations  on  the  campus. 

Alpha  Phi  Omega  Phi  Mu  Alpha 

Alpha  Psi  Omega  Sigma  Alpha  Iota 

White  Hats  Epsilon  Zeta  Phi 

Dramatics  and  Music 

An  opportunity  to  develop  dramatic,  forensic,  and  musical  talents 
under  qualified  leadership  is  offered  to  the  students  of  Lebanon  Valley 
College  by  the  following  organizations: 

Symphonic  Band 

All-Girl  Band 

College  Chorus 

Concert  Choir 

Guild  Student  Group  (American  Guild  of  Organists) 


Chapel  Choir 
Symphony  Orchestra 
Wig  and  Buckle  Club 


Publications 

Practical  experience  in  management,  writing,  and  editorial  work 
is  available  to  students  through  membership  on  the  staff  of  the  college 
yearbook  and  the  campus  newspaper. 

The  Quittapahilla  La  Vie  Collegienne 

The  13th  Warthog 

89 


CAMPUS  ORGANIZATIONS 

Departmental  Clubs 

Many  departmental  clubs  provide  opportunities  for  students  to 
participate  in  supplemental  department  activities.  At  regular  meetings 
reports  on  appropriate  topics  are  presented  and  discussed.  Other  ac- 
tivities sponsored  by  the  departmental  clubs  include  lectures  by  spe- 
cialists in  the  club's  particular  field  of  interest,  educational  films,  and 
field  trips. 

Chemistry :  American  Chemical  Society  Affiliate 

Economics :  Investment  Club 

Education:  Childhood  Education  Club 

Student  Pennsylvania  State  Education  Association 

English :  Green  Blotter  Club 

Mathematics:  Industrial  Mathematics  Society  Affiliate 

Modern  Languages :  French  Club,  German  Club,  Russian  Club 

Physics :  Physics  Club,  Student  Section  of  the  American  Institute 
of  Physics 

Political  Science :  Political  Science  Club 

Psychology:  Psi  Chi 


90 


Athletics  and  Recreation 


Lebanon  Valley  College  maintains  a  full  program  of  intramural 
and  intercollegiate  athletic  activities.  Intramural  leagues  and  tourna- 
ments are  conducted  in  the  various  sports  for  men,  while  the  women 
acquire  points  toward  individual  awards  by  participation  in  the  wom- 
en's intramural  program. 

The  college  participates  in  seven  intercollegiate  sports  for  men 
(basketball,  cross-country,  football,  golf,  lacrosse,  track,  wrestling) 
and  two  for  women  (basketball  and  hockey).  There  are  two  athletic 
organizations  on  the  campus,  the  LV  Varsity  Club  for  men  and  the 
Women's  Athletic  Association. 


™  WT  i- 

\ 

■^Kr^^ 

A. 

Lebanon  Valley  College  is  a  member  of  the  following  national 
and  regional  athletic  associations:  National  Collegiate  Athletic  As- 
sociation, Middle  Atlantic  States  Collegiate  Athletic  Conference,  East- 
ern College  Atheltic  Conference,  and  Central  Pennsylvania  Field 
Hockey  Association. 

Aims  and  Objectives  of  Intercollegiate  Athletics 

Lebanon  Valley  College  endeavors  to  maintain  inter-collegiate 
athletic  programs  for  the  students  rather  than  for  spectators.  The  over- 
all programs  are  not  regarded  as  money-making  ventures.  On  the 
contrary,  intercollegiate  athletics  has  consistently  been  a  financial 
burden.  However,  the  College  continues  to  support  and  encourage 
intercollegiate  athletics  because  we  are  convinced  that  it  is  an  impor- 
tant factor  in  the  intangible  known  as  "morale."  Intercollegiate  ath- 
letics is  an  integral  part  of  the  educational  pattern  of  our  young  peo- 
ple— no  more  and  no  less. 


93 


Courses  ol  study 


(C   Courses  of  Study  by  Departments 

5 


General  Information 


96 

97 


General  information 


Course  Numbering  System 

Courses  are  numbered  as  follows:  1-19  indicates  courses  offered 
at  the  freshman  level;  20-29  indicates  courses  offered  at  the  sopho- 
more level;  30-39  indicates  courses  offered  at  the  junior  level;  40-49 
indicates  courses  offered  at  the  senior  level;  101-132  indicates  courses 
in  applied  music. 

If  the  year  is  not  indicated  after  a  course,  it  is  understood  that  the 
course  is  offered  every  year.  Courses  that  continue  throughout  the 
year  are  listed  in  two  ways.  If  either  semester  may  be  taken  as  a  sep- 
arate unit,  without  the  other  semester,  the  course  will  be  listed  as  a 
and  b.  For  example,  a  student  may  take  English  21b  even  though 
he  has  not  had  English  21a  and  does  not  expect  to  take  it.  But  if  no 
letter  is  indicated  with  the  course  number,  a  student  may  not  enter 
the  course  at  mid-year. 

Course  Credit 

Semester  hours  of  credit,  class  hours  per  week,  and  laboratory 
hours  per  week  are  indicated  by  three  numbers  immediately  following 
the  course  title,  i.e.,  "4:2:4  per  semester"  following  "Biology  18a — 
18b"  means  four  semester  hours  of  credit,  two  classroom  hours  per 
week,  and  four  laboratory  hours  per  week  each  semester. 


courses  oi  Study  by  Departments 


Assistant  Professor  Garthly 


12.  Introduction  to  Art 

3:3:0.  Either  semester. 
Program  seeks  to  develop  an  increase  in  an  understanding  of  the 
nature  of  art  as  expressed  through  the  visual  art  forms.  Emphasis  is  made 
of  the  importance  of  the  development  of  individual  perception  for  a  quali- 
tative increase  of  appreciation  of  the  functional  role  of  the  artist,  the 
viewer,  and  the  critic  in  their  given  culture.  Lecture,  problems  using  vari- 
ous elements  of  compositional  structure  with  various  media,  visual  aids, 
supplementary  readings,  field  trips.  Prerequisite  to  other  art  courses. 

14.  Studio  Drawing  and  Painting. 

2:1:2  per  semester. 
Problems  offered  which  attempt  to  provide  maximum  opportunity  for 
development  of  the  creative  capacity  of  the  individual  in  terms  of  active 
involvement  with  examination  and  exploration  of  the  limits  of  inherent 
qualities  of  various  media,  techniques,  and  tools  as  related  to  the  various 
arts  forms.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  the  strengthening  of  qualities  of  sound 

97 


ART 

structure,  good  drawing,  fine  craftsmanship,  together  with  those  of  esthetic 
quality. 

21a.  Art  History,  Prehistory  through  the  Middle  Ages. 

3:3:0.  First  semester. 

Consideration  of  representative  visual  expressions  of  the  major  cul- 
tures of  the  successive  historic  periods  included.  Stress  given  to  the  inter- 
action of  factors  influencing  the  various  forms  of  visual  expressions.  Lec- 
ture, discussion,  visual  aids,  and  assignment  of  breadth  to  encourage  indi- 
vidual research  in  area  of  developing  interest. 

Prerequisite:  Art  12 

21b.  Art  History,  Renaissance  to  Twentieth  Century. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

Study  of  the  major  forms  of  the  visual  arts  representative  of  the  Ren- 
aissance and  succeeding  centuries  as  expressed  both  by  the  individual  and 
major  schools.  These  viewed  in  terms  of  degree  of  reflection  of  the  social, 
ideological,  and  economic  foci  of  the  period.  Lecture,  discussion,  visual 
aids,  supplementary  assignments. 

Prerequisite:  Art  12 

32.  Art  in  the  Elementary  School. 

3:2:2.  Second  semester. 

Survey  of  theories  of  art  education  and  of  programs  of  creative 
process  activities  adaptive  to  the  various  levels  of  maturation  at  the  ele- 
mentary level.  Studio  experience  employing  a  variety  of  media  and  tech- 
niques is  offered  to  give  experience  and  understanding  of  the  problems  in- 
volved. Practical  knowledge  of  process,  sources  of  supply,  approaches  to 
display,  and  trends  in  evaluation  of  process  are  presented  through  lecture, 
discussion,  demonstration,  visual  aids,  supplementary  reading. 

Prerequisite:  Art  12 


9S 


Professors  Wilson  and  Light; 

Assistant  Professors  Bollinger,  Hess  and  Wolf; 

Instructor  Malm 

The  work  outlined  in  the  following  courses  in  biology  is  intended 
to  develop  an  appreciation  of  man's  relation  to  his  universe,  to  ac- 
quaint students  with  those  fundamental  concepts  necessary  for  the 
proper  interpretation  of  the  phenomena  manifested  by  the  living  things 
with  which  they  are  surrounded,  and  to  lay  a  foundation  for  speciali- 
zation in  professional  courses  in  biology. 

The  courses  are  designed  to  prepare  students  for  the  work  in 
medical  schools,  schools  for  medical  technologists,  hospital  schools 
for  training  of  nurses,  for  graduate  work  in  colleges  and  universities, 
for  teaching  the  biological  sciences  in  high  schools,  and  for  assistant- 
ships  in  university  and  experiment  station  laboratories  in  the  depart- 
ments of  agriculture  and  other  government  agencies. 

Major:  Biology  18,  Chemistry  13,  24,  and  25,  Physics  10,  one 
semester  of  Biology  40.1,  and  twenty  additional  hours  in  Biology. 

14—14.    Human  Biology. 

3:2:2  per  semester. 

The  central  theme  is  human  life  as  expressed  in  activities  related  to 
anatomy  and  physiology.  Modern  concepts  of  chemistry  and  physics  will 
be  utilized  to  forward  the  understanding  of  these  activities. 

Laboratory  is  oriented  around  the  structure  and  function  of  the  major 
human  systems. 

99 


BIOLOGY 

*  18a— 18b.  General  Biology. 

4:2:4  per  semester. 
Representative  forms  of  plant  life  are  studied  the  first  semester  and 
representative  forms  of  animal  life  the  second  semester.  Structure,  and  bio- 
logical laws  and  principles  are  stressed. 

21.  Microbiology. 

4:2:4.  First  semester. 

A  study  of  bacteria,  molds,  yeasts,  richettsia,  and  viruses,  including 
laboratory  technique  in  sterilization  and  in  methods  of  cultivating,  isolat- 
ing, and  staining  bacteria. 

Required  of  those  preparing  for  medical  technology. 

22.  Genetics. 

4:3:2.  Second  semester. 
This  course  deals  with  the  mechanism  and  laws  of  heredity  and  vari- 
ation, and  their  practical  applications. 

28.  Botany. 

4:2:4.  Second  semester. 
The  course  is  designed  to  deal  with  the  broader  aspects  of  plants, 
emphasizing  a  study  of  the  taxonomic,  ecological,  evolutionary  and  patho- 
logical principles.  Consideration  will  be  given  to  the  local  flora,  with 
emphasis  being  placed  on  those  features  which  indicate  relationships  of 
the  various  families. 

29.  Biology  of  the  Chordates. 

4:2:4.  First  semester. 
The  anatomy  of  the  chordates  is  studied  from  a  comparative  view- 
point with  particular  attention  given  to  the  correlation  of  structure  to 
living  conditions.  Laboratory  work  involves  dissection  and  demonstration 
of  representative  chordates. 

30.  Vertebrate  Histology  and  Microtechnique. 

4:2:4.  First  semester. 
This  course  deals  with  the  cells,  tissues,  and  organ  systems  of  the 
vertebrate  body,  with  special  reference  to  the  mammal.  Modern  micro- 
technical  procedures  are  included  in  the  course. 

31.  Vertebrate  Embryology. 

4:2:4.  Second  semester. 
A  survey  of  the  principles  of  development,  with  laboratory  work  on 
the  frog,  the  chick,  and  the  pig. 


*  This  course  or  its  equivalent  is  prerequisite  to  all  other  courses  in  the  department. 

100 


BIOLOGY 

32.  Animal  Physiology. 

4:2:4.  Second  semester. 

This  course  presents  the  basic  concepts  of  physiology,  with  special 
reference  to  man. 

34.  Plant  Physiology. 

4:2:4.  First  semester. 
This  course  acquaints  the  student  with  the  various  functions  of  parts 
of  plants.  It  includes  lectures  and  experimental  work  on  the  processes  of 
photosynthesis,  nutrition,  respiration,  growth,  the  role  of  hormones,  diges- 
tion, absorption,  etc. 

35.  Invertebrate  Biology. 

4:2:4.  Second  semester. 
A  comparative  study  of  the  free-living  and  parasitic  invertebrates. 
Emphasis  is  on  local  forms. 

44.  Special  Problems. 

1  or  2  hours  credit  per  semester. 

Limited  to  students  majoring  in  biology  who  have  had  ample  courses 
in  the  department  and  whose  records  indicate  that  they  can  be  encouraged 
to  take  part  in  research  or  can  work  independently  on  research  problems 
in  which  they  have  a  special  interest. 

It  is  also  for  those  who  have  had  most  of  the  courses  required  for 
their  major  but  who  may  have  a  special  need  for  experience  in  fields  not 
listed  in  the  course  offerings  of  the  department. 

40.1.  Biology  Seminar. 

1:1:0  per  semester. 
Readings,  discussions,  and  reports  on  the  modern  trends  in  biology. 

41.  Ecology. 

3:3:0.  First  semester. 
A  study  of  the  interrelation  between  living  organisms  and  their  envi- 
ronment, emphasizing  both  interspecific  and  intraspecific  relations.  Those 
requiring  field  work  will  register  for  Biology  44. 

45.  Cellular  Physiology. 

4:2:4.  First  semester. 

Cell  function  and  structure:  a  basis  for  a  deeper  understanding  of 
those  processes  common  to  living  things. 

For  Senior  or  Junior  majors  who  have  completed  at  least  two  years 
of  chemistry. 

101 


Chemistry 


Chemistry — Outside  type 

Professor  Neidig;  Associate  Professors  Griswold  and 
Lockwood;  Assistant  Professor  Spencer;  Instructor  Bell 

The  aims  of  the  department  are :  ( 1 )  to  provide  students  major- 
ing in  chemistry  rigorous  training  in  the  principles  and  applications  of 
modern  chemistry;  (2)  to  provide  students  interested  in  the  teaching 
profession  an  opportunity  to  become  acquainted  with  the  teaching  of 
science;  and  (3)  to  offer  students  interested  in  advanced  study  or  in 
industrial  employment  professional  training  in  chemistry. 

Major:  Chemistry  24,  25,  36,  37,  38  and  4  hours  of  44. 

B.S.  in  Chemistry  (certified  by  the  American  Chemical  Society) : 
Chemistry  24,  25,  36,  37,  38,  41,  45,  47  and  4  hours  of  44. 

For  outline  of  course  leading  to  the  degree  of  B.S.  in  Chemistry, 
see  page  62. 

Independent  Study 

Juniors  and  seniors  may  participate  in  the  Independent  Study 
program  if  they  have  demonstrated  a  high  scholastic  ability  and  profi- 
ciency in  both  experimental  and  theoretical  chemistry.  To  be  recom- 
mended for  departmental  honors,  a  student  is  required:  (1)  to  sub- 
mit a  thesis  based  on  extensive  laboratory  investigation  of  an  original 
problem;  (2)  to  defend  the  thesis  before  an  appropriate  examining 
committee. 

102 


CHEMISTRY 

13.  Principles  of  Chemistry. 

4:3:3  per  semester. 
A  systematic  study  of  the  fundamental  principles  and  concepts  of 
chemistry. 

24.  Chemistry  of  the  Covalent  Bond. 

4:3:4.  Second  semester. 
The  presentation  of  the  structure  and  chemistry  of  covalent  com- 
pounds including  thermodynamic  and  kinetic  considerations. 
Prerequisite:  Chemistry  25. 

25.  Reaction  Kinetics  and  Chemistry  Equilibria. 

4:3:4.  First  semester. 

An  investigation  of  chemical  systems  involving  a  study  of  reaction 
kinetics  and  equilibria,  emphasizing  the  reaction  of  ionic  substances  and 
using  modern  analytical  methods. 

Prerequisite:  Chemistry  13  or  demonstrated  equivalent  background. 

36.  Physical  Chemistry. 

4:3:3  per  semester. 
A  course  in  the  physical  theories  of  matter  and  their  applications  to 
systems  of  variable  composition. 

Prerequisites:  Chemistry  25  and  Mathematics  11. 
Corequisite:      Physics   17. 

37.  Organic  Chemistry. 

5:3:8.  First  semester. 

A  study  of  the  preparation,  properties,  and  uses  of  the  aliphatic  and 
aromatic  compounds  with  emphasis  on  the  principles  and  reaction  mecha- 
nisms describing  their  behavior. 

Prerequisite:  Chemistry  24. 

38.  Instrumental  Analysis. 

5:3:8.  Second  semester. 
A  consideration  of  the  use  of  instrumental  analytical  methods  includ- 
ing spectrophotometric,  electroanalytical,  coulometry,  and  polarography. 
Prerequisite:  One  semester  of  Chemistry  36. 
Corequisite:  A  second  semester  of  Chemistry  36. 

41.  Advanced  Organic  Chemistry. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 
A  consideration  of  the  structure  of  organic  compounds  and  the  mech- 
anisms of  homogeneous  organic  reactions. 

Prerequisites:  Chemistry  36  and  Chemistry  37. 

103 


CHEMISTRY 


43.  Biochemistry. 

4:3:4,  First  semester;  3:2:4,  Second  semester. 
A  course  in  the  physical  and  organic  aspects  of  living  systems. 
Prerequisite:  Chemistry  25. 

44.  Special  Problems. 

2:1:4  per  semester.  A  maximum  of  eight  semester  hours  credit 

may  be  earned  in  this  course. 

Intensive  library  and  laboratory  study  of  topics  of  special  interest  to 

advanced  students  in  the  major  areas  of  chemistry.  For  students  preparing 

for  Secondary  School  Teaching,  the  emphasis  is  placed  on  methods  of 

teaching  Chemistry. 

Prerequisites:  Chemistry  36,  and  the  consent  of  the  Chairman  of  the 
Department. 

45.  Advanced  Analytical  Chemistry. 

3:3:0.  First  semester. 
A  study  of  advanced  topics  in  analytical  chemistry. 
Prerequisite:  Chemistry  36  and  Chemistry  38. 

46.  Qualitative  Organic  Analysis. 

2:0:8.  First  semester. 
Presentation  of  the  principles  and  methods  of  organic  analysis. 
Prerequisite:  Chemistry  37. 

47.  Advanced  Inorganic  Chemistry. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 
An  advanced  course  applying  theoretical  principles  to  the  under- 
standing of  the  descriptive  chemistry  of  the  elements. 
Prerequisites:  Chemistry  36  and  Physics  27. 

48.  Advanced  Physical  Chemistry. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 
A  presentation  of  advanced  topics  in  chemistry  from  such  areas  as 
quantum  mechanics,  thermodynamics,  and  kinetics. 
Prerequisite:  Chemistry  36. 


Economics 


Business  Adminislratio 


Professors  Tom  and  Riley;  Assistant  Professor  Peterke; 
Instructors  Gates  and  Grace 

The  aim  of  Lebanon  Valley  College  is  to  give  its  students  the 
opportunity  to  procure  a  liberal  education  of  the  highest  quality.  Thus 
within  this  general  objective  of  the  College,  the  program  of  study  in 
Economics  and  Business  Administration  at  Lebanon  Valley  College 
is  designed  to  provide  for  its  own  major: 

( 1 )  A  broad  and  liberal  education  so  that  graduates  of  this  De- 
partment will  play  a  more  active  role  in  our  changing  world 
of  ideas  and  actions;  and 

(2)  A  sound  and  integrated  knowledge  of  the  essential  principles 
and  problems  of  economics  and  business  administration. 

Major:  Economics  20,  23,  and  eighteen  additional  hours  as  ap- 
proved by  the  adviser.  These  additional  hours  should  include  Eco- 
nomics 35,  36,  40.2,  40.3  and  48. 

For  an  outline  of  the  suggested  program  in  Economics  and  Busi- 
ness Administration,  see  pages  64-65. 

Economics  20  is  a  prerequisite  for  all  courses  in  this  department 
of  a  higher  number  except  Economics  23  and  32. 

A  concrete  effort  is  afoot  nationally  to  promote  an  understanding 
of  the  American  economy.  In  an  effort  to  raise  the  level  of  economic 
literacy,  the  Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania  and  other  states  have 
prescribed  the  introduction  of  economics  in  the  secondary  schools. 

105 


ECONOMICS 

The  Department  of  Economics  and  Business  Administration  offers  a 
program  for  the  granting  of  Automatic  Teaching  Certification  in  Com- 
prehensive Social  Studies  with  a  major  in  Economics  as  approved  by 
the  Department  of  Public  Instruction  of  the  State  of  Pennsylvania. 

Independent  Study 

The  purpose  of  the  departmental  Independent  Study  program  is 
to  provide  opportunity  for  capable  students  to  undertake  advanced 
academic  work  independently  under  supervision  of  one  or  more  mem- 
bers of  the  department. 

In  order  to  participate  in  the  departmental  Independent  Study 
program,  the  applicant  is  required  to: 

( 1 )  demonstrate  in  his  academic  work  the  caliber  of  scholarship 
required  to  undertake  extensive  research  projects; 

(2)  apply  for  and  receive  permission  for  such  participation  from 
the  Departmental  Chairman  and  from  the  Dean  of  the 
College  no  later  than  the  end  of  the  first  semester  of  the 
junior  year; 

(3)  obtain  departmental  approval  of  a  research  project; 

(4)  prepare  a  paper  on  the  research  project  under  the  guidance 
of  one  or  more  staff  members  of  the  department; 

(5 )  submit  the  paper  in  April  of  the  senior  year;  and 

(6)  present  and  defend  the  paper  before  a  faculty  committee 
selected  by  the  Departmental  Chairman  and  the  Dean  of  the 
College. 

On  the  basis  of  the  student's  performance  in  the  Independent 
Study  program,  the  Departmental  Chairman  and  the  Dean  of  the  Col- 
lege will  determine  whether  or  not  the  student  will  be  graduated  with 
departmental  honors. 


Economics 
10.  Economic  Geography. 

3:3:0.  First  semester.  (Not  offered  1968-1969) 
Problems  studied  include:  the  geographical  distribution,  the  signifi- 
cance and  consequences  of  uneven  production,  and  solutions  to  the  sur- 
plus and  deficit  problems  of  economic  resources  in  the  world;  the  rela- 
tionship between  economic  resources  and  economic  development.  Atten- 
tion is  given  to  the  political,  social,  and  cultural  aspects  of  world  geog- 
raphy, but  with  emphasis  on  the  economic  aspects. 

106 


ECONOMICS 

11.  Introduction  to  American  Business  and  Industry. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester.  (Not  offered  1968-1969) 
A  survey  of  the  development  of  the  American  economic  system  as  a 
whole,  the  nature  of  the  various  leading  industries — agricultural  and  non- 
agricultural,  consumer  goods  and  producer  goods,  and  the  relationship 
between  these  industries  and  the  broader  aspects  of  our  national  economic 
life. 

20.  Principles  of  Economics. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 

An  introductory  course  in  economic  principles:  consumption,  produc- 
tion, banking  and  monetary  theories  and  policies,  governmental  activities 
and  fiscal  policies,  price  system  and  allocation  of  resources,  price  levels 
and  business  fluctuation,  theory  of  employment  and  income,  and  inter- 
national economics. 

Prerequisite  for  courses  of  a  higher  number  within  the  department, 
except  23  and  32. 

36.  Money  and  Banking. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 
Nature  and  functions  of  money  and  credit,  credit  instruments  and  the 
money  market,  development  and  role  of  commercial  banking  and  cen- 
tral banking,  and  structure  and  functions  of  the  Federal  Reserve  System. 
Monetary  and  banking  theory,  policy,  and  practice.  Influence  on  prices, 
level  of  income  and  employment,  and  economic  stability  and  progress. 

37.  Public  Finance. 

3:3:0.  First  semester. 
Revenues  and  expenditures  and  economic  functioning  of  the  federal, 
state,  and  local  governments;  principles  of  taxation — shifting,  incidence, 
and  burden;  influence  on  incentives,  income  distribution,  and  resource 
allocation;  economic  and  social  aspects  of  public  spending;  budgetary 
control  and  debt  management;  fiscal  policy  and  economic  stability. 

38.  International  Economics. 

3:3:0.  First  semester. 
A  study  of  theories  of  trade;  capital  movement;  mechanism  for  at- 
taining equilibrium;  economic  policies  such  as  tariff,  quota,  monetary 
standards  and  exchange,  state  trading,  cartel,  and  other  economic  agree- 
ments; the  International  Monetary  Fund  and  the  International  Bank  for 
Reconstruction    and    Development. 

40.1.  History  of  Economic  Thought. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 
The  evolution  of  economic  thought  through  the  principal  schools 
from  Mercantilism  to  the  present.  Attention  will  be  given  to  the  analysis 

107 


BUSINESS  ADMINISTRATION 

of  the  various  theories  of  value,  wages,  interest,  rent,  profit,  price  level, 
business  cycles,  and  employment,  and  to  the  influences  of  earlier  economic 
ideas  upon  current  thinking  and  policy-making. 

40.2.  Microeconomic  Analysis. 

3:3:0.  First  semester. 
Theories  of  demand,  production,  price,  and  resource  allocation. 

40.3.  Seminar  and  Special  Problems. 

3:3:0.  Hours  to  be  arranged. 
Independent  study  and  research  in  economics,  business  administra- 
tion, or  accounting  under  the  direction  and  supervision  of  the  depart- 
mental staff. 

40.4.  Macroeconomic  Analysis. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 
Theoretical  and  empirical  study  of  national  income,  business  cycle, 
and  economic  growth. 

48.  Labor  Economics. 

3:3:0.  First  semester. 
Analysis  of  the  American  labor  movement;  theories,  history,  struc- 
ture, and  functions  of  unionism;  individual  and  collective  bargaining  poli- 
cies and  practices;  labor  legislation;  grievances;  arbitration. 

Business  Administration 
23.  Principles  of  Accounting. 

4:3:2  per  semester. 

Accounting  principles  and  their  application  in  service,  trading,  and 
manufacturing  business  operating  as  single  proprietorships,  partnerships, 
and  corporations.  Topics  studied  include:  the  accounting  cycle — journal- 
izing, posting,  worksheet,  financial  statements,  adjusting,  closing;  basic 
partnership  problems — formation,  distribution  of  profits,  dissolution;  cor- 
poration and  manufacturing  accounting;  basic  problems  of  depreciation, 
depletion,  valuation;  introduction  to  analysis,  interpretation,  and  use  of 
financial  statements. 

Accounting,  a  language  of  business,  provides  a  tool  to  implement 
work  in  other  fields  of  business  administration. 

30.  Intermediate  Accounting. 

3:3:0.  First  semester. 
Intensively  covers  valuation  accounting  relating  to  working  capital 
items — cash,    temporary    investments,    receivables,    inventories,    current 
liabilities;    non-current    items — investments,    plant    and    equipment,    in- 
tangible assets  and  deferred  charges,  and  long-term  liabilities;  and  cor- 

108 


BUSINESS  ADMINISTRATION 

porate  capital.  Includes  nature  of  income,  cost,  and  expense;  statement 
of  source  and  application  of  funds;  and  statement  preparation  and  analy- 
sis. Attention  is  given  to  relevant  official  pronouncements  in  accounting. 
CPA  examination  accounting  theory  questions  are  utilized. 
Prerequisite:   Economics  23. 

31.  Advanced  Accounting. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

Accounting  for  joint  ventures;  special  sales  procedures — installment, 
consignment,  agency  and  branch;  parent  and  subsidiary  accounting — con- 
solidations and  mergers;  fiduciary  and  budgetary  accounting — statement 
of  affairs,  receivership,  estates  and  trusts,  governmental  accounting;  for- 
eign exchange;  insurance;  actuarial  science  and  applications.  Attention  is 
given  to  relevant  official  pronouncements  in  accounting.  CPA  examina- 
tion accounting  problems  are  utilized. 

Prerequisite:  Economics  30. 

32.  Business  Law. 

3:3:0  per  semester.  Offered  1968-1969. 
Elementary  principles  of  law  generally  related  to  the  field  of  busi- 
ness including  contracts,  agency,  sales,  bailments,  insurance,  and  nego- 
tiable instruments. 

35.  Marketing. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 
As  a  branch  of  applied  economics,  this  course  deals  with  (1)  the 
application  of  economic  theory  in  the  distribution  of  economic  goods  on 
the  manufacturers'  and  wholesalers'  level;  (2)  the  methods  of  analysis 
on  the  product,  the  consumer,  and  the  company,  and  (3)  the  administra- 
tive decisions  on  product  planning,  distribution  channels,  promotional 
activities,  sales  management,  and  price  policy.  To  bridge  the  gap  between 
the  understanding  and  the  application  of  marketing  principles,  students 
are  required  to  prepare  and  discuss  a  number  of  cases  pertaining  to  some 
specific  areas  of  marketing. 

40.5.  Auditing. 

3:3:0.   First  semester.   Offered  1967-1968. 
Study  and  appraisal  of  current  auditing  standards  and  related  litera- 
ture. 

42.  Income  Tax  Accounting. 

3:3:0.   First  semester.   Offered  1967-1968. 

Analysis  of  the  Federal  Income  Tax  Law  and  its  applications  to 
individuals,  partnerships,  fiduciaries,  corporations;  case  problems;  prepara- 
tion of  returns. 

Prerequisite:   Economics  23,  or  consent  of  instructor. 

109 


BUSINESS  ADMINISTRATION 

43.  Cost  Accounting. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1967-1968. 

Industrial  accounting  from  the  viewpoint  of  material,  labor,  and  over- 
head costs;  the  analysis  of  actual  costs  for  control  purposes  and  for  de- 
termination of  unit  product  costs;  assembling  and  presentation  of  cost 
data;  selected  problems. 

Prerequisite:    Economics  23. 

44.  Corporation  Finance. 

3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1968-1969. 
A  study  of  organizing  a  business,  financing  permanent  and  working 
capital  needs,  managing  income  and  surplus,  expanding  through  internal 
growth  and  combination,  recapitalization  and  reorganization.  Forms  of 
business  organization;  charter  and  by-laws;  directors,  officers,  and  stock- 
holders', stocks  and  bonds;  dividend  policy;  concentration  and  anti-trust 
legislation. 

45.  Investments  and  Statement  Analysis. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1968-1969. 
Development  and  role  of  investment  and  its  relation  to  other  eco- 
nomic, legal,  and  social  institutions.  Investment  principles,  media,  ma- 
chinery, policy,  and  management  are  discussed.  Financial  statement  analy- 
sis is  stressed  and  designed  for  preparation  as  Certified  Public  Accountants 
and/or  Chartered  Financial  Analysis. 

49.  Personnel  Administration  and  Industrial  Management. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1967-1968. 
Principles  of  scientific  management:' planning,  organizing,  staffing, 
directing  and  coordinating,  and  controlling.  Personnel  policies  and  prac- 
tices— recruitment,  selection,  testing,  placement,  training,  merit  rating, 
job  evaluation,  wage  and  salary  administration,  health  and  safety;  per- 
sonal and  group  relations,  employee  benefits  and  services,  time  and  mo- 
tion study,  work  simplification,  labor  turnover  and  morale,  efficiency 
records  and  incentives,  standards,  and  personnel  research. 


Professor  Ebersole;  Assistant  Professors  Curfman,  Herr, 
Associate  Professor  Weast 
Petrofes  and  Weider;  Instructor  Garman 

The  aim  of  the  Department  of  Education  is  to  acquaint  students 
with  the  art  of  teaching  and  to  develop  in  each  prospective  teacher  a 
full  realization  of  his  responsibilities  in  this  profession. 

Courses  are  provided  to  comply  with  state  certification  in  the  ele- 
mentary and  secondary  fields  of  the  public  schools. 

For  a  statement  of  requirements  for  those  planning  to  enter  the 
teaching  profession,  see  pages  66-67  and  74-78. 

Elementary  Education 

Major:  Elementary  Education  22,  23,  32,  34,  36,  37,  40,  43; 
Geography  10,  Psychology  21. 

Independent  Study 

Independent  Study  in  elementary  education  permits  the  capable 
student  to  increase  the  depth  of  his  understanding  in  an  area  of  special 
interest  and  the  general  scope  of  his  knowledge  of  elementary  educa- 
tion. It  is  planned  as  an  integral  part  of  the  student's  major  program 
rather  than  work  superimposed  upon  it. 

A  student  majoring  in  elementary  education  may  participate  in 
the  Independent  Study  Program  when  he  completes  the  freshman- 
sophomore  College  Honors  Program  or  when  he  demonstrates  in  his 
academic  work  the  caliber  of  scholarship  required  to  undertake  an 

111 


EDUCATION 

extensive  research  project;  achieves  a  3.3  grade-point  average  in  de- 
partmental courses  and  a  3.0  grade-point  average  in  all  college 
courses;  applies  in  writing  to  the  chairman  of  the  department  not  later 
than  the  end  of  the  first  semester  of  his  junior  year.  Approval  of  the 
application  must  be  given  by  the  Dean  of  the  College  upon  recom- 
mendation by  the  departmental  staff. 

A  maximum  of  nine  credit  hours  may  be  earned  in  this  program. 
These  hours  will  be  distributed  over  the  junior  and  senior  years  with  a 
minimum  of  one  and  a  maximum  of  three  hours  to  be  taken  in  one 
semester.  This  must  include  participation  in  the  Senior  Seminar,  Ele- 
mentary Education  44,  required  of  all  students  majoring  in  elementary 
education.  The  student  will  investigate  an  area  of  special  interest  be- 
ginning with  the  study  of  the  literature  and  culminating  in  the  design 
and  execution  of  an  approved  experimental  or  theoretical  research 
project;  submit  to  the  departmental  chairman  periodic  progress  re- 
ports and  any  other  indication  of  performance  that  may  be  required  by 
the  department;  complete  the  project  by  April  of  the  senior  year; 
report  and  defend  the  findings  of  the  project  in  a  manner  to  be 
determined  by  the  departmental  staff. 

Graduation  with  Honors  in  Elementary  Education  will  depend 
on  the  quality  of  performance  in  the  research  project,  the  maintenance 
of  the  grade  point  averages  required  for  admission  to  the  program,  the 
results  of  the  Graduate  Record  Examination,  success  in  the  compre- 
hensive student-teaching  program,  and  the  final  approval  of  the  de- 
partmental staff  and  the  Dean  of  the  College. 

Education  Courses 
For  both  Elementary  and  Secondary  Education 

20.  Social  Foundations  of  Education. 

3:3:0.  First  semester. 

A  study  is  made  of  the  history  of  education  correlated  with  a  survey 
of  the  principles  and  theories  of  noted  educational  leaders.  Emphasis  is 
placed  on  the  influence  these  leaders  and  their  followers  have  made  on 
school  and  society. 

Required  for  elementary  and  secondary  certification. 

30.  Educational  Measurements. 

3:3:0.  First  semester. 
A  study  of  the  principles  of  validity  and  reliability,  appraisal  and 
construction  of  test  items  and  consideration  of  the  uses  of  test  results. 
Recommended  elective  in  elementary  and  secondary  fields. 
Prerequisite:  Psychology  20. 

112 


ELEMENTARY  EDUCATION 

41.  An  Introduction  to  Guidance. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

An  overview  of  guidance  in  the  public  schools  including  the  history, 
philosophy  and  development  of  programs.  Procedures  and  instruments 
to  be  employed  by  the  classroom  teacher;  creation  of  conditions  for 
mental  health;  relation  of  guidance  to  other  phases  for  instruction. 

Prerequisites:  Education  20;  Psychology  20  and  23. 

42.  The  Education  of  the  Exceptional  Child. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

A  general  view  of  the  practices  and  programs  for  the  education  of 
exceptional  children  and  youth.  The  study  includes  children  with  physical, 
mental,  and  emotional  handicaps;  gifted  children.  Observation  in  special 
classes,  child  study,  and  the  survey  of  curricular  materials  used  in  their 
education  are  part  of  the  requirements. 

Prerequisites:    Education   20;  Psychology  20   and  23. 

45.  Visual  and  Sensory  Techniques. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

Psychological  bases  for  sensory  aids;  study  and  appraisal  of  various 
aids;  use  of  apparatus;  sources  of  equipment  and  supplies. 

Recommended  elective  in  elementary  and  secondary  fields.  Open 
only  to  seniors  preparing  to  teach  or  enter  the  ministry. 

Prerequisites:  Education  20;  Psychology  20  and  23. 

Elementary  Education 
El.  Ed.  22.  Music  in  the  Elementary  School. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 
Fundamentals  of  music,  movement  to  music,  study  of  child  voice, 
materials   and  methods   for  the   different  grades,   and   a   survey   of  the 
literature  used  in  the  public  schools. 

El.  Ed.  23.  The  Physical  Sciences  in  the  Elementary  School. 

3:2:2.  Second  semester. 

Recent  developments  in  arithmetic  and  science  and  the  applications 
in  the  classroom;  curriculum  planning;  modern  teaching  methods;  in- 
structional materials;  demonstrations  and  experiments  adapted  to  the  ele- 
mentary classroom. 

Prerequisites:  El.  Ed.  25,  one  year  of  a  laboratory  science. 

El.  Ed.  25.  Mathematics  for  the  Elementary  Grades. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 
An  introduction  to  the  fundamental  concepts  of  mathematics  and  a 
survey  of  the  new  and  old  in  mathematical  disciplines  as  applied  in  the 
elementary  school. 

113 


ELEMENTARY  EDUCATION 

El.  Ed.  32.  Art  in  the  Elementary  School. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 
A  course  in  the  understanding  of  the  child's  approach  to  art  and  his 
changing  needs  for  artistic  expression  showing  the  parallel  in  creative  and 
mental  development.  It  includes  methods  used  for  different  age  levels  and 
classroom  situations,  the  development  of  work  units  integrating  art  with 
other  subject  matter  areas,  sources  of  art  materials,  their  selection  and 
evaluation.  Lesson  plans  are  arranged  in  accordance  with  the  natural  de- 
velopment of  the  child. 

El.  Ed.  34.  Teaching  of  Reading 

3:3:0.  First  semester. 
A  study  of  the  teaching  materials  and  problems  of  instruction  in  the 
development  of  basic  reading  skills.  Textbooks,  effective  reading  programs, 
courses  of  study,  tests,  and  scientific  studies  in  this  field  are  investigated 
and  evaluated. 

El.  Ed.  36.  Communications  and  Group  Processes  in  the  Elementary  School. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 
A  course  dealing  with  fundamentals  for  language  growth  in  the 
areas  of  oral  and  written  expression,  correct  usage,  spelling,  and  hand- 
writing. The  development  of  basic  concepts  related  to  effective  citizen- 
ship in  a  democracy.  A  variety  of  learning  experiences  and  materials  will 
be  used  and  evaluated;  especially,  students  will  have  experience  in  pre- 
paring an  individual  resource  unit. 

El.  Ed.  37.  Children's  Literature. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 
A  study  of  appropriate  children's  books  and  poetry,  including  authors 
and  illustrators.  Attention  is  given  to  children's  reading  interests,  criteria 
and  aids  in  selecting  materials,  a  brief  survey  of  the  development  of  chil- 
dren's literature,  and  the  art  of  storytelling  and  its  place  in  the  curriculum. 

El.  Ed.  40.  Student  Teaching 

Twelve  semester  hours  credit.  First  semester. 

Each  student  spends  an  entire  semester  in  a  classroom  of  an  area 
public  school  under  the  supervision  of  a  carefully  selected  cooperating 
teacher.  Open  to  seniors  only. 

Student  teaching  begins  with  the  opening  of  the  public  schools. 
College  residence  halls  and  dining  hall  are  available  to  the  student 
teachers. 

Prerequisites:  Ed.  20,  Psychology  23,  Elementary  Education  23, 
34,  36  and  37. 

114 


SECONDARY  EDUCATION 

El.  Ed.  43.  Health  and  Safety  Education. 

3:3:0.  First  semester. 
Instruction  in  basic  health  facts  and  safety  procedures  in  everyday 
life;  sources,  evaluation  and  use  of  materials. 

El.  Ed.  44.  Senior  Seminar. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 
The  seminar  gives  immediate  help  with  pertinent  problems  in  stu- 
dent teaching.  Topics  related  to  over-all  success  in  teaching  will  be  thor- 
oughly dealt  with;  professional  ethics,  classroom  management,  home  and 
school  relationship,  community  responsibilities,  professional  standards, 
and  other  related  areas. 

Secondary  Education 
31.  History  and  Philosophy  of  Education. 

3:3:0.  First  semester. 

The  historical  developments  of  the  American  educational  system  are 
studied.  Also,  philosophers  past  and  present  are  analyzed  as  to  their  effect 
in  establishing  educational  trends  and  practices. 

Taught  only  during  the  last  three  weeks  as  a  part  of  the  professional 
semester. 

Prerequisites:  Education  20;  Psychology  20  and  23. 

40.  Student  Teaching. 

Six  semester  hours  credit.  First  semester. 
Given  to  seniors  only  as  a  part  of  the  professional  semester.  Each 
student  spends  full  time  in  the  classroom  for  a  minimum  of  6  weeks.  A 
cumulative  grade  point  average  of  2.0  during  the  first  six  semesters  in 
college  is  required. 

Summer  Student  Teaching  Program. 

Six  hours  credit.  Six  weeks  of  student  teaching  in  the  secondary 
field  in  the  Derry  Township  Public  Schools,  Hershey,  Pennsyl- 
vania. 
For  information  concerning  the  Summer  Student  Teaching  Program 
contact  the  Chairman  of  the  Department  of  Education. 

49.  Practicum  and  Methods. 

3:7V2:0.  Second  semester. 

A  presentation  and  evaluation  of  teaching  methods  used  in  secondary 
schools.  Experienced  teachers  will  be  invited  to  participate  in  class  dis- 
cussions and  visitations  will  be  made  to  the  classrooms  to  observe  good 
teaching. 

Required  of  all  seniors  in  secondary  education.  Prerequisites:  Educa- 
tion 20,  Psychology  20,  23. 

115 


Hi/n 


Wn 


Professor  Struble;  Associate  Professor  Faber; 

Assistant  Professor  Ford; 

Instructors  O'Donnell,  Ramsay,  Woods  and  Arnold 

The  purpose  of  the  English  Department  is  to  afford  students  a 
vital  contact  with  the  literature  of  our  language  and  to  assist  them  to 
write  and  speak  effectively. 

Major:  In  addition  to  the  required  course  in  English  composition 
(English  10a — 10b)  English  majors  will  take  English  20,  English  21a, 
22,  26a— 26b,  30a— 30b,  31, ,32,  35,  and  49. 

Independent  Study 

The  English  department  provides  three  types  of  recognition  of 
superior  ability: 

1)  Entering  students  of  proved  ability  in  English  composition 
may  under  certain  circumstances  be  exempted  from  one  or  both 
semesters  of  English  10,  providing  they  register  for  Advanced 
Composition  and  enough  additional  hours  in  literature  to  meet 
the  general  requirements  in  English  for  graduation. 

2)  Students  who  are  majoring  in  English  may  become  candidates 
for  departmental  honors  if  they  have  a  grade  point  average  of  3.0 
in  courses  in  English,  and  if  they  receive  permission  from  the 
head  of  the  department  and  the  Dean  of  the  College,  ordinarily 
no  later  than  the  end  of  the  first  semester  of  their  junior  year. 

116 


ENGLISH 

The  specific  program  for  departmental  honors  for  each  stu- 
dent accepted  for  the  Independent  Study  Program  will  be  worked 
out  by  that  student  in  consultation  with  the  head  of  the  depart- 
ment, in  accordance  with  the  plan  for  departmental  honors 
adopted  by  the  faculty  on  May  8,  1961. 

3)  A  senior  who  has  been  accepted  for  honors  and  who  looks 
forward  to  a  career  in  college  teaching  may,  upon  recommenda- 
tion of  the  head  of  the  department  and  appointment  by  the  Dean 
of  the  College,  become  an  intern  in  English,  to  render  such 
assistance  in  the  duties  of  the  English  department  as  will  in  some 
measure  help  to  prepare  him  for  a  professional  career  in  this 
field.  Ordinarily  only  one  intern  will  be  appointed  in  any  one 
academic  year. 

10a— 10b.  English  Composition. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 
A  study,  supplemented  by  practice  in  writing,  of  the  principles  of 
grammar,   logic,   rhetoric,    and   mechanics   which   enable   men   to   com- 
municate effectively. 

11a — lib.  Word  Study. 

1:1:0  per  semester. 
This  course  has  a  twofold  purpose:  (1)  to  give  the  student  some 
insight  into  linguistic  processes,  particularly  as  pertains  to  the  growth 
of  the  English  vocabulary;  and  (2)  to  increase  the  range  of  the  student's 
vocabulary,  in  order  that  he  may  have  greater  mastery  over  his  own 
native  tongue.  Problems  of  pronunciation  and  spelling  go  hand  in  hand 
with  vocabulary  building. 

English  20a— 20b.  Comparative  Literature. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 
This  course  has  five  principal  aims:  (1)  to  familiarize  students  with 
some  of  those  masterpieces  of  Western  World  literature  which  are  a  part 
of  the  common  heritage  of  every  cultivated  mind;  (2)  to  acquaint  students 
with  the  conventions,  techniques,  and  presuppositions  of  various  types 
of  literature,  so  that  they  may  be  able  to  deal  intelligently  with  these 
types  when  they  meet  them  elsewhere;  (3)  to  give  students  some  train- 
ing in  the  techniques  of  the  comparative  study  of  literature,  and  some 
appreciation  of  the  possibilities  of  this  approach  to  literature;  (4)  to  pro- 
vide students  with  genuinely  aesthetic  experiences,  in  the  hope  that  read- 
ing and  the  appreciation  of  literature  will  continue  to  enrich  their  spirits 
throughout  their  lives;  and  (5)  to  pass  on  to  them  some  sense  of  the 
underlying  values  of  our  cultural  system. 

117 


ENGLISH 

21a— 21b.  American  Literature. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 

First  semester:  a  survey  of  American  literature  from  the  beginnings 
to  the  Civil  War. 

Second  semester:  a  survey  of  American  literature  from  the  Civil  War 
to  the  present  day. 

22.  Public  Speaking. 

3:3:0.  Either  semester. 
Basic  principles  of  public  speaking  with  practical  training  in  diction 
and  platform  delivery. 

23.  Advanced  Composition. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 
Principles  and  techniques  of  the  short  story,  drama,  and  novel  for 
students  interested  in  creative  writing.  Extensive  practice  in  the  field  of 
student's  special  interest. 

24.  Contemporary  Literature. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 
A  study  of  currents  and  cross-currents  in  the  literature  produced  in 
England  and  America  since  World  War  I. 

26a— 26b.  Survey  of  English  Literature. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 

The  whole  course  of  English  literature,  from  the  beginnings  to  our 
own  time,  viewed  in  perspective  against  the  background  of  English  life 
and  thought,  foreign  influences,  and  the  developing  national  consciousness. 

Prerequisite:   English  10. 

30a— 30b.  Shakespeare. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 

A  survey  of  English  drama  from  its  beginnings  to  the  time  of  Shakes- 
peare; a  study  of  Shakespeare's  history  plays  and  their  place  in  the 
Elizabethan  world,  and  an  analysis  of  Shakespearean  comedy. 

A  study  of  Shakespeare's  tragedies  and  comedies  (problem  and 
romantic). 

Prerequisite:  English  20  or  26  or  consent  of  the  instructor. 

31.  History  of  the  English  Language. 

3:3:0.   First  semester. 
Historical  study  of  English  sounds,  grammatical  forms,  and  vocabu- 
lary; introduction  to  structural  linguistics;  standards  of  correctness  and 
current  usage.  This  course  is  primarily  intended  for  those  who  plan  to 

118 


ENGLISH 

teach  English  and  is  in  part  a  course  in  methods  of  teaching. 
Prerequisite:  English  20  or  26  or  consent  of  the  instructor. 

32.  Chaucer. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

Intended  to  give  the  student  a  reasonable  familiarity  with  Chaucer; 
to  provide  a  detailed  picture  of  mediaeval  life,  culture,  and  thought;  and 
to  develop  skill  in  the  reading  of  earlier  English. 

Prerequisite:  English  31. 

33.  Literature  of  the  Victorian  Period. 

3:3:0.   First  semester. 
A  survey  of  the  major  English  poets  and  prose  writers  from  1830 
to   1900. 

Prerequisite:   English  20  or  26  or  consent  of  the  instructor. 

35.  Poetry  of  the  Romantic  Movement. 

3:3:0.  First  semester. 
A  study  of  the   principal   poets   of  the   early   nineteenth   century: 
Wordsworth,  Coleridge,  Byron,  Shelley,  and  Keats. 

Prerequisite:   English  20  or  26  or  consent  of  the  instructor. 

37.  Contemporary  Drama. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 
A  survey  of  Continental,  British,  and  American  drama  since  1890. 
Prerequisite:  English  10. 

38.  The  Novel. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1969-1970. 
A  study  of  the  development  of  the  novel  in  England  (Richardson  to 
Joyce). 

40.  Eighteenth  Century  Literature. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1968-1969. 
A  survey  of  the  principal  English  authors  from  Dryden  to  Blake. 

49.  Seminar  in  English. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

Intensive  review  of  the  student's  earlier  work  in  English;  systematic 
coverage  of  the  gaps  in  the  student's  knowledge;  synthesis  of  the  whole. 

The  final  examination  in  this  course  will  constitute  a  comprehensive 
examination  for  the  department. 

Required  of  all  English  majors  in  their  senior  year. 

119 


Foreign  Languages 


Professors  Piel  and  Fields;  Associate  Professors  Damus  and 

Titcomb;  Assistant  Professors  Cooper,  Mrs.  Fields,  and 

Troutman;  Instructors  Hansen,  and  Saylor 

The  immediate  aim  of  this  department  is  to  assist  the  student  to 
acquire  a  working  knowledge  of  the  language  or  languages  which  he 
chooses  to  study. 

The  aim  of  the  courses  in  modern  foreign  languages  is  to  enable 
the  student  to  use  the  foreign  tongue  as  a  means  of  communication:  to 
hear,  speak,  and  eventually  to  read  and  write  the  language.  Through 
his  study  of  the  language  and  literature,  the  student  gains  a  deeper 
understanding  and  appreciation  of  the  life  and  thought  of  the  people 
of  the  country. 

Laboratory  practice  is  required  of  all  students  in  modern  foreign 
languages  except  those  in  German  11. 

Major:  A  student  may  elect  either  a  major  in  one  language  or  a 
departmental  major.  The  departmental  major  consists  of  at  least 
twenty-four  hours  in  one  language  and  at  least  twelve  hours  in  a 
second  language. 

In  French,  German  and  Spanish,  one  literature  course  is  offered 
each  year,  in  a  regular  rotation  of  courses. 

Independent  Study 

Students  who  are  majoring  in  a  foreign  language  may  become 
candidates  for  departmental  honors  if  they  have  a  grade  point  average 

120 


FOREIGN  LANGUAGES 

of  3.0  in  departmental  courses,  and  if  they  receive  permission  from  the 
departmental  staff  and  the  Dean  of  the  College,  ordinarily  no  later 
than  the  end  of  the  first  semester  of  their  junior  year. 

Honors  work  will  involve  the  selection  of  a  topic  for  investigation 
under  the  guidance  of  the  departmental  adviser,  independent  reading 
and  study,  frequent  conferences  with  the  adviser,  preparation  of  a 
paper  on  the  topic  to  be  submitted  by  April  1  of  the  senior  year, 
satisfactory  defense  of  the  paper  before  a  committee  composed  of  the 
departmental  staff,  the  Dean  of  the  College,  and  any  other  faculty 
members  who  may  be  invited  to  participate,  and  finally,  an  oral  exam- 
ination in  the  major  language.  If  these  requirements  are  satisfied,  the 
student  will  be  graduated  with  Honors  in  his  major  language. 

French 
Major:  Twenty-four  hours  of  work  above  the  elementary  level. 

1.  Elementary  French. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 
A  beginning  course  in  French;  audio-active  technique. 

10.  Intermediate  French. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 

A  continuation  of  French  1  with  further  practice  in  conversation, 
dictation,  and  in  reading  and  writing.  Attention  is  given  to  the  cultural 
and  historical  background  of  the  literature  that  is  read. 

Prerequisite:  French  1  or  two  years  of  secondary  school  French. 

20.  French  Literature  of  the  Sixteenth  and  Seventeenth  Centuries. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 
A  survey  of  the  literary  history  of  the  Renaissance  and  of  the  Classic 
periods  in  France. 

30.  French  Literature  of  the  Eighteenth  and  Nineteenth  Centuries. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 
A  study  of  the  outstanding  works  of  the  Age  of  Enlightenment  and 
of  the  Romantic,  Realist,  and  Naturalist  Schools  of  French  literature. 

40.  French  Literature  of  the  Twentieth  Century. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 
A  study  of  modern  French  literature  with  extensive  reading  of  the 
works  of  the  outstanding  authors. 

121 


FOREIGN  LANGUAGES 

45.  Seminar. 

1-3  hours  credit  per  semester. 
This  seminar  is  designed  to  supplement  and  integrate  the  student's 
knowledge,  to  stimulate  individual  study  and  research,  and  to  prepare 
him  for  future  work  in  his  field.  The  course  content  varies  according  to 
the  needs  of  the  group  involved.  For  those  students  who  are  planning 
to  teach,  the  seminar  will  provide  instruction  in  teaching  methods. 


German 
Major:  Twenty-four  hours  above  the  elementary  level. 

I.  Elementary  German. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 
A  beginning  course  in  German;  audio-active  technique. 

10.  Intermediate  German. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 

A  continuation  of  German  1  with  practice  in  conversation,  dictation, 
reading  and  writing.  Emphasis  is  given  to  the  cultural  and  historical 
background  of  the  literature  that  is  read. 

Prerequisite:  German  1  or  two  years  of  secondary  school  German. 

II.  Scientific  German. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 
Practice  in  reading  scientific  and  technical  German  with  emphasis 
on  vocabulary  and  the  special  difficulties  inherent  in  this  type  of  writing. 
General  readings  followed  by  readings  in  the  student's  major  field. 

22.  The  Classical  Period. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 
Background  of  the  Classical  Period;  detailed  study  of  the  period; 
readings  from  the  works  of  Lessing,  Goethe  and  Schiller. 

32.  German  Literature  of  the  Nineteenth  Century. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 
Romanticism;  Realism. 

42.  German  Literature  of  the  Twentieth  Century. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 
A  study  of  contemporary  German  literature  with  extensive  reading 
of  the  works  of  the  outstanding  authors. 

122 


FOREIGN  LANGUAGES 

45.  Seminar. 

1-3  credits  per  semester. 
This  seminar  is  designed  to  supplement  and  integrate  the  student's 
knowledge,  to  stimulate  individual  study  and  research,  and  to  prepare  him 
for  future  work  in  his  field.  The  course  content  varies  according  to  the 
needs  of  the  group  involved.  For  those  students  who  are  planning  to  teach, 
the  seminar  will  provide  instruction  in  teaching  methods. 

Greek 
1.  Elementary  Greek. 

3:3:0  per  semester.  Offered  1967-1968. 
An  intensive  course  in  the  basic  elements  of  ancient  Greek.  A  study 
of  forms  and  syntax,  with  easy  prose  composition. 

10a— 10b.  Intermediate  Greek. 

3:3:0  per  semester.  Offered  1968-1969. 
First  semester:  readings  from  the  New  Testament  Gospels. 
Second   semester:    readings   from   Xenophon's   Anabasis.    A   review 
of  grammar  throughout  the  year.  Prerequisite:  Greek  1. 

20.  Readings  from  the  Book  of  Acts. 

3:3:0.  First  semester.   Offered  1967-1968. 
Prerequisite:    Greek    10a — 10b. 

21.  Readings  in  Hellenistic  Greek. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1967-1968. 
Selections  from  the  Septuagint,  the  Greek  church  fathers. 
Prerequisite:    Greek    10a — 10b. 

30.  Readings  from  the  Epistles  of  Paul. 

3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1968-1969. 
Prerequisite:   Greek   10a — 10b. 

31.  Readings  from  the  Greek  Philosophers. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1968-1969. 
Prerequisite:   Greek   10a — 10b. 

Latin 

(given  upon  sufficient  demand) 

Major:  Twenty-four  hours  above  the  elementary  level. 
1.  Elementary  Latin. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 
A  beginning  course  in  Latin.  Study  of  forms  and  syntax,  with  easy 
prose  composition.  Selected  readings. 

123 


FOREIGN  LANGUAGES 

10.  Intermediate  Latin. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 
Review  of  forms  and  syntax.  Reading  of  selections  from  Cicero's 
Essays. 

Prerequisite:  Latin  1,  or  two  years  of  secondary  school  Latin. 

20.  Lyric  Poetry  and  Drama. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 
Selected  readings  from  Horace,  Catullus,  Plautus  and  Terence. 
Prerequisite:  Latin  10. 

30.  Letters  and  Satire. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 
Selected  readings  from  Cicero,  Pliny,  Horace  and  Juvenal. 
Prerequisite:  Latin  10. 

40.  History  and  Philosophy. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 
Selected  readings  from  Livy,  Tacitus,  and  Lucretius. 
Prerequisite:  Latin  10. 

Russian 
1.  Elementary  Russian. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 
An  elementary  course  with  oral-aural  approach. 

10.  Intermediate  Russian. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 

An  intermediate  course  in  Russian  with  continued  conversational 
practice;  reading  and  writing. 

Prerequisite:  Russian  1  or  two  years  of  Russian  in  the  secondary 
school. 

Spanish 
Major:  Twenty-four  hours  of  work  above  the  elementary  level. 

1.  Elementary  Spanish. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 
A  beginning  course  in  Spanish;  audio-active  technique. 

10.  Intermediate  Spanish. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 
A  continuation  of  Spanish  1  with  further  practice  in  conversation, 

124 


GEOGRAPHY 

dictation,  and  in  reading  and  writing.  Attention  is  given  to  Spanish  litera- 
ture in  its  cultural  and  historical  context. 

Prerequsite:  Spanish  1  or  two  years  of  secondary  school  Spanish. 

22.  Spanish  Literature  of  the  Sixteenth  and  Seventeenth  Centuries. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 
Reading  of  outstanding  authors  of  the  sixteenth  and  seventeenth 
centuries,  with  emphasis  upon  Cervantes,  Lope  de  Vega,  and  Calderon. 
Composition  and  conversation. 

32.  Spanish  Literature  from  the  Eighteenth  to  the  Twentieth  Centuries. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 
Extensive  reading,  composition  and  conversation. 

42.  A  Survey  of  Spanish  and  Latin  American  Literature. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 

First  semester:  a  survey  of  Spanish  literature  from  the  Middle  Ages 
to  the  present.  Intensive  reading,  composition,  and  conversation. 

Second  semester:  a  survey  of  Latin  American  literature  from  the 
sixteenth  century  to  the  present.  Intensive  reading,  composition,  and 
conversation. 

45.  Seminar. 

1-3  hours  credits  per  semester. 
This  seminar  is  designed  to  supplement  and  integrate  the  student's 
knowledge,  to  stimulate  individual  study  and  research,  and  to  prepare 
him  for  future  work  in  his  field.  The  course  content  varies  according  to 
the  needs  of  the  group  involved.  For  those  students  who  are  planning 
to  teach,  the  seminar  will  provide  instruction  in  teaching  methods. 

Geography 

Staff 
10a— 10b.  World  Geography. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 
A  basic  course  in  geography  to  develop  a  knowledge  and  an  appre- 
ciation of  the  worldwide  physical  factors  in  man's  environment  and  of  his 
adjustment  to  them.  The  course  includes  a  study  of  the  motions  of  the 
earth,  land  forms,  bodies  of  water,  soil,  climate,  vegetation,  with  special 
emphasis  on  man's  political,  economic,  and  social  responses  to  them. 
Knowledge  of  the  location  of  both  the  physical  and  cultural  aspects  of 
man's  habitat  is  related  to  contemporary  events. 

125 


GEOLOGY 

Geology 

Professor  Light 

20a— 20b.  Structural  and  Historical  Geology. 

2:2:0  per  semester. 

The  first  semester,  structural  geology,  acquaints  the  student  with  the 
forces  and  dynamic  agencies  by  which  the  earth  has  been  formed  and  has 
evolved  into  its  present  condition. 

The  second  semester,  historical  geology,  deals  with  the  probable  loca- 
tion of  land  and  sea  areas  of  each  of  the  various  geologic  periods,  and  the 
development  of  the  plants  and  animals  which  lived  during  periods  as 
identified  by  their  fossil  remains. 

German 

See  Foreign  Languages,  page  122. 

Greek 

See  Foreign  Languages,  page  123. 


126 


^D*% 


Assistant  Professors  W.  D.  McHenry,  J.  R.  McHenry,  and 
Petrofes;  Instructors  Darlington  and  Garman 

The  aims  of  this  department  are  ( 1 )  to  encourage  attitudes  and 
habits  of  good  total  health;  (2)  to  develop  the  student's  physical 
capacities;  (3)  to  provide  activities  which  will  enrich  his  leisure 
throughout  life. 

In  addition  to  the  family  physician's  report,  it  is  strongly  recom- 
mended that  all  entering  students  also  undergo  a  thorough  visual  ex- 
amination. 

All  students  must  pass  skill  and  knowledge  tests  in  team  and  indi- 
vidual sports  before  the  physical  education  requirement  is  completed. 
All  students  must  pass  swimming  requirements. 

Students  are  required  to  wear  the  regulation  gymnasium  outfit, 
which  may  be  purchased  at  the  college  bookstore. 

Health,  Hygiene,  and  Physical  Education  (Men)  (Women) 

0:2:0  per  semester. 

10.  Health  and  hygiene  include  instruction  in  biological  needs,  per- 
sonal cleanliness  and  grooming,  health  conservation,  effects  of  narcotics 
and  alcohol. 

10.-20.  (Men)  The  physical  education  activities  include:  touch  foot- 
ball, basketball,  softball,  volleyball,  archery,  badminton,  golf,  handball, 
squash,  wrestling,  tennis,  speedball,  swimming. 

127 


HEALTH  AND  PHYSICAL  EDUCATION 

10.-20.  (Women)  The  physical  education  activities  include:  soccer, 
lacrosse,  softball,  swimming,  golf,  archery,  volleyball,  badminton,  table 
tennis,  tennis,  gymnastics,  calesthenics,  field  hockey,  squash,  and  basket- 
ball. 

Health,  Hygiene,  and  Corrective  and  Adaptive  Physical  Education  (Men)  (Women) 

0:2:0  per  semester. 
11.-21.  Special  activities,  as  prescribed  by  a  physician,  for  students  with 
physical  handicaps  or  deficiencies. 

Not  open  to  students  qualified  for  Health,  Hygiene,  and  Physical 
Education  10.-20. 


128 


Science,     Maps 


Professor  Shay;  Associate  Professor  Geffen; 

Assistant  Professor  Fehr; 

Instructors  Joyce,  Minnich  and  Reed 

The  aim  in  the  teaching  of  history  is  to  acquaint  the  student  with 
human  behavior  in  the  dimension  of  past  time,  in  the  belief  that  by 
thus  extending  the  range  of  his  knowledge  he  may  also  enlarge  the 
scope  of  his  sympathies  and  become  more  richly  human. 

The  aim  in  the  teaching  of  political  science  is  to  acquaint  the  stu- 
dent with  the  many-sided  aspects  of  government,  in  the  belief  that  by 
thus  enlarging  the  extent  of  his  knowledge  he  may  expand  the  scope 
of  his  understanding  and  adopt  a  critical  and  objective  attitude  toward 
the  problems  of  modern  society. 

The  department  also  prepares  students  for  graduate  and  law 
schools  and  for  careers  in  teaching,  government,  and  business. 


History 

Major:  History  13,  43;  three  one-semester  courses  from  among 
History  14,  21,  22,  31,  32;  three  one-semester  courses  from 
among  History  30a — 30b,  40a — 40b;  one  one-semester  course  from 
among  History  46,  47,  48;  one  additional  one-semester  course  as 
approved  by  the  departmental  chairman. 

129 


HISTORY 

Independent  Study 

Students  majoring  in  history  may  participate  in  the  Independent 
Study  program  when  they  fulfill  the  following  requirements:  ( 1 )  dem- 
onstrate in  their  academic  work  the  caliber  of  scholarship  required  to 
undertake  an  extensive  research  project;  (2)  achieve  a  3.3  grade  point 
average  in  departmental  courses  and  a  2.5  grade  point  average  in  all 
college  courses;  and  (3)  apply  for  and  receive  permission  for  such 
participation  from  the  departmental  staff  and  the  Dean  of  the  College 
no  later  than  the  end  of  the  first  semester  of  the  junior  year. 

During  his  participation  in  the  program,  the  student  must  (1) 
submit  to  the  departmental  chairman  periodic  progress  reports;  (2) 
show  progress  at  a  rate  and  at  a  level  indicating  that  he  will  complete 
the  program  on  time  and  at  the  desired  level  of  achievement;  and  (3) 
maintain  a  3.3  grade  point  average  in  departmental  courses  and  a  2.5 
grade  point  average  in  all  college  courses. 

The  participant  must  ( 1 )  obtain  departmental  approval  of  a  re- 
search topic;  (2)  prepare  an  essay  on  the  subject  selected  for  research 
under  the  guidance  of  a  member  of  the  departmental  staff;  (3)  com- 
plete the  writing  of  the  essay  by  April  1  of  the  senior  year;  (4)  defend 
the  essay  in  a  manner  to  be  determined  by  the  departmental  staff  and 
the  Dean  of  the  College;  (5)  pursue  a  program  of  independent  read- 
ing approved  by  the  departmental  staff;  (6)  demonstrate,  by  means 
of  a  written  and/or  oral  examination,  knowledge  and  understanding 
of  the  material  studied  in  the  independent  reading  program;  and  (7) 
present  to  the  departmental  chairman  an  assessment  of  his  experience 
in  the  program.  Upon  fulfilling  these  requirements,  the  student  will  be 
recommended  by  the  departmental  staff  to  the  Dean  of  the  College  for 
graduation  with  departmental  honors. 

13.  Introduction  to  Historiography. 

3:3:0.  First  semester. 

Theory  and  practice  in  the  writing  of  history.  The  work  of  selected 
historians  is  studied  and  each  student  conducts  and  reports  upon  his  own 
research.  Training  is  given  in  research  methods  and  in  the  preparation 
of  research  reports. 

14.  Ancient  and  Medieval  Society. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

An  introduction  to  the  classical  civilization  of  the  Mediterranean 
basin  and  the  first  European  civilization.  The  emphasis  is  upon  the  social 
and  intellectual  elements  as  Christianity  fuses  with  Greek  and  Roman 
culture. 

130 


HISTORY 

17a— 17b.  History  of  Western  Civilization. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 
A  survey  concerned  with  the  political,  social,  economic,  and  intellec- 
tual development  of  western  culture.  The  interpretations  of  the  major  his- 
torians are  emphasized. 

21.  The  Origins  of  Modern  Europe,  1300-1600. 

3:3:0.  First  semester. 
A  study  of  the  transition  period  out  of  which  the  modern  state  and 
the  modern  social,  economic,  and  intellectual  framework  developed.  Em- 
phasis is  upon  the  Renaissance  and  the  Reformation. 

22.  The  Old  Regime,  1600-1815. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 
A  study  in  the  stabilization  of  Europe  and  the  elements  present  chal- 
lenging this  stability. 

23.  Political  and  Social  History  of  the  United  States  and  Pennsylvania. 

3:3:0.  Either  semester. 
A  survey  of  American  history  from  the  earliest  settlements  to  the 
present  time.  Emphasis  is  placed  upon  the  development  of  Pennsylvania 
as  colony  and  Commonwealth. 

30a— 30b.  American  Colonial  and  National  History  to  1865. 

3:3:0  per  semester.  Offered  1968-1969. 

The  first  semester  is  devoted  to  American  history  from  the  European 
origins  to  1800,  with  special  attention  to  the  development  of  Pennsyl- 
vania. 

The  second  semester  deals  with  basic  aspects  of  the  development 
of  popular  democracy  in  the  United  States  from  the  Jeffersonian  period 
through  the  Civil  War,  with  stress  on  Pennsylvania's  participation. 

31.  Europe  from  1815  to  1914. 

3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1968-1969. 
Nineteenth   century  Europe  from  the  Congress   of  Vienna  to   the 
outbreak  of  World  War  I.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  diplomatic  relations, 
revolutionary  and  liberal  movements,  the  new  colonialism,  and  the  social 
changes  of  the  latter  part  of  the  nineteenth  century. 

32.  Europe  from  1914  to  the  Present. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1968-1969. 
World  Wars  I  and  II,  emphasizing  the  causes  of  the  world  conflicts, 
the  efforts  to  maintain  peace,  the  rise  of  dictatorships,  the  tensions  in 
international  relations,  and  other  aspects  of  the  post-war  periods. 

131 


POLITICAL  SCIENCE 

40a— 40b.  The  United  States,  1865  to  the  Present. 

3:3:0  per  semester.  Offered  1969-1970. 

The  first  semester  deals  with  the  post-Civil  War  developments  of 
American  history  from  1865  to  1900.  Special  reference  will  be  made  to 
Pennsylvania. 

The  second  semester  is  concerned  with  the  United  States  in  the 
twentieth  century,  with  special  consideration  of  Pennsylvania's  role. 

43.  Senior  Seminar  in  History. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 
A  review  of  the  student's  college  program  in  history,  with  reading, 
discussion  and  writing  assignments  to  serve  the  following  ends:  (1) 
synthesis  of  previous  course  work  in  history;  (2)  relation  of  the  academic 
discipline  of  history  to  other  fields  of  knowledge;  and  (3)  formulation 
and  expression  of  a  personal  philosophy  of  history  by  each  student. 

46.  History  of  Russia. 

3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1969-1970. 
A  survey  of  Russian  history  from  ancient  times  to  the  present,  with 
special  attention  to  developments  since  the  seventeenth  century. 

47.  History  of  the  Far  East. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1969-1970. 
Social,  political,  economic,  and  cultural  institutions  of  the  Far  East. 
Emphasis  is  placed  upon  the  trends  since   1500. 

48.  History  of  Latin  America. 

3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1968-1969. 
A  survey  of  the  Latin  American  republics  from  their  colonial  be- 
ginnings to  the  present  time.  Political,  social,  economic,  and  intellectual 
phases  of  their  development  are  considered. 

49.  Select  Problems  in  History. 

3:3:0.  First  semester. 

3:3:0  per  semester  for  independent  study  participants,  with  a 

maximum  of  nine  hours  credit. 

A  course  to  provide  the  student  with  an  opportunity  to  explore  in 

depth  a  topic  of  special   interest.   Required   of  majors  enrolled   in  the 

Independent  Study  program  in  history.  Open  to  other  history  majors  by 

permission  of  the  instructor  and  the  departmental  chairman. 

Political  Science 
Major:  Political  Science  10a— 10b,  20,  21,  30,  31,  40,  41,  43, 
and  three  additional  hours  as  approved  by  the  departmental  chairman. 
Majors  are  also  required  to  take  three  one-semester  courses  from 
among  History  30a — 30b,  40a — 40b. 

132 


POLITICAL  SCIENCE 

Independent  Study 

Students  majoring  in  political  science  may  participate  in  the 
Independent  Study  program  when  they  fulfill  the  following  require- 
ments: (1)  demonstrate  in  their  academic  work  the  caliber  of  schol- 
arship required  to  undertake  an  extensive  research  project;  (2)  achieve 
a  3.0  grade  point  average  in  departmental  courses  and  a  2.5  grade 
point  average  in  all  college  courses;  and  (3)  apply  for  and  receive 
permission  for  such  participation  from  the  departmental  staff  and  the 
Dean  of  the  College  no  later  than  the  end  of  the  sophomore  year. 

During  his  participation  in  the  program,  the  student  must  (1) 
submit  to  the  departmental  chairman  periodic  progress  reports;  (2) 
show  progress  at  a  rate  and  at  a  level  indicating  that  he  will  complete 
the  program  on  time  and  at  the  desired  level  of  achievement,  and  (3) 
maintain  a  3.0  grade  point  average  in  departmental  courses  and  a  2.5 
grade  point  average  in  all  college  courses. 

The  participant  must  ( 1 )  use  the  junior  year  for  preliminary 
work  involving  selected  readings  and  gathering  of  source  material  for 
a  research  topic;  (2)  obtain  departmental  approval  of  a  research 
topic;  (3)  prepare  an  essay  on  the  subject  selected  for  research  under 
the  guidance  of  a  member  of  the  departmental  staff;  (4)  complete  the 
writing  of  the  essay  by  April  1  of  the  senior  year;  (5)  defend  the  essay 
in  a  manner  to  be  determined  by  the  departmental  staff  and  the  Dean 
of  the  College;  (6)  pursue  a  program  of  independent  reading  ap- 
proved by  the  departmental  staff;  (7)  demonstrate,  by  means  of  a 
written  and  or  oral  examination,  knowledge  and  understanding  of  the 
material  studied  in  the  independent  reading  program;  and  (8)  present 
to  the  departmental  chairman  an  assessment  of  his  experience  in  the 
program.  Upon  fulfilling  these  requirements,  the  student  will  be  rec- 
ommended by  the  departmental  staff  to  the  Dean  of  the  College  for 
graduation  with  departmental  honors. 

10a— 10b.  American  Government  and  Politics. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 
A  study  of  the  structure,  functions,  and  processes  of  American  na- 
tional government;  the  Constitution;  federalism  and  its  problems;  civil 
rights;  political  parties  and  pressure  groups;  elections;  and  the  increasing 
powers  of  the  federal  government.  Attention  is  given  to  problems  facing 
our  government  and  to  current  world  affairs. 

20.  Comparative  Government. 

3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1969-1970. 
A   comparative   study   of   important   governmental    systems   of   the 
world,  both  democratic  and  authoritarian.  Comparison  and  contrasts  are 

133 


POLITICAL  SCIENCE 

made  between  unitary  and  federal  forms.  Special  study  is  made  of  the 
governmental  system  in  force  in  the  Soviet  Union. 

Political  Science  10a — 10b  is  a  prerequisite,  or  a  corequisite. 

21.  Foreign  Relations. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1969-1970. 

A  study  of  the  development,  structure,  and  functions  of  the  United 
States  diplomatic  and  consular  service.  Consideration  is  given  to  re- 
cruitment, training  and  promotions  in  the  foreign  service.  Emphasis  is 
given  to  the  problems  faced  by  the  American  diplomatic  officials  in  con- 
temporary international  relations. 

Political  Science  10a — 10b  is  a  prerequisite,  or  a  corequisite. 

22.  State  and  County  Government. 

3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1968-1969. 

This  course  deals  with  the  structure  and  functions  of  state  and 
county  government.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  federal-state-local  relationships, 
on  administrative  organization  and  services,  on  the  courts,  and  on  legis- 
lative representation. 

Political  Science  10a — 10b  is  a  prerequisite,  or  a  corequisite. 

23.  City  Government. 

3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1969-1970. 

This  course  deals  with  the  rise  of  urbanization  and  the  accompany- 
ing growth  of  municipal  functions.  Attention  is  paid  to  metropolitan  areas 
to  the  legal  process  and  status  of  cities,  to  municipal  relations  with  state 
and  national  government,  to  urban  politics,  and  to  the  various  forms  of 
city  government. 

Political  Science  10a — 10b  is  a  prerequisite,  or  a  corequisite. 

30.  Political  Parties  in  the  United  States. 

3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1968-1969. 
A  study  of  the  origins  and  history  of  American  political  parties, 
their    development,    organization,    leaders,    conventions,    platforms,    and 
campaigns.  Emphasis  is  given  to  recent  changes  in  American  political  pat- 
terns. 

31.  American  Constitutional  Government. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1968-1969. 

A  study  of  the  growth  and  development  of  the  Constitution  through 
the  medium  of  judicial  construction.  Recent  decisions  illustrating  its  ap- 
plication to  new  conditions  of  the  present  age,  and  proposals  for  court 
modification  are  given  particular  attention. 

Political  Science  10a — 10b  is  a  prerequisite,  or  a  corequisite. 

134 


POLITICAL  SCIENCE 

33.  Public  Opinion. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1968-1969. 
An  analysis  of  the  nature  and  sources  of  contemporary  public  opin- 
ion, with  special  attention  to  types  of  censorship  and  to  modern  propa- 
ganda devices. 

40.  Political  Theory. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1969-1970. 
A  survey  of  the  different  philosophies  and  theories  of  government, 
ancient  and  modern,  with  special  reference  to  political  philosophy  since 
the  sixteenth  century. 

41.  International  Politics. 

3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1969-1970. 

A  course  in  the  origin,  forms,  dynamics  and  prospects  of  the  inter- 
national political  pattern,  with  emphasis  on  current  developments  and 
changing  concepts  in  world  politics. 

Political  Science  10a — 10b  is  a  prerequisite,  or  a  corequisite. 

43.  Senior  Seminar  in  Political  Science. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 
An  intensive  review  of  the  student's  college  program  in  political 
science,  with  reading,  discussion,  and  written  assignments  to  accomplish 
the  following  purposes:  ( 1)  integration  of  earlier  course  work  in  political 
science;  (2)  relation  of  the  discipline  to  other  fields  of  knowledge;  and 
(3)  development  and  expression  of  an  individual  political  philosophy 
by  the  student. 

Languages 

See  Foreign  Languages,  page  120. 

Latin 

See  Foreign  Languages,  page  123. 


Mathematics 


Professor  Bissinger; 

Assistant  Professors  Burras  and  Henning; 

Instructor  Lewin 

The  aims  of  the  Department  of  Mathematics  are:  (1)  to  make 
available  mathematical  theory  and  technique  needed  by  students  in 
applied  sciences  and  industry;  (2)  to  prepare  students  interested  in 
mathematics  for  graduate  schools  as  well  as  for  secondary  school 
teaching;  (3)  to  provide  the  cultural  advantages  of  a  knowledge  of 
mathematics. 

Major:  Math  11,  21,  25,  31  plus  at  least  three  semester  hours 
from  each  of  the  following  divisions : 

I     Analysis — Math  40;  Math  46. 
II     Algebra  and  Topology — Math.  48;  Math  49. 
Ill     Statistics— Math  12*;  Math  37 ;  Math  4 1 . 


Independent  Study 

Students  may  participate  in  the  departmental  Independent  Study 
Program  if  they  have  demonstrated  high  scholastic  ability  and  have  re- 
ceived permission  for  such  participation  from  the  Departmental  Chair- 
man and  the  Dean  of  the  College  no  later  than  the  end  of  the  first 
semester  of  the  junior  year. 


*  The    requirement    in    Statistics    can    be    satisfied    with    Math    12    only    if    an    additional 
three  semester  hours  are  taken  from  one  of  the  other  two  divisions. 

136 


MATHEMATICS 

A  student  may  receive  upon  graduation  departmental  honors  if 
he  has  maintained  a  3.0  grade  point  average  in  mathematics  and  has 
satisfactorily  completed  the  Independent  Study  Program. 

Plan  of  Study  in  Statistics 

Mathematics  37,  41  form  the  basis  for  a  concentration  in  statis- 
tics. A  statistical  and  computing  laboratory  equipped  with  Brunsviga 
desk  calculating  machines  is  available  to  students  doing  computational 
work  in  connection  with  this  program  of  study.  Additional  training 
with  IBM  electrical  punched  card  equipment  can  be  arranged  with 
local  industry  and  nearby  military  installations. 

Plan  of  Study  in  Mathematical  Physics 

Students  interested  in  mathematical  physics  may  elect  to  major 
in  either  the  Department  of  Physics  or  the  Department  of  Mathematics 
and  follow  a  plan  of  study  in  mathematical  physics  worked  out  by  a 
suitable  adviser  to  whom  they  will  be  referred.  Ordinarily  the  program 
will  include  Mathematics  31,  37,  40,  and  46. 

Plan  of  Study  in  Actuarial  Science 

The  program  as  outlined  on  page  59  is  endorsed  by  the  Phila- 
delphia Section  of  the  Society  of  Actuaries  who  sponsor  it  on  this 
campus.  The  actuarial  examinations,  parts  1,  2,  and  3,  are  also  given 
on  this  campus  which  is  a  testing  center.  Interested  students  should 
consult  with  the  Departmental  Chairman. 

Plan  of  Study  in  Engineering 

The  cooperative  pre-engineering  program  is  described  on  page 
68.  Ordinarily  the  program  will  include  Mathematics  11,  12,  21,  40, 
and  46. 

Courses 
1.  Introductory  Analysis. 

3:3:0.  First  semester. 
This  is  a  pre-calculus  course  which  includes  topics  from  college  alge- 
bra and  analytical  trigonometry.  This  course  is  recommended  for  students 
who  lack  the  necessary  background  for  calculus. 

10.  Basic  Concepts  of  Mathematics. 

3:3:0.  Either  semester. 
The  foundational  aspects  of  mathematics  at  work  in  the  world  today 
are  stressed  for  cultural  as  well  as  some  technical  competence.  This  course 

137 


MATHEMATICS 

is  addressed  to  the  non-science  student  and  presents  the  scientific  and  hu- 
manistic importance  of  the  subject  in  an  historical  approach.  Klein, 
Mathematics  for  Liberal  A  rts. 

11.  Elementary  Analysis  I  &  II. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 
The  fundamental  ideas  of  analytic  geometry  and  calculus  are  intro- 
duced with  applications.  A  thorough  background   in   trigonometry   and 
algebra  is  necessary.  Protter  and  Morrey,  Calculus  with  Analytic  Geom- 
etry. 

12.  Elementary  Statistics. 

3:2:2.  Either  semester. 
Included  in  this  course  are  descriptive  statistics,  an  introduction  to 
probability  concepts,   simple  problems  of  statistical  inference,   and  ele- 
mentary treatment  of  analysis  of  pairs  of  measurements.  Hoel,  Elementary 
Statistics. 

21.  Intermediate  Analysis  I  &  II. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 
This  is  a  continuation  of  Mathematics   1 1   with  an  introduction  to 
partial  differentiation,  multiple  integration,  infinite  series,  differential  equa- 
tions,   and   linear   algebra.    Prerequisite:    Mathematics    11.    Protter    and 
Morrey,  Modern  Mathematical  Analysis. 

25.  Development  of  the  Real  Number  System. 

3:3:0.  First  semester. 

An  introduction  to  logic,  set  theory,  and  a  rigorous  development  of 
the  number  system. 

31.  Advanced  Analysis  I  &  II. 

3:3:0    per  semester. 
Rigorous  existence  proofs  of  functional  concepts  of  continuity,  dif- 
ferentiation, integration,  and  series  are  given.  Use  is  made  of  transforma- 
tion theory  by  Jacobians.  Buck,  Advanced  Calculus.  Prerequisite:  Mathe- 
matics 21.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  21  and  25. 

33.  Geometry. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1967-1968. 
Foundations  of  geometry,  historical  background,  and  an  introduction 
to  non-Euclidean  geometry.  This  course  is  designed  primarily  for  teachers. 
Moise,  Elementary  Geometry  from  an  Advanced  Standpoint. 

37.  Mathematical  Statistics. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 
Calculus  is  used  to  develop  basic  statistical  tools  and  notions.  Gen- 
erating functions,  frequency  distributions  of  one,  two,  or  more  variables, 

138 


MATHEMATICS 

and  various  tests  are  considered.  Hoel,  Introduction  to  Mathematical  Sta- 
tistics. 

40.  Methods  of  Applied  Mathematics. 

3:3:0  per  semester.  Offered  1967-1968. 
Use  is  made  of  matrices  and  determinants,  the  concept  of  linear 
vector  spaces  and  characteristic  values.  Formulation  and  solution  of  cer- 
tain partial   differential   equations   are   accompanied   by   a   treatment  of 
integral   equations,    difference   equations,    and   Green's   function. 

40.1.  Mathematics  Seminar. 

1:1:0.  Either  semester. 
Logic,  computer  language,  finite  differences  are  among  those  topics 
which  could  be  selected  as  a  basis  for  a  one-semester  seminar.  Special 
problems  given  on  a  recent  competitive  examination  are  presented  and 
discussed  in  a  seminar  for  upper  classmen. 

40.1  (T).  Mathematics  Seminar. 

1:1:0.  Second  semester. 
A  senior  seminar  designed  for  mathematics  teachers  is  required  of 
those  students  who  wish  to  become  certified  to  teach  mathematics. 

41.  Probability. 

3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1968-1969. 
This  course  constitutes  a  rigorous  examination  of  the  notions  of 
sample  space,  random  variables,  distributions  in  time  and  space,  and 
certain  unifying  limit  theorems.  Time  permitting,  it  may  include  Markoff 
chain  theory  and  related  topics.  Feller,  Introduction  to  Probability  Theory 
with  Applications,  Vol.  1.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  37. 

46.  Functions  of  a  Complex  Variable. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1968-1969. 
An  introductory  course  that  includes  analytic  functions,  Cauchy's  in- 
tegral theorem,  residue  theory,  contour  integrals,  and  conformal  mapping. 
Churchill,    Complex    Variables   and    Applications.    Prerequisite:    Mathe- 
matics 21. 

48.  Algebra. 

3:3:0  per  semester.  Offered  1968-1969. 
Topics   such   as   group   theory,   rings,   ideals,   field   extensions,    and 
Galois  theory  will  be  studied.  Hernstein,  Topics  in  Algebra.  Prerequisite: 
Mathematics  25. 

139 


MATHEMATICS 


49 


Topology. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1967-1968. 
The  elements  of  point-set  theory  are  introduced  with  topological 
considerations  to  appreciate  generalization.  Moore.  Elementary  General 
Topology.  Prerequisites:  Mathematics  25  and  31. 


Independent  Study  in  Mathematics. 

3:3:0  per  semester.  (Maximum  of  3  semesters.) 
After  receiving  permission  for  participation,  the  student  will  prepare 
a  paper  on  a  selected  subject  for  research  which  is  approved  by  the  de- 
partment. This  paper  should  be  completed  by  the  end  of  the  first  semester 
of  the  senior  year,  and  must  be  defended  in  a  manner  determined  by  the 
departmental  staff. 


140 


Associate  Professor  Smith,  Chairman; 

Professors  Bender,  Carmean; 

Associate  Professors  Fairlamb,  Lanese,  Stachow, 

and  Thurmond; 

Assistant   Professors   Curfman,   Getz,   Reeve,   and  Rovers; 

Instructors  Jamanis,  March,  Veri  and  Zimmerman 

The  aims  of  the  Department  of  Music  are  to  train  artists  and 
teachers;  to  teach  music  historically  and  aesthetically  as  an  element  of 
liberal  culture;  and  to  offer  courses  that  give  a  thorough  and  practical 
understanding  of  theoretical  subjects. 

Attendance  at  all  faculty  recitals  and  a  portion  of  student  re- 
citals is  compulsory. 

All  majors  in  Music  or  Music  Education  are  required  to  take 
private  instruction  on  the  campus  if  the  Department  offers  instruc- 
tion in  the  individual's  principal  performance  medium. 

Participation  in  music  organizations  may  be  required  of  all 
majors. 

For  cost  of  private  lessons  see  page  36. 

141 


MUSIC 

Music 
(A.B.  with  a  major  in  Music) 
This  program  is  designed  for  those  students  desiring  a  liberal 
arts  context  in  their  preparation  for  a  career  in  applied  music. 

Special  Requirements 

All  majors  are  required  to  take  an  hour  lesson  per  week  in  the 
major  performance  area  and  are  expected  to  perform  a  half  or  full 
recital  in  the  junior  year  and  a  full  recital  in  the  senior  year. 

All  majors  outside  of  the  keyboard  area  are  required  to  take  a 
Vi  hour  lesson  per  week  in  piano  until  the  minimum  requirements 
have  been  met. 

For  the  recommended  plan  of  study  in  this  program  see  page  70. 

Music  Education 
(B.S.  with  a  major  in  Music  Education) 

This  program  has  been  approved  by  the  Pennsylvania  State 
Council  of  Education  and  the  National  Association  of  Schools  of 
Music  for  the  preparation  of  teachers  of  public  school  music. 

The  Music  Education  curriculum  requires  two  private  one-half 
hour  lessons  per  week  (one  each  in  the  major  and  a  minor  perfor- 
mance area),  one  of  which  is  included  in  the  tuition  charge.  A  charge 
is  made  for  the  second  private  lesson. 

For  the  recommended  plan  of  study  in  this  program  see  page  72. 

I.  Theory  of  Music 
Sight  Singing 
Music  10.  Sight  Singing  I. 

1:2:0.  First  semester. 
A  beginning  course  in  music  reading  with  the  use  of  syllables,  in- 
corporating the  elements  of  melody  and  rhythm  within  the  beat  and  its 
division.  The  following  are  studied:  basic  beat  patterns,  simple  and  com- 
pound time,  diatonic  intervals,  implied  harmonic  structure  within  the 
melodic  line,  the  C  clefs,  modulation. 

Music  11.  Sight  Singing  II. 

1:2:0.  Second  semester. 
A  continuation  of  music  reading,  employing  more  difficult  melodies 
and  rhythms,  the  beat  and  its  subdivision,  and  additional  interval  prob- 
lems. Phrasing  and  the  application  of  dynamics  are  stressed. 

142 


MUSIC 

Music  20.  Sight  Singing  III. 

1:2:0.  First  semester. 

Exercises  in  four  clefs,  employing  vocal  literature  of  increasing  diffi- 
culty, both  tonal  and  rhythmic.  Modal  melodies,  remote  modulation, 
superimposed  background  and  meter,  changing  and  less  common  time 
signatures  are  stressed. 


Dictation  (Ear  Training) 
Music  12.  Ear  Training  I. 

1:2:0.  First  semester. 
Includes  the  study  of  the  basics  of  music  notation  essential  for  the 
writing  of  melodic  and  rhythmic  dictation.  Aural  analysis  and  tonal 
memory  are  developed.  Essentials  of  tonality  are  covered,  and  harmonic 
dictation  is  begun  in  the  latter  half  of  the  course.  Correlated  with  Sight 
Singing  and  Harmony. 

Music  13.  Ear  Training  II. 

1:2:0.  Second  semester. 
Increasing  complexity  and  length  of  melodic  and  rhythmic  dicta- 
tion with  emphasis   upon   the   development   of  harmonic   dictation.    In- 
versions of  triads,  seventh  and  ninth  chords  are  included.  Modality  is  in- 
troduced together  with  strict  species  counterpoint  in  two  and  three  voices. 

Music  22.  Ear  Training  III. 

1:2:0.  First  semester. 
A   study   of   more    difficult   tonal   problems   including    modulation, 
chromaticism,  and  altered  chords. 

Harmony 

Music  14.  Harmony  I. 

2:3:0.  First  semester. 
A  study  of  the  rudiments  of  music  including  notation,  scales,  inter- 
vals, and  triads;  the  connection  of  triads  by  harmonizing  melodies  and 
basses  with  fundamental  triads;  playing  of  simple  cadences  at  the  piano; 
analysis  of  phrases  and  periods. 

Music  15.  Harmony  II. 

2:3:0.  Second  semester. 
A  study  of  inversions  of  triads,  seventh  and  ninth  chords,  harmoniza- 
tions of  melodies  and  figured  basses;  analysis  and  composition  of  the 
smaller  forms;  modulation. 

143 


MUSIC 

Music  24.  Harmony  III. 

2:2:0.  First  semester. 
The  use  of  dominant  and  diminished  sevenths  as  embellishments  of 
and  substitutes  for  diatonic  harmony;  harmonization  of  melodies  and 
figured  basses;  analysis  of  two  and  three-part  song  forms;  composition 
in  two-part  song  form.  Playing  of  more  advanced  cadences  and  modula- 
tions at  the  piano. 

Music  29.  Harmony  IV  (Elementary  Composition)*  on  special  announcement 

2:2:0.  First  semester. 
Melody  analysis  and  writing;  four  part  choral  writing;  continuation  of 
two  and  three-part  song-form  analysis  and  composition.  Composition  in 
Theme   and  Variations,   Fantasia,   Rondo   and   Dance   forms.   Study   of 
contemporary  harmonic  ideas. 

Music  39.  Keyboard  Harmony. 

2:2:0.  Second  semester. 
Work  at  the  piano  includes  the  harmonization  of  melodies  both 
with  four-part  harmony  and  with  various   accompaniment  forms;   also 
transposition,  improvisation,  modulation,  reading  from  figured  bass,  and 
from  score. 

Additional  Theory  Courses 

Music  21.  Orchestration  and  Scoring  for  the  Band. 

2:2:0.  Second  semester. 
Study  of  instrumentation,  devices,  techniques,  and  mechanics  of 
scoring  transcriptions,  arrangements  and  solos  for  orchestra  and  concert 
band;  special  work  in  scoring  for  marching  band.  Laboratory  analysis 
and  demonstration  of  various  instrumental  colors  and  combinations. 
Emphasis  is  placed  on  creative  scoring. 

Music  31.  Form  and  Analysis. 

2:2:0.  First  semester. 
A  study  of  the  structure  of  music  including  hymns,  folk  songs,  two, 
three  and  five-part  song  forms,   variations,   contrapuntal   forms,   rondo 
and  sonata  forms.   Compositions  in  these  forms   are  studied  primarily 
for  their  structural  content.  Course  includes  extensive  listening. 

Music  36.  Form  and  Analysis  II  *  on  special  announcement 
2:2:0.  Second  semester. 
A  study  through  analysis  and  listening  of  fugal  forms,  suite,  over- 
ture, complete  sonata  forms  (evolution  of  the  symphony),  string  quartet, 
the  tone  poem.  Analysis  of  classical  and  contemporary  works  in  these 
forms. 

*  B.A.  Program  in  Music. 

144 


MUSIC 

Music  40.1.  Counterpoint. 

2:2:0.  Second  semester. 

Introductory  work  in  strict  counterpoint  through  three  and  four- 
part  work  in  all  the  species. 

Music  40.2.  Arranging  and  Scoring  for  the  Modern  Orchestra. 

2:2:0.  First  or  second  semester. 
Study  of  modern  harmony,  modulation,   style  analysis,   special  in- 
strumental effects  as  applied  to  modern  arranging.  Laboratory  analysis 
and  demonstration  of  sectional  and  ensemble  voicings. 

Music  40.3.  Composition,  Schillinger  System. 

Private  teaching. 

A  scientific  system  of  music  composition  created  by  the  late  Joseph 
Schillinger,  teacher  of  such  accomplished  professionals  as  George 
Gershwin,  Ted  Royal  Dewar. 

The  major  aims  of  the  system  are  to:  (1)  generalize  underlying  prin- 
ciples regarding  the  behavior  cf  tonal  phenomena;  (2)  classify  all  the 
available  resources  of  our  tonal  system;  (3)  teach  a  comprehensive  appli- 
cation of  scientific  method  to  all  components  of  the  tonal  art,  to  problems 
of  melody,  rhythm,  harmony,  counterpoint,  orchestration  and  to  compo- 
sition itself. 

The  system  is  best  studied  in  the  light  of  a  traditional  background  and 
admission  to  course  or  private  instruction  is  by  special  permission  only. 

I!.  Methods  and  Materials 

Music  Ed.  23.  Methods  and  Materials,  Vocal:  Kindergarten  through  Third  Grade. 

2:2:0.  Second  semester. 
A  comprehensive  study  of  the  use  of  the  child's  singing  voice  in  the 
primary  grades,  including  the  treatment  of  uncertain  singers,  acquaintance 
with  the  best  collections  of  rote  songs,  and  practice  in  choosing,  memoriz- 
ing, singing,  and  presenting  a  large  number  of  these  songs',  methods  of  pre- 
senting rhythm  through  singing  games  and  simple  interpretive  movements; 
use  of  classroom  instruments;  beginnings  of  directed  music  appreciation; 
foundation  studies  for  later  technical  developments.  Comparative  study  of 
recognized  Public  School  Music  Series  of  books. 

Music  Ed.  33A.  Methods  and  Materials,  Vocal:  Fourth,  Fifth  and  Sixth  Grades. 

2:2:0.  First  semester. 
A  study  of  the  child's  singing  voice  in  the  intermediate  grades;  atten- 
tion is  given  to  the  formal  or  technical  work  of  these  grades  with  an  evalu- 
ation of  appropriate  texts  and  recent  approaches.  Preparation  of  lesson 
plans,  and  observation  are  required.  Music  appreciation  is  continued. 

145 


MUSIC 

Music  Ed.  33B.  Methods  and  Materials,  Instrumental:  Fourth,  Fifth  and  Sixth  Grades. 

1:1:0.  First  semester. 
A  study  of  methods  and  materials  used  in  teaching  band  and  orches- 
tral instruments  to  children  in  these  grades,  with  emphasis  on  a  sound 
rhythmic  approach.  Both  individual  and  class  techniques  are  studied.  Musi- 
cal rudiments  as  applied  to  instrumental  teaching  are  reviewed. 

Music  Ed.  34A.  Methods  and  Materials,  Vocal:  Junior  and  Senior  High  School. 

2:2:0.  Second  semester. 
A  study  of  adolescent  tendencies  of  high  school  students.  Class  con- 
tent of  materials  is  studied  with  attention  to  the  organization  and  presenta- 
tion of  a  varied  program.  Recent  trends  in  teaching  are  studied. 

Music  Ed.  34B.  Methods  and  Materials,  Instrumental:  Junior  and  Senior  High  School. 

1:1:0.  Second  semester. 
A  study  of  intermediate  and  advanced  instrumental  teaching  tech- 
niques; methods  of  organizing  and  directing  school  orchestras  and  bands; 
fundamentals  of  musicianship. 

Music  Ed.  43.  Seminar  in  Advanced  Instrumental  Problems. 

2:2:0.  Second  semester. 
A  study  of  the  general  and  specific  problems  which  confront  the 
director  of  school  orchestras,  bands,  and  instrumental  classes.  Problems  of 
general  interest  include:  organization  and  management,  stimulating  and 
maintaining  interest;  selecting  beginners;  scheduling  rehearsals  and 
class  lessons;  financing  and  purchasing  instruments,  uniforms,  and  other 
equipment;  marching  band  formations  and  drills;  evaluating  music  mate- 
rials; organizing  festivals,  contests,  and  public  performances. 

Music  Ed.  44.  Methods  in  Piano  Pedagogy. 

2:2:0.  First  or  second  semester. 
A  study  of  methods  of  teaching  piano  to  children  and  adults.  The 
course  includes  the  song  approach  method,  presentation  of  the  funda- 
mental principles  of  rhythm,  sight  reading,  tone  quality,  form,  technique, 
pedaling,  transposition  and  the  harmonization  of  simple  melodies.  Mate- 
rials are  examined  and  discussed. 

III.  Student  Teaching 
Music  Ed.  40a— 40b.  Student  Teaching. 

4  hours  credit  per  semester. 
Student  teaching  in  Music  Education,  done  in  the  Annville-Cleona 
Joint  Schools,  the  Derry  Township  Consolidated  Schools,  and  the  Milton 
Hershey  School,  includes  vocal  and  instrumental  work  from  elementary 
to  senior  high  school. 

146 


MUSIC 

IV.  Instrumental  Courses 
Class  Instruction  in  Band  and  Orchestral  Instruments. 

Practical  courses  in  which  students,  in  addition  to  being  taught  the 
fundamental  principles  underlying  the  playing  of  all  band  and  orches- 
tral instruments,  learn  to  play  on  instruments  of  each  group,  viz.,  string, 
woodwind,  brass,  and  percussion.  Problems  of  class  procedure  in  public 
schools  are  discussed;  transposition  of  all  instruments  is  taught.  Ensemble 
playing  is  an  integral  part  of  these  courses. 

Brass  Instruments  (Cornet,  Trumpet,  French  Horn,  Trombone,  Baritone,  Tuba) 
Music  16.  Brass  I. 

1:2:0.  First  semester. 
A  study  of  any  two  of  the  above  instruments. 

Music  17.  Brass  II. 

1:2:0.  Second  semester. 
A  study  of  the  remainder  of  the  above  instruments. 

Percussion  Instruments  (Snare  Drum,  Tympany,  Bass  Drum,  etc.) 
Music  18.  Percussion  I. 

V2 :1 :0.  First  semester. 
A  study  of  snare  drum  only. 

Music  48.  Percussion  II. 

V2 :1 :0.  Second  semester. 
A  study  of  the  remainder  of  the  above  listed  instruments. 

Woodwind  Instruments  (Clarinet,  Flute,  Piccolo,  Oboe,  Saxophone,  Bassoon) 
Music  25.  Woodwind  I. 

1:2:0.  First  semester. 
The  study  of  the  clarinet. 

Music  26.  Woodwind  II. 

1:2:0.  Second  semester. 
A  study  of  the  remainder  of  the  above  listed  instruments. 

String  Instruments  (Violin,  Viola,  'Cello,  String  Bass) 
Music  37.  String  I. 

1:2:0.  First  semester. 
A  study  of  all  of  the  above  listed  instruments. 

Music  38.  String  II. 

1:2:0.  Second  semester. 
A  continuation  of  the  study  of  all  of  the  above  listed  instruments. 

147 


MUSIC 

Instrumental  Seminar. 

V2:l:0  or  1:2:0.  First  or  second  semester. 
Application  of  specific  techniques  to  problems  of  class  instruction. 
Music  41.1-41.2  Brass  Prerequisite:  Music  17. 

Music  41.3-41.4  Percussion  Prerequisite:  Music  48. 

Music  41.5-41.6  String  Prerequisite:  Music  38. 

Music  41.7-41.8  Woodwind  Prerequisite:  Music  26. 

V.  Music  Organizations 

Opportunities  for  individual  performance  in  a  group  experience  are 
provided  by  music  organizations.  Membership  in  the  organizations  is  open 
on  an  audition  basis  to  all  students. 

Music  101a— 101b.  Symphonic  Band. 

0:2:0.  First  semester.  0:3:0.  Second  semester. 
Lebanon  Valley  College  maintains  a  uniformed  band  which  contrib- 
utes to  college  life  by  playing  at  football  games,  presenting  concerts  dur- 
ing the  year,  and  providing  the  musical  accompaniment  for  the  annual 
May  Day  pageant.  Off  campus  activities  include  appearances  in  neighbor- 
ing communities.  Membership  in  the  band  is  determined  by  an  applicant's 
ability  and  by  the  needs  of  the  band  with  respect  to  maintaining  a  well- 
balanced  instrumentation. 

Music  102a — 102b.  All-Girl  Band. 

0:1:0.  per  semester. 
Membership  in  this  band  is  determined  by  the  applicant's  ability,  and 
by  the  needs  of  the  band  with  respect  to  maintaining  a  well-balanced  in- 
strumentation. The  group  presents  a  spring  concert. 

Music  103a— 103b.  Symphony  Orchestra. 

0:3:0.  First  semester.  0:2:0.  Second  semester. 
The  Symphony  Orchestra  is  an  organization  of  symphonic  proportions 
maintaining  a  high  standard  of  performance.  A  professional  interpretation 
of  a  wide  range  of  standard  orchestral  literature  is  insisted  upon. 

Music  104a— 104b.  Concert  Choir. 

0:2:0  per  semester. 
The  Concert  Choir  is  composed  of  approximately  forty  voices,  se- 
lected by  audition.  All  phases  of  choral  literature  are  studied  intensively. 
In  addition  to  on-campus  programs  and  appearances  in  neighboring  com- 
munities, the  Concert  Choir  makes  an  annual  tour. 

148 


MUSIC 

Music  105a— 105b.  College  Chorus. 

0:1 :0.  per  semester. 
The  Chorus  provides  an  opportunity  to  study  and  participate  in  the 
presentation  of  choral  literature  of  the  masters.  It  is  open  to  all  students 
who  are  interested  in  this  type  of  musical  performance  and  who  have  had 
some  experience  in  singing. 

Music  106a— 106b.  Beginning  Ensemble. 

0:1:0.  per  semester. 

A  training  band  and  orchestra  in  which  students  play  secondary  in- 
struments and  become  acquainted  with  elementary  band  and  orchestral 
literature.  Opportunity  is  given  for  advanced  conducting  students  to  gain 
experience  in  conducting. 

Instrumental  Small  Ensembles. 

0:1 :0.  per  semester. 
Open  to  the  advanced  player  on  an  audition  basis. 
Music  107a- 107b     String  Quartet. 
Music  108a- 108b     String  Trio. 
Music  109a-109b     Clarinet  Choir. 
Music  110a- 11  Ob     Woodwind  Quintet. 
Music  11  la— 1  lib     Brass  Ensemble. 
Music  112a-112b     Percussion  Ensemble. 

VI.  The  History  and  Appreciation  of  Music 

Music  19.  History  and  Appreciation  of  Music. 

3:3:0.  Either  semester. 
A  course  for  the  non-music  major  designed  to  increase  the  individ- 
ual's musical  perceptiveness.  Through  selective,  intensive  listening,  the 
student  develops  concepts  of  musical  materials  and  techniques.  The  vocab- 
ulary thus  gained  is  utilized  in  a  survey  of  western  music  from  the  Middle 
Ages  to  the  present. 

Music  30a— 30b.  History  of  Music. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 
A  survey  course  of  the  entire  history  of  western  music.  Emphasis  is 
placed  on  the  various  stylistic  developments  which  have  occurred  from  one 
era  to  another,  on  the  composers  who  have  been  responsible  for  these 
developments,  and  the  music  written  during  these  various  eras  illustrating 
these  stylistic  trends.  For  this  purpose,  extensive  use  of  recordings  is  made 
a  part  of  the  course.  The  first  semester  includes  the  development  of  music 

149 


MUSIC 

up  to  the  Baroque  era,  the  second  semester  from  the  Baroque  to  the 
present. 

Music  32.  Music  Literature. 

2:2:0.  First  semester. 

A  study  of  music  literature  for  elementary,  secondary,  and  adult 
levels.  Interpretation  of,  response  to,  and  appreciation  of  music  with  atten- 
tion directed  to  musical  elements.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  instrumental 
literature. 

Music  41.  Music  Literature  Seminar  (on  special  announcement) 

3:3:0. 

A  study  of  music  literature  in  depth,  according  to  styles,  form  and 
techniques  of  the  various  musical  periods.  Designed  especially  for  the  B.A. 
candidate  in  Music  with  application  of  accumulated  knowledge  in  theory, 
music  history,  and  musical  form.  Emphasis  is  upon  orchestral  literature. 


VII.  Conducting 
Music  35.  Conducting  I. 

2:2:0.  Second  semester. 

Principles  of  conducting  and  a  study  of  the  technique  of  the  baton  are 
presented.  Each  student  conducts  vocal  and  instrumental  ensembles  made 
up  of  the  class  personnel. 

Music  45.  Conducting  II. 

2:2:0.  First  semester. 

A  detailed  and  comprehensive  study  of  the  factors  involved  in  the 
interpretation  of  choral  and  instrumental  music.  In  addition  to  conducting 
from  full  score,  each  student  conducts  in  rehearsal  the  various  concert 
organizations. 


VIII.  Individual  Instruction 
Music  131-132.  Voice,  Piano,  Organ,  Orchestral  and  Band  Instruments. 

1  :V2 :0  per  semester. 

The  work  in  the  foregoing  fields  is  organized  from  the  standpoint  of 
the  development  and  musicianship  in  the  individual  student.  The  work 
continues  through  eight  semesters  and  assures  a  well-rounded  and  many- 
sided  acquaintance  with  various  musical  techniques. 

150 


MUSIC 

Music  141-142.  Voice,  Piano,  Organ,  Orchestral  and  Band  Instruments. 

(Private  study  in  major  performance;  for  A.B.  Music  Majors  only) 

2:1:0  per  semester. 
A  charge  is  made  for  the  second  half-hour  of  instruction. 

IX.  Preparatory  Courses 

The  Department  of  Music  sponsors  preparatory  courses  adapted  to 
children  of  elementary  or  high  school  age.  Both  adults  and  children  are 
admitted  at  any  stage  of  advancement. 

Instruction,  either  private  or  in  class,  is  offered  in  piano,  voice,  and 
all  instruments  of  the  band  and  orchestra.  A  desirable  number  for  class 
instruction  is  from  four  to  six  students. 

The  Student  Recitals 

The  student  recitals  are  of  inestimable  value  to  all  students  in  ac- 
quainting them  with  a  wide  range  of  the  best  musical  literature,  in  develop- 
ing musical  taste  and  discrimination,  in  affording  experience  in  appearing 
before  an  audience,  and  in  gaining  self-reliance  as  well  as  nerve  control 
and  stage  demeanor. 

Students  at  all  levels  of  performance  appear  in  these  student  recitals. 

Pipe  Organs 

The  Department  of  Music  contains  four  Moller  organs  for  private  in- 
struction and  individual  practice:  one  4-manual,  one  3-manual,  and  two 
2-manual  instruments. 


Professor  Ehrhart;  Instructor  Thompson 

The  objective  of  the  Philosophy  Department  is  to  provide  stu- 
dents with  an  opportunity  to  study  the  philosophical  heritage  of  the 
Western  World  and  to  become  acquainted  with  the  major  problems 
which  leading  philosophers  have  raised  and  attempted  to  resolve. 

Major:  A  total  of  twenty-four  hours  is  required  of  the  philosophy 
major.  Besides  the  courses  listed  below,  Greek  31  (Readings  from 
Greek  Philosophers)  and  Political  Science  40  (Political  Theory)  may 
be  taken  to  satisfy  the  requirement. 

Independent  Study 

Students  wishing  to  participate  in  the  Independent  Study  program 
in  the  department  may  do  so  by  fulfilling  the  following  requirements : 
(1)  achieve  high  academic  standing  in  departmental  courses;  (2)  sub- 
mit a  paper  in  connection  with  a  course  beyond  the  first  year  courses; 
(3 )  apply  and  receive  approval  for  participation  in  Independent  Study 
from  the  departmental  chairman  and  the  Dean  of  the  College  by  the 
end  of  the  first  semester  of  the  junior  year;  (4)  prepare  an  essay  of 
10,000  words  or  more  under  the  direction  of  a  member  of  the  depart- 
ment to  be  submitted  by  April  1  of  the  senior  year;  (5)  defend  the 
essay  before  a  faculty  committee  selected  by  the  departmental  chair- 
man and  the  Dean  of  the  College. 

152 


PHILOSOPHY 

On  the  basis  of  his  performance  in  the  essay  and  oral  examina- 
tion, the  departmental  chairman  and  the  Dean  of  the  College  will 
determine  whether  or  not  the  candidate  is  to  receive  departmental 
honors. 

10.  Introduction  to  Philosophy. 

3:3:0.  First  semester. 
An  introduction  to  some  of  the  main  problems  of  philosophy  and  to 
the  ways  in  which  leading  philosophers  have  dealt  with  them. 

11.  Introduction  to  Logic. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 
An  introduction  to  the  rules  of  clear  and  effective  thinking.  Attention 
is  given  to  the  logic  of  meaning,  the  logic  of  valid  inference,  and  the  logic 
of  factual  inquiry.  Main  emphasis  is  laid  upon  deductive  logic,  and  stu- 
dents are  introduced  to  the  elements  of  symbolic  logic  as  well  as  to  tradi- 
tional modes  of  analysis. 

23.  Ancient  and  Medieval  Philosophy. 

3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1968-1969. 

This  course  traces  the  evolution  of  Western  philosophical  thought 
from  its  origins  in  the  speculations  of  the  Pre-Socratic  nature-philosophers 
to  the  systematic  elaborations  of  the  schoolmen  of  the  late  Middle  Ages. 

Prerequisite:  Philosophy  10. 

24.  Modern  Philosophy. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1968-1969. 

This  course  follows  the  development  of  philosophical  thought  in  the 
leading  thinkers  from  the  Renaissance  to  the  beginning  of  the  Nineteenth 
Century. 

Prerequisites:  Philosophy  10  and  23. 

30.  Ethics. 

3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1968-1969. 
An  inquiry  into  the  central  problems  of  ethics,  with  an  examination 
of  the  responses  of  major  ethical  theories  to  those  problems. 

31.  Philosophy  of  Religion. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

A  study  of  the  issues  raised  for  philosophy  by  contemporary  religious 
and  theological  thought.  A  critical  examination  of  such  problems  as  faith 
and  reason;  the  meaning  of  revelation,  symbolism,  and  language;  the  argu- 
ments for  the  existence  of  God;  faith  and  history;  religion  and  culture. 

Prerequisite:  Philosophy  10. 

153 


PHILOSOPHY 

35.  Recent  and  Contemporary  Philosophy. 

3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1967-1968. 
An  examination  of  the  philosophies  of  foremost  thinkers  from  the 
German  idealists  to  the  present  time. 

Prerequisites:  Philosophy  10,  11,  23,  24. 

41.  Aesthetics. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1967-1968. 
A  study  of  the  nature  and  basis  of  criticism  of  works  of  art. 
Prerequisites:  Philosophy  10,  Art  11  or  Music  19. 

42.  Seminar. 

2:2:0.  Second  semester. 
Discussion  of  selected  problems  of  philosophy. 
Open  only  to  upperclassmen  who  are  departmental  majors. 


154 


Physics 


Professor  Rhodes;  Professor  Grimm; 
Assistant  Professor  O'Donnell;  Instructor  McCrory 

The  Physics  Department  attempts  to  develop  in  the  student  an 
increased  understanding  of  the  basic  laws  of  nature  as  they  relate  to 
our  physical  environment,  and  to  indicate  the  possible  extent,  as  well 
as  the  limitations,  of  our  knowledge  of  the  physical  world. 

The  introductory  course,  Physics  10,  is  intended  for  students  who 
wish  to  take  only  one  course  in  Physics.  The  sequence  of  courses  be- 
ginning with  Physics  17  provides  suitable  training  for  students  who 
anticipate  additional  work  in  the  physical  sciences  and  who  are  pre- 
paring for  graduate  school,  for  secondary  school  teaching,  and  for  re- 
search and  development  work  in  governmental  and  industrial  labora- 
tories. Laboratory  work  is  designed  to  acquaint  the  student  with  the 
experimental  techniques  and  the  measuring  instruments  appropriate 
to  the  various  areas  of  investigation,  and  to  give  experience  in  the 
interpretation  and  communication  of  the  experimental  results. 

Mathematics  is  an  essential  tool  in  the  study  of  Physics.  The 
introductory  course,  Physics  10,  requires  a  knowledge  of  high  school 
algebra  and  trigonometry,  but  students  who  plan  to  take  other  courses 
in  Physics  should  take  the  appropriate  prerequisite  mathematics 
courses  as  soon  as  possible. 


Major:  Physics  17,  27,  32,  37  or  38,  and  40. 


155 


PHYSICS 

Independent  Study 

Juniors  and  seniors  who  have  demonstrated  high  academic  abil- 
ity may,  with  the  permission  of  the  departmental  chairman  and  the 
Dean  of  the  College,  participate  in  the  Independent  Study  program  in 
Physics.  Application  for  admission  to  the  program  should  be  made 
before  the  end  of  the  junior  year.  Upon  the  satisfactory  completion  of 
an  approved  experimental  or  theoretical  research  project  and  the 
formal  presentation  of  a  research  paper  before  an  examining  com- 
mittee, the  student  will  be  recommended  to  the  Dean  of  the  College 
for  graduation  with  departmental  honors. 

10.  General  College  Physics. 

4:3:3  per  semester. 
An  introduction  to  the  fundamental  concepts  and  laws  of  the  various 
branches  of  physics,  including  mechanics,  heat,  sound,  electricity,  mag- 
netism, optics,  and  atomic  and  nuclear  structure. 

17.  Principles  of  Physics  I. 

4:3:3  per  semester. 

A  comprehensive  introductory  course  designed  for  students  who 
desire  a  more  rigorous  mathematical  approach  to  college  physics  than  is 
given  in  Physics  10.  Calculus  is  used  throughout.  The  first  semester  is 
devoted  to  mechanics,  and  the  second  semester  to  heat,  wave  motion,  and 
optics.  This  course  should  be  followed  by  Physics  27. 

Prerequisite  or  corequisite:  Mathematics  11. 

27.  Principles  of  Physics  II. 

4:3:3  per  semester. 

A  continuation  of  Physics  17,  devoted  in  the  first  semester  to  the 
study  of  electricity  and  magnetism  and  in  the  second  semester  to  the  study 
of  modern  physics,  including  the  foundation  of  atomic  physics,  the  quan- 
tum theory  of  radiation,  the  atomic  nucleus,  radioactivity,  and  nuclear 
reactions. 

Prerequisite:  Physics  17. 

32.  Electricity  and  Magnetism. 

3:3:0    per  semester. 

The  basic  definition  of  electric  and  magnetic  quantities,  a  study  of 
the  electric  and  magnetic  properties  of  matter,  the  laws  of  electric  and 
magnetic  fields,  the  development  of  Maxwell's  equations,  and  electromag- 
netic waves. 

Prerequisites:  Physics  27  and  Mathematics  21. 

156 


PHYSICS 

37.  Experimental  Physics  I. 

1 .0:3  per  semester. 

Experimental  work  in  the  areas  of  mechanics,  electricity,  and  optics, 
with  emphasis  on  experimental  design,  measuring  techniques,  and  analysis 
of  data 

Prerequisite:  Physics  27. 

38.  Experimental  Physics  II. 

1:0:3  per  semester. 

Experimental  work  in  the  areas  of  high  vacuum,  electronics,  atomic 
physics,  and  nuclear  physics,  with  emphasis  on  experimental  design, 
measuring  techniques,  and  analysis  of  data. 

Prerequisite:  Physics  27. 

40.  Analytical  Mechanics. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 

A  rigorous  study  of  the  principles  of  mechanics  as  applied  to  the 
motion  of  particles,  systems  of  particles,  and  rigid  bodies,  under  the  action 
of  conservative  and  dissipative  forces,  using  the  methods  of  Newton, 
Lagrange,  and  Hamilton. 

Prerequisites:   Physics  27  and  Mathematics  21. 

41.  Modern  Physics. 

3:3:0  per  semester. 

A  rigorous  study  of  modern  physics,  beginning  with  the  development 
of  quantum  mechanics  via  the  Schroedinger  equation,  including  perturba- 
tion and  collision  theory.  The  latter  portion  of  the  course  is  directed 
toward  the  application  of  quantum  mechanics  to  fundamental  processes 
in  atomic  and  nuclear  physics. 

Prerequisites:  Physics  32  and  40. 

48.  Physics  Seminar. 

2:2:0  per  semester. 
A  study  at  the  senior  level  of  special  topics  in  physics,  to  be  selected 
each  year  from  the  following:  thermodynamics,  statistical  mechanics, 
physical  optics,  electronics,  nuclear  physics,  and  solid  state  physics.  The 
seminar  is  open  to  students  from  any  department  with  approval  of  the 
departmental  chairman. 


157 


Professor  Love; 

Associate  Professor  Magee; 

Instructors  Knarr  and  Showers 

In  keeping  with  the  objectives  of  the  liberal  arts,  church-related 
college,  the  courses  offered  in  the  Department  of  Psychology  are  de- 
signed: (1)  to  develop  in  the  student  an  understanding  and  apprecia- 
tion of  the  biological  and  environmental  bases  of  human  behavior  and 
of  the  role  of  that  behavior  in  adjustment;  (2)  to  foster  healthy  adjust- 
ment through  the  objective  application  of  psychological  principles  to 
problems  related  to  personal,  vocational,  and  moral  growth;  and  (3) 
to  furnish  a  theoretical,  scientific,  and  practical  acquaintance  with 
principles,  methods,  and  techniques  basic  to  graduate  study  and  em- 
ployment in  psychology  and  beneficial  in  the  many  occupations  in 
which  psychology  is  applied. 

Major:  Completion  of  either  of  the  following  programs  will  con- 
stitue  a  major  in  Psychology. 

(A)  Psychology  20  (A  or  B),  25,  45a,  45b,  and  twenty-one 
hours  of  electives  in  Psychology.  With  approval,  a  maximum  of  six 
hours  of  electives  in  Psychology  may  be  credited  from  the  following: 
Biology  22,  32;  Education  30,  41,  42;  Philosophy  11;  Sociology  21, 
30,  31,  33;  Mathematics  12. 

(B)  Psychology  20  (A  or  B),  25,  35a,  35b,  37,  43,  45a,  45b, 
and  nine  hours  of  electives  in  Psychology;  completion  of  independent 

158 


PSYCHOLOGY 

research.  With  approval,  six  hours  of  electives  may  be  credited  from 
the  following:  Biology  22,  32;  Mathematics  12;  other  graduate  school 
recommendations. 

Independent  Study 

Independent  Study  in  psychology  is  planned  to  permit  the  capable 
student  to  increase  the  depth  of  his  understanding  in  areas  of  special 
interest  and  the  general  scope  of  his  knowledge  of  psychology. 

In  order  to  participate  in  Independent  Study  a  psychology  major 
is  required  to:  (1)  maintain  an  over-all  grade-point  average  of  2.5, 
(2)  maintain  a  grade-point  average  of  3.0  in  psychology  courses,  (3) 
show  consistently  high  intellectual  interest  and  initiative,  (4)  receive 
the  approval  of  the  departmental  staff  and  the  Dean  of  the  College. 

The  Student  admitted  to  Independent  Study  will  participate  in 
Psychology  45 — Seminar  for  a  maximum  of  9  hours.  The  hours  will 
be  distributed  over  the  junior  and  senior  years  with  a  minimum  of  one 
and  a  maximum  of  three  hours  to  be  taken  in  one  semester. 

The  core  of  the  program  will  consist  in  the  investigation  of  a  prin- 
cipal problem  over  the  two  years  period,  beginning  with  the  study  of 
the  literature  and  culminating  in  the  design  and  execution  of  a  direct 
study  project.  Results  of  this  project  will  be  reported  and  defended 
during  the  second  semester  of  the  senior  year.  The  student  may  elect, 
for  additional  credit  in  Psychology  45,  to  study  problems  or  to  carry 
out  projects  and  experiments  relating  to  courses  in  which  he  is  regu- 
larly enrolled. 

Graduation  with  Honors  in  Psychology  will  depend  on  the  quality 
of  performance  in  the  specified  activities,  on  the  maintenance  of  the 
grade-point  averages  specified  for  admission  to  the  program,  on  the 
results  of  the  departmental  comprehensive  and  the  Graduate  Record 
Examination,  and  on  the  final  approval  of  the  departmental  staff  and 
the  Dean  of  the  College. 

20.  General  Psychology. 

A.  (Lecture).  3:3:0.  Either  semester. 

B.  (Laboratory).  3  hours  credit.  First  semester. 

A  study  of  principles  of  psychology  and  of  psychological  method. 
Prerequisite  B:  Permission  of  staff. 

21.  Psychology  of  Childhood. 

3:3:0.  First  semester. 
A  study  of  the  psychological  development  of  the  child  from  the  be- 
ginning of  life  to  adolescence. 

Prerequisite:  Psychology  20. 

159 


PSYCHOLOGY 

23.  Educational  Psychology. 

3:3:0.  Either  semester. 
A  study  of  the  learner  and  of  the  learning  process. 
Required  for  elementary  and  secondary  certification. 
Prerequisite:  Psychology  20. 

25.  General  Experimental  Psychology. 

3  hours  credit.  Second  semester. 

An  introduction  to  experimentation  and  related  methodology. 

Prerequisite:  Psychology  20;  permission  of  staff  for  non  majors. 

31.  Psychology  of  Adolescence. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 
A  study  of  the  psychological  development  in  the  adolescent  period. 
Prerequisite:  Psychology  20. 

32.  Psychology  of  Abnormal  Behavior. 

3  hours  credit.  First  semester. 
An  introduction  to  the  behavior  disorders. 
Prerequisite:  Psychology  20. 

33.  Social  Psychology. 

3  hours  credit.  Second  semester. 
A  study  of  the  social  and  cultural  determinants  of  behavior. 
Prerequisite:  Psychology  20;  senior  standing  or  permission  of  staff. 

35a— 35b.  Research  Design  and  Statistical  Analysis. 

2  hours  credit  per  semester. 

A  study  of  principles  of  research  design  and  statistical  analysis;  plan- 
ning and  execution  of  direct  studies. 
Prerequisites:  Psychology  20,  25. 

37.  Learning  and  Motivation. 

3  hours  credit.  First  semester. 

A  study  of  the  acquisition  and  of  the  psychological  determinants  of 
behavior. 

Prerequisite:  Psychology  20. 

41.  Introduction  to  Clinical  Psychology. 

3  hours  credit.  Second  semester. 

An  introduction  to  current  methods  of  diagnosis  and  psychotherapy 
of  behavior  problems,  and  to  the  applications  of  psychology  in  clinical 
situations. 

Prerequisites:  Psychology  20  and  32  or  permission  of  the  staff. 

160 


PSYCHOLOGY 

43.  Personality. 

3:3:0.  First  semester. 
A  study  of  the  major  contemporary  theories  of  personality. 
Prerequisite:  Psychology  20. 

44.  Physiological  Psychology. 

3  hours  credit. 
A  study  of  the  physiological  determinants  of  behavior. 
Prerequisite:  Psychology  20. 

45a— 45b.  Seminar. 

2  hours  credit  per  semester. 

A  study  of  schools  and  systems  in  psychology;  independent  study  and 
research. 

Prerequisites:  Psychology  20;  a  major  in  psychology;  or  permission 
of  the  staff. 

Russian 

See  Foreign  Languages,  page  124. 


'% 


161 


Professor  Wethington;  Assistant  Professors  Bemesderfer 
and  Troutman;  Instructor  Bucher 

The  aim  of  this  department  is  to  provide  opportunity  for  the 
study  of  our  religious  heritage. 

The  department  seeks  to  orient  the  student  to  a  Christian  world 
view,  providing  an  understanding  of  the  Scriptures  and  the  heritage  of 
the  Christian  church  as  a  means  to  this  end,  as  well  as  the  enhancing 
of  Christian  living  as  a  dynamic  experience. 

Professionally,  basic  courses  are  offered  to  students  preparing 
for  the  Christian  ministry,  the  world  mission  field,  the  teaching  of  reli- 
gion, and  other  church  vocations. 

Major:  A  total  of  twenty-four  semester  hours  is  required,  includ- 
ing Religion  44  and  45.  A  total  of  six  hours  of  New  Testament  or  Hel- 
lenistic Greek  (Greek  21)  as  well  as  Philosophy  of  Religion  (Phi- 
losophy 31)  may  be  counted  toward  a  Religion  major. 

Independent  Study 

Students  wishing  to  participate  in  the  Independent  Study  program 
in  the  department  may  do  so  by  fulfilling  the  following  requirements: 
(1)  achieve  high  academic  standing  in  departmental  courses;  (2)  sub- 
mit a  paper  in  connection  with  a  course  beyond  the  first  year  courses; 
(3 )  apply  and  receive  approval  for  participation  in  Independent  Study 
from  the  departmental  chairman  and  the  Dean  of  the. College  by  the 

162 


RELIGION 

end  of  the  first  semester  of  the  junior  year;  (4)  prepare  an  essay  of 
10,000  words  or  more  under  the  direction  of  a  member  of  the  depart- 
ment to  be  submitted  by  April  1  of  the  senior  year;  (5)  defend  the 
essay  before  a  faculty  committee  selected  by  the  departmental  chair- 
man and  the  Dean  of  the  College. 

On  the  basis  of  his  performance  in  the  essay,  and  oral  examina- 
tion, the  departmental  chairman  and  the  Dean  of  the  College  will 
determine  whether  or  not  the  candidate  is  to  receive  departmental 
honors. 

12.  Introduction  to  Biblical  Thought/ 

3:3:0.  First  semester. 
An  examination  of  some  of  the  basic  themes  of  Biblical  religion  in 
relation  to  their  historical  context  and  their  contemporary  implications. 

13.  Introduction  to  the  Christian  Faith.* 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 
A  systematic  inquiry  into  the  areas  of  religious  language,  religious 
knowledge,  and  the  doctrines  of  God,  man,  Christ,  and  the  Church. 

20.  The  Prophets. 

3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1969-1970. 
A  study  of  the  lives  and  writings  of  the  Old  Testament  prophets,  and 
an  analysis  of  their  contributions  to  Hebrew-Christian  religious  thought. 

22.  Religion  in  America. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

A  study  of  contemporary  Judaism,  Roman  Catholicism,  and  Protes- 
tantism in  the  United  States,  including  a  brief  historical  background  of 
each.  Some  attention  is  given  to  the  various  religious  sects  and  cults. 

No  prerequisites. 

30.  Life  and  Epistles  of  Paul. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1969-1970. 
A  study  of  the  life,  writings,  and  theological  thought  of  Paul  and 
their  relationship   to  the   practices,   problems,   and   beliefs   of  the   early 
church. 

32.  Life  and  Teachings  of  Jesus. 

3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1968-1969. 
An  intensive  study  of  the  life  and  message  of  Jesus  as  set  forth  in  the 
Gospels. 


*  Religion   12  and   13  are  prerequisites  or  corequisites  for  all  courses  in  Religion,  except 
Religion  22  and  Religion  42. 

163 


RELIGION 

33.  Christian  Ethics. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 
A  systematic  analysis  of  the  implications  of  the  Christian  faith  both 
for  personal  moral  decision,  and  for  social  policy  in  such  areas  as  govern- 
ment and  political  life,  work  and  the  economic  order. 

40.  Introduction  to  Christian  Nurture. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1969-1970. 
An  investigation  of  some  of  the  principles  and  problems  of  religious 
education  as  they  are  related  to  higher  education,  the  public  school,  the 
church  school,  and  the  home. 

42.  World  Religions. 

3:3:0.  First  semester. 

An  examination  of  the  rise  and  development  of  religion  along  with 
a  study  of  the  ideas,  and  cultic  and  ethical  practices  of  the  great  world 
faiths. 

No  prerequisites. 

44.  Seminar  in  Classical  Religious  Thinkers. 

3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1968-1969. 
An  intensive  study  of  the  thought  of  such  classical  religious  thinkers 
as   Augustine,   Aquinas,   Luther,    and   others.    Required   of   majors   and 
strongly  recommended  for  all  pre-theological  students;  others  by  permis- 
sion of  the  chairman  of  the  department. 

45.  Seminar  in  Contemporary  Religious  Problems. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1968-1969. 

A  study  of  selected  problems  arising  from  the  theological  efforts  of 
men  like  Barth,  Tillich,  and  Niebuhr,  and  within  contemporary  religious 
movements  like  neo-orthodoxy,  existentialism  and  humanism.  Research 
methodology  is  stressed. 

Required  of  majors  and  strongly  recommended  for  all  pre-theological 
students;  others  by  permission  of  the  chairman  of  the  department. 


164 


Instructors  Kaebnick  and  Strickler 

The  courses  in  the  Department  of  Sociology  have  been  designed: 
(1)  to  develop  the  student's  understanding  of  the  social  structure  and 
the  social  relationships  in  and  through  which  man  functions;  (2)  to 
provide  preliminary  training  for  those  who  are  planning  to  enter  the 
field  of  social,  religious,  and  community  work;  and  (3)  to  furnish  basic 
background  knowledge  for  the  pursuance  of  graduate  work  in  Soci- 
ology. 

Major:  Sociology  20,  21,  30,  31,  33,  40,  43,  and  45. 

Independent  Study 

The  departmental  Independent  Study  program  is  design  to  pro- 
vide stimulation  for  capable  students  to  undertake  and  carry  through 
academic  work  of  high  quality.  Independent  Study  is  planned  as  an 
integral  part  of  the  student's  major  program  rather  than  viewed  as 
work  superimposed  upon  it,  and  is  set  in  the  framework  of  a  major 
area  of  concentration. 

( 1 )  The  student  should  apply  for  admission  to  the  Independent 
Study  program  at  the  beginning  of  the  second  semester  of  the  sopho- 
more year.  This  would  enable  him  to  undertake  preliminary  work  for 
one  year  before  being  admitted  to  full  status  in  the  program  at  the 
beginning  of  the  second  semester  of  the  junior  year. 

(2)  To  enter  the  Independent  Study  program  a  student  must 
have  a  high  general  standing  in  the  College  and  the  approval  of  the 
departmental  chairman  and  the  Dean  of  the  College  no  later  than  the 
end  of  the  first  semester  of  the  junior  year.  An  average  grade  of  3.0  in 

165 


SOCIOLOGY 

all  courses  in  the  student's  major  area  of  concentration  is  required  as 
is  an  average  of  3.0  while  he  is  pursuing  his  work  as  a  candidate  for 
departmental  honors.  The  student  must,  in  addition,  fulfill  any  other 
specific  requirements  of  the  department. 

(3)  The  student  in  Independent  Study  will  prepare  an  essay  of 
ten  thousand  words  or  more  under  the  direction  of  the  departmental 
chairman  to  be  submitted  by  the  end  of  the  first  semester  of  his  senior 
year.  It  shall  be  defended  in  a  manner  approved  by  the  departmental 
chairman  and  the  Dean  of  the  College. 

(4)  The  Independent  Study  of  each  student  shall  be  tested  by  a 
special  oral  examination.  On  the  basis  of  his  performance  in  the  essay, 
Graduate  Record  Examination,  and  oral  examination,  the  depart- 
mental chairman  and  the  Dean  of  the  College  will  determine  whether 
or  not  the  candidate  is  to  receive  departmental  honors. 

20.  Introductory  Sociology. 

3:3:0.  First  semester. 
The  study  of  social  life  and  human  values  expressed  in  group  activi- 
ties and  their  interrelationships.  This  course  acquaints  the  student  with 
primary  concepts  in  the  field  of  Sociology.  Particular  attention  is  given 
to:  contributions  from  cultural  anthropology  and  social  psychology;  social 
stratification;  racial  and  ethnic  groups,  the  modern  community;  basic 
human  institutions;  major  social  forces. 

21.  Modern  Social  Problems. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 
An  application  of  sociological  principles  to  problems  such  as:  pov- 
erty, delinquency,  crime;  family  discord;  industrial,  race,  and  nationality 
conflicts;  mental  disorders. 

22.  Marriage  and  the  Family. 

2:2:0.  Second  semester. 
The  American  family  studied  in  cross-cultural  perspective.  Special 
emphasis  is  placed  upon  functions  of  the  family  as  institution  and  matrix 
of  personality.  The  influence  of  the  American  value  system  is  examined. 

30.  Criminology. 

3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1968-1969. 
An  analysis  of  the  interplay  of  forces  which  result  in  criminal  be- 
havior. Case  histories  are  used  to  illustrate  the  individual  and  social  forces 
in  criminal  careers.  Emphasis  is  given  to  organized  crime  as  a  social  phe- 
nomenon in  American  life,  the  administration  of  American  criminal  jus- 
tice, developments  in  penology  and  treatment  of  offenders,  and  programs 
of  crime  prevention.  Changing  aspects  of  juvenile  delinquency  are  ex- 
plored. 

166 


SOCIOLOGY 

31.  Introduction  to  Social  Work. 

3:3:0  per  semester.  Offered  1968-1969. 

A  pre-professional  course  dealing  with  the  nature  and  requirements 
of  the  fields  of  social  work.  Observation  of  the  work  of  private  and  public 
agencies  in  this  field  is  required. 

Prerequisites:  Sociology  20  and  21. 

33.  Social  Institutions. 

3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1969-1970. 
Analysis  of  the  structure  and  function  of  major  social  institution, 
such  as  religion,  education,  mass  culture  and  mass  media.  Attention  is 
directed  to  the  impact  of  institutional  expectations  upon  the  individual. 

40.  Population. 

2:2:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1969-1970. 

A  study  of  the  size,  growth,  composition,  and  distribution  of  the 
peoples  of  the  earth.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  problems  occasioned  by  urban 
development. 

Prerequisite:  Sociology  20. 

43.  Development  of  Sociological  Theory. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1969-1970. 

A  critical  appraisal  of  the  works  of  some  American  and  European 
sociologists.  Particular  emphasis  is  given  to  the  similarities  and  differences 
in  basic  assumptions  and  conclusions  of  leading  writers  since  1900. 

Prerequisites:  Sociology  20  and  21. 

45.  Senior  Seminar. 

2:2:0  per  semester. 

Emphasis  upon  coordination  of  previous  course  work  and  under- 
standing of  the  basic  contributions  of  Sociology  in  relation  to  other  be- 
havioral sciences.  Significant  reading,  critical  discussion,  and  written 
analysis,  with  these  aims  in  view.  Adapted  to  the  individual  needs  of 
students. 

To  supplement  course  work,  direct  experience  in  a  social  work  prac- 
ticum  for  students  who  have  an  expressed  interest  in  the  social  work  field. 
Cooperating  social  agencies  include:  the  Lebanon  County  Board  of  Assis- 
tance; Family  and  Children's  Service,  Lebanon;  and  the  Veterans  Admin- 
istration, R.D.  1,  Lebanon.  Participation  by  permission  of  the  appropriate 
departmental  chairman. 

Senior  Sociology  majors  or  with  permission  of  the  departmental 
chairman. 

Spanish 

See  Foreign  Languages,  page  120. 

167 


Directories 


(C  The  Board  of  Trustees  1967-68  170 

J>  Administrative  Staff  and  Faculty 

^           1967-1968      176 

^  Degrees  Conferred     195 

<E  Student  Awards,  1967 200 

a  Correspondence  Directory 206 


The  Board  of  Trustees  1967-1968 

Officers: 

Honorary  President E.  N.  Funkhouser 

President Allan  W.  Mund 

First  Vice  President Richard  P.  Zimmerman 

Second  Vice  President   Lawton  W.  Shroyer 

Secretary E.  D.  Williams,  Jr. 

Treasurer    Samuel  K.   Wengert 

Members:* 

From  the  Eastern  Conference 
THOMAS  W.  GUINIVAN,  A.B.,  B.D.,  D.D.  (1970) 

Pastor — First   Evangelical   United  Brethren   Church,   Hershey, 
Pennsylvania 

G.  EDGAR  HERTZLER,  A.B.,  B.D.,  S.T.M.,  D.D.  (1970) 

Pastor — Otterbein  Evangelical  United  Brethren  Church,  Har- 
risburg,  Pennsylvania 

MARK  J.  HOSTETTER,  A.B.,  B.D.,  S.T.M.   (1970) 

Pastor — St.  Paul's  Evangelical  United  Brethren  Church,  Eliza- 
bethtown,  Pennsylvania 

WARREN  F.  MENTZER,  A.B.,  B.D.,  D.D.  (1970) 

Superintendent — West  District,  Eastern  Conference,  Evangelical 
United  Brethren  Church 

JEFFERSON  C.  BARNHART,  A.B.,  LL.B.  (1969) 

Partner — McNees,  Wallace,  and  Nurick,  Harrisburg 

PAUL  C.  EHRHART,  A.B.,  M.A.  (1969) 

Guidance  Director — Penn  Manor  High  School 

WALTER  C.  ESHENAUR  (1969) 

President — Eshenaur's,  Incorporated 

THOMAS  S.  MAY,  B.S.,  B.D.,  D.D.   (1969) 

Pastor — State  Street  Evangelical  United  Brethren  Church,  Har- 
risburg, Pennsylvania 

*  Date  in  parenthesis  indicates  year  in  which  term  expires. 

170 


TRUSTEES 

LAWTON  W.  SHROYER  (1969) 

President — Shamokin  Dress  Company  and  Shroyers,  Incorpo- 
rated 

D.  DWIGHT  GROVE,  B.S.,  M.D.   (1968) 

Associate    Professor    of    Anesthesiology,    Hahnemann   Medical 
College  and  Hospital 

HAROLD  H.  QUICKEL,  A.B.  (1968) 

Purchasing  Agent — Hamilton  Watch  Company 

EZRA  H.  RANCK,  A.B.,  B.D.,  D.D.  (1968) 

Director  of  Christian  Education — Eastern  Conference 

DANIEL  L.  SHEARER,  A.B.,  B.D.,  S.T.M.,  D.D.  (1968) 

Pastor — First  Evangelical  United  Brethren  Church,  Hummels- 
town,  Pennsylvania 

From  the  Susquehanna  Conference 
PAUL  E.  HORN,  A.B.,  B.D.,  D.D.  (1970) 

Superintendent — Susquehanna  Conference,   Evangelical  United 
Brethren  Church 

GERALD  D.  KAUFFMAN,  A.B.,  B.D.,  D.D.  (1970) 

Pastor — Grace  Evangelical  United  Brethren  Church,   Carlisle, 
Pennsylvania 

ROBERT  W.  LUTZ,  A.B.  (1970) 

Assistant  Treasurer — Blumenthal-Kohn  Electric  Company,  Inc. 

RALPH  M.  RITTER  (1970) 
Treasurer — Ritter  Bros.,  Inc. 

WOODROW  S.  DELLINGER,  B.S.,  M.D.   (1969) 
General  Practitioner 

LESTER  M.  KAUFFMAN,  A.B.,  B.D.,  S.T.M.,  D.D.  (1969) 

Pastor — St.  Paul's  Evangelical  United  Brethren  Church,  Hagers- 
town,  Maryland 

CLAIR  C.  KREIDLER,  A.B.,  D.D.   (1969) 

Superintendent — Central     District,     Susquehanna     Conference, 
Evangelical  United  Brethren  Church 

GORDON  S.  KUNKEL  (1969) 

Office  Manager — John  E.  Baker  Company 

171 


TRUSTEES 

ARTHUR  W.  STAMBACH,  B.A.,  B.D.,  D.D.  (1969) 

Secretary  of  Evangelism  and  Director  of  Adult  Work — Susque- 
hanna Conference,  Evangelical  United  Brethren  Church 

JOHN  E.  GEESEY,  B.S.  (1968) 

President — York  County  Gas  Company 

CALVIN  B.  HAVERSTOCK,  JR.,  A.B.,  B.D.  (1968) 

Pastor — First  Evangelical  United  Brethren  Church,  York,  Penn- 
sylvania 

FREDERICK  W.  MUND,  A.B.,  B.D.,  D.D.   (1968) 

Pastor — Dorguth  Memorial  Evangelical  United  Brethren  Church, 
Baltimore,  Maryland 

MELVIN  S.  RIFE  (1968) 

Treasurer — Schmidt   and   Ault   Paper  Company,    Division,    St. 
Regis  Paper  Company 

From  the  Virginia  Conference 
DONALD  N.  FRIDINGER,  A.B.,  B.D.  (1970) 

Pastor — Evangelical  United  Brethren  Church,  Elkton,  Virginia 

CHARLES  B.  WEBER,  A.B.,  B.D.  (1970) 

Pastor — First   Evangelical   United   Brethren   Church,    Martins- 
burg,  West  Virginia 

J.  PAUL  GRUVER,  A.B.,  B.D.,  D.D.  (1969) 

Pastor — Evangelical  United  Brethren  Church,  Dayton,  Virginia 

PAUL  J.  SLONAKER,  B.S.,  B.D.  (1969) 

Pastor — First  Evangelical  United  Brethren  Church,  Winchester, 
Virginia 

CARL  W.  HISER,  A.B.,  B.D.,  D.D.  (1968) 

Retired  Pastor — Evangelical  United  Brethren  Church 

JOHN  E.  OLIVER,  A.B.,  B.D.   (1968) 

Retired  Pastor — Evangelical  United  Brethren  Church 

Alumni  Trustees 
MRS.  GLADYS  B.  HOLMAN,  B.A.    (1970) 
Housewife 

DeWITT  M.  ESSICK,  A.B.,  M.S.  (1969) 

Manager,  Management  Development  and  Personnel  Services — 
Armstrong  Cork  Company,  General  Offices 

172 


TRUSTEES 

JAMES  H.  LEATHEM,  B.S.,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Sc.D.  (1968) 

Professor  of  Zoology  and  Director  of  the  Bureau  of  Biological 
Research,  Rutgers,  The  State  University 

Trustees-at-Large 

MALCOLM  MEYER,  B.S.  (1970) 

President — Certain-Teed  Products  Corporation 

WILLIAM  D.  BRYSON  (1969) 

Retired  Executive — Walter  W.  Moyer  Company 

HERMANN   W.   KAEBNICK,   A.B.,   B.D.,   S.T.M.,   D.D.,   L.H.D. 

(1969) 
Bishop — Eastern  Area,  Evangelical  United  Brethren  Church 

JOHN  F.  MATSKO  (1969) 

President — Blough    Wagner    Manufacturing    Company,    Incor- 
porated 

ALLAN  W.  MUND,  LL.D.  (1969) 

Retired  Chairman,  Board  of  Directors — Ellicott  Machine  Cor- 
poration 

ROBERT  H.  REESE  (1969) 

Retired  President — H.  B.  Reese  Candy  Company,  Inc. 
Retired  Director — Hershey  Chocolate  Corporation 

WOODROW  W.  WALTEMYER  (1969) 

SAMUEL  K.  WENGERT,  B.S.   (1969) 
President — Wengert"s  Dairy 

E.  D.  WILLIAMS,  JR.  (1969) 

Superintendent — H.  E.  Millard  Lime  and  Stone  Company 

JOHN  L.  WORRILOW,  B.A.  (1969) 
Secretary — Lebanon  Steel  Foundry 

RICHARD  P.  ZIMMERMAN  (1969) 

Chairman  of  the  Board — National  Valley  Bank  of  Chambersburg 

Members  of  the  faculty  who  are  heads  of  departments  are  ex  of- 
ficio members  of  the  Board  of  Trustees. 

Honorary  Trustees 

WILLIAM  J.  FISHER,  LL.D. 

Retired  President — A.  B.  Farquhar  Company 
Retired  Vice  President — The  Oliver  Corporation 

173 


TRUSTEE  COMMITTEES 

E.  N.  FUNKHOUSER,  A.B.,  LL.D. 

Retired  President — Funkhouser  Corporation 
Member,  Board  of  Directors — Ruberoid  Corporation 

ALBERT  WATSON,  LL.D. 

Retired  President — Bowman  and  Company 

E.  D.  WILLIAMS,  SR.,  A.B.,  LL.D. 

Retired  Executive 

STANDING  COMMITTEES 

Executive  Committee: 

Allan  W.  Mund,  Chairman;  Paul  E.  Horn,  Vice  Chairman;  Mark  J. 
Hostetter,  Secretary;  Paul  C.  Ehrhart;  DeWitt  M.  Essick;  Calvin  B. 
Haverstock,  Jr.;  G.  Edgar  Hertzler;  Lester  M.  Kauffman;  Robert  W. 
Lutz;  Warren  F.  Metnzer;  Lawton  W.  Shroyer;  Samuel  K.  Wengert. 

Finance  Committee: 

Richard  P.  Zimmerman  (1968),  Chairman;  Allan  W.  Mund,  Vice 
Chairman;  E.  D.  Williams,  Jr.  (1968),  Secretary;  Samuel  K.  Wengert 
(1969),  Treasurer;  William  D.  Bryson  (1970);  John  F.  Matsko 
(1969);  Malcolm  Meyer  (1970);  Robert  H.  Reese  (1969);  Melvin  S. 
Rife  (1970);  Ralph  M.  Ritter  (1970);  Lawton  W.  Shroyer  (1969); 
Woodrow  W.  Waltemyer  (1969). 

Faculty  Administrative  Committee: 

Jefferson  C.  Barnhart,  Chairman;  Ezra  H.  Ranck,  Secretary;  DeWitt 
M.  Essick;  Paul  E.  Horn;  James  H.  Leathern;  John  F.  Matsko; 
Warren  F.  Mentzer;  Allan  W.  Mund;  Melvin  S.  Rife. 

Auditing  Committee: 

William  D.  Bryson,  Chairman;  Woodrow  S.  Dellinger;  Walter  C. 
Eshenaur. 

Building  &  Grounds  Committee: 

Melvin  S.  Rife,  Chairman;  Walter  C.  Eshenaur;  Gordon  S.  Kunkel; 
Allan  W.  Mund:  Frederick  W.  Mund;  Samuel  K.  Wengert,  E.  D. 
Williams,  Jr. 

Public  Relations  Committee: 

Gerald  D.  Kauffman,  Chairman;  Calvin  B.  Haverstock,  Jr.;  Gladys 
B.  Holman;  Clair  C.  Kreidler;  Thomas  S.  May;  Harold  H.  Quickel; 
Ezra  H.  Ranck. 

Nominating  Committee: 

Allan  W.  Mund,  Chairman;  J.  Paul  Gruver;  Lester  M.  Kauffman; 
Melvin  S.  Rife;  Daniel  L.  Shearer;  John  L.  Worrilow. 

174 


TRUSTEE  COMMITTEES 

SPECIAL  COMMITTEES  OF  THE  BOARD  OF  TRUSTEES,  1967-1968 
Committee  on  Church  Support: 

William  J.  Fisher,  Chairman;  Walter  C.  Eshenaur;  Thomas  W. 
Guinivan;  Calvin  B.  Haverstock,  Jr.;  G.  Edgar  Hertzler;  Paul  E. 
Horn;  Gerald  D.  Kauffman;  Warren  F.  Mentzer;  Melvin  S.  Rife; 
Lawton  W.  Shroyer;  Arthur  W.  Stambach;  Samuel  K.  Wengert. 

Board  Appointees  to  Development  Council: 

William  D.  Bryson;  Woodrow  S.  Dellinger;  William  J.  Fisher; 
E.  N.  Funkhouser;  John  E.  Geesey;  Mrs.  Gladys  B.  Holman;  Paul 
E.  Horn;  Hermann  W.  Kaebnick;  Thomas  S.  May;  Warren  F. 
Mentzer;  Melvin  S.  Rife;  Lawton  W.  Shroyer;  Samuel  K.  Wengert; 
E.  D.  Williams,  Sr.;  E.  D.  Williams,  Jr.;  John  L.  Worrilow;  Richard 
P.  Zimmerman. 
Ex  Officio — Allan  W.  Mund. 

Building  Committee: 

Melvin  S.  Rife,  Chairman;  DeWitt  M.  Essick,  Co-Chairman;  Barnard 
H.  Bissinger;  William  D.  Bryson;  Martha  C.  Faust;  James  H. 
Leathern;  Jean  O.  Love;  George  R.  Marquette;  Earl  R.  Mezoff; 
Howard  A.  Neidig;  Jacob  L.  Rhodes;  Robert  C.  Riley;  Lawton  W. 
Shroyer;  Robert  W.  Smith;  Samuel  K.  Wengert;  E.  D.  Williams,  Jr.; 
Francis  H.  Wilson;  Glenn  H.  Woods. 

Committee  for  Self  Evaluation: 

Richard  P.  Zimmerman,  Chairman;  Jefferson  C.  Barnhart;  Carl  Y. 
Ehrhart;  G.  Edgar  Hertzler;  James  H.  Leathern;  Earl  R.  Mezoff; 
Melvin  S.  Rife;  Robert  C.  Riley. 

Committee  for  Chapel  Policy  and  Program: 

Gerald  D.  Kauffman,  Chairman;  Pierce  A.  Getz;  Thomas  W.  Guini- 
van; Calvin  B.  Haverstock,  Jr.;  George  R.  Marquette;  L.  Elbert 
Wethington. 


Adminstrative  Staff  and  Faculty  1967-1968 

Offices  of  Administration 
OFFICE  OF  THE  PRESIDENT: 

ALLAN  W.  MUND,   1967-;  Acting  President. 
LL.D.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1966. 

MRS.  ELSIE  M.  MOYER,  Secretary 

Office  of  the  Assistant  to  the  President: 

EARL  R.  MEZOFF,  1963-;  Assistant  to  the  President,  1963-;  Vice 
President,  19  67-. 

A.B.   Thiel   College,    1947;   M.A.,   Michigan   State   University, 
1948;  D.Ed.,  Pennsylvania  State  University,  1965. 

MRS.  MARIANNA  W.  MILLER,  Secretary. 

ACADEMIC: 

Office  of  the  Dean  of  the  College 

CARL  Y.  EHRHART,  1947-;  Dean  of  the  College,  I960-;  Vice 
President,  1967-. 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1940;  B.D.,  United  Theological 
Seminary,  1943;  Ph.D.,  Yale  University,  1954. 

RALPH  S.  SHAY,  1948-51;  Feb.  1953-;  Assistant  Dean;  Director 
of  Auxiliary  Schools,   1967. 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1942;  A.M.,  University  of  Penn- 
sylvania, 1947;  Ph.D.,  1962. 

MISS  GLADYS  M.  FENCIL,  192 1-;  Staff  Assistant,  1965-. 
A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,   1921. 

MISS  JEANETTE  E.  BENDER,  Secretary. 

Admissions  Office 

D.  CLARK  CARMEAN,  1933-;  Director  of  Admissions,  1949-. 
A.B.,  Ohio  Wesleyan  University,  1926;  M.A.,  Columbia  Uni- 
versity, 1932. 

GREGORY  G.  STANSON,  Counselor  in  Admissions,  1966-. 

A.B.,    Lebanon   Valley   College,    1963;   M.Ed.,    University    of 
Toledo,  1966. 

176 


ADMINISTRATIVE  STAFF 
MRS.  S.  ESTHER  LINGLE,  Secretary. 
MRS.  MARY  J.  THOMPSON,  Secretary. 

Registrar's  Office 

RALPHS.  SHAY,  1948-1951;  Feb.  1953-;  Acting  Registrar,  1967-. 
A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1942;  A.M.,  University  of  Penn- 
sylvania, 1947;  Ph.D.,  1962. 

MRS.  RHETA  M.  KREIDER,  Secretary. 

MRS.  MARION  G.  LOY,  Secretary. 

MRS.  MARTA  M.  MILLER,  Secretary. 

Faculty 
GEORGE  G.  STRUBLE,  193 1-;  Secretary  of  the  Faculty,  1933-. 
B.S.  in  Ed.,  University  of  Kansas,    1922;  M.S.  in  Ed.,   1925; 
Ph.D.,  University  of  Wisconsin,  1931. 

Library 
DONALD  E.  FIELDS,  1947- ;  Librarian,  195 6-. 

A.B.  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1924;  M.A.,  Princeton  University, 
1928;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Chicago,  1935;  A.B.  in  Library 
Science,  University  of  Michigan,  1947. 

MRS.  FRANCES  T.  FIELDS,  1947-;  Cataloging  Librarian. 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1929;  A.B.  in  Library  Science, 
University  of  Michigan,  1947;  M.A.,  Universidad  de  San  Carlos 
de  Guatemala,  1960. 

MRS.  ALICE  S.  DIEHL,  1966-;  Assistant  in  Cataloging  and  Refer- 
ence. 

A.B.,  Smith  College,  1956;  B.S.,  Carnegie  Institute  of  Technol- 
ogy, 1957;  M.L.S.,  University  of  Pittsburgh,  1966. 

MRS.  ELOISE  P.  BROWN,  1961-;  Cataloging  Assistant. 
B.S.  in  Library  Science,  Simmons  College,  1946. 

MISS  DORIS  J.  ELLIOTT,  Secretary. 

MRS.  MAGDALENE  J.  TROXEL,  Secretary. 

Chapel 
MRS.  HELEN  C.  GINGRICH,  Secretary. 

Engle  Hall 
MRS.  MONICA  A.  KLICK,  Secretary. 

177 


ADMINISTRATIVE  STAFF 

Lynch  Memorial  Building 
MRS.  ELIZABETH  SHAAK,  Secretary. 

Science  Hall 
MRS.  BERNICE  K.  LILES,  Secretary.  (Grants) 

MRS.  KAREN  L.  MILLER,  Secretary. 

South  Hall 
MRS.  MARY  A.  CALDWELL,  Secretary. 

112  College  Avenue 
MRS.  ELIZABETH  C.  MICHIELSEN,  Secretary. 

STUDENT  AFFAIRS: 

Student  Personnel  Office 

GEORGE  R.  MARQUETTE,  1952-;  Dean  of  Men,  1956-. 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1948;  M.A.,  Columbia  Univer- 
sity, 1951;  Ed.D.  Temple  University,  1967. 

MRS.  ESTHER  A.  KLINE,  Secretary,  Dean  of  Men. 

MISS  MARTHA  C.  FAUST,   1957-;  Dean  of  Women. 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1937;  M.A.,  Syracuse  University, 
1950. 

MRS.  DORIS  L.  FAKE,  Secretary,  Dean  of  Women. 

MRS.  ANNAMARIE  PARKER,  Head  Resident,  Mary  Capp  Green 
Hall. 

MRS.  ETHEL  HANIGAN,  Head  Resident,  Vickroy  Hall. 

MRS.  MARY  E.  RHINE,  Hostess,  Carnegie  Hall. 

Health  Service 
P.  LAURENCE  KREIDER,  College  Physician,  1966-. 

A.B.,  Dartmouth  College,  1953;  M.D.,  Temple  University  School 
of  Medicine,  1957. 

MRS.  MARGIE  M.  YEISER,  R.N.,  College  Nurse,  1967-. 
Harrisburg  Polyclinic  Hospital  School  of  Nursing. 

MISS  MARGARET  L.  HAMILTON,  R.N.,  Student  Nurse. 

MISS  JONALYN  KNAUER,  R.N.,  Student  Nurse. 

178 


ADMINISTRATIVE  STAFF 

Office  of  the  Chaplain 
JAMES  O.  BEMESDERFER,  1959-;  College  Chaplain. 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1936;  B.D.,  United  Theological 
Seminary,  1939;  S.T.M.,  Lutheran  Theological  Seminary,  Phila., 
1945;  S.T.D.,  Temple  University,  1951. 

MRS.  HELEN  C.  GINGRICH,  Secretary. 

Office  of  Athletics 
WILLIAM  D.  McHENRY,  1961-;  Director  of  Athletics. 

B.S.,  Washington  and  Lee  University,  1954;  M.Ed.,  University 
of  Pennsylvania,  1960. 

MRS.  ELIZABETH  SHAAK,  Secretary. 

Coaching  Staff 
GEORGE  DARLINGTON.  1964-;  Assistant  Football  Coach;  Assis- 
tant Track  Coach;  Director  of  Intramurals. 

MRS.    E.    ELIZABETH   GARMAN,    1964-;    Women's   Basketball 
Coach. 

GEORGE  P.  MAYHOFFER,  1955-;  J.V.  Basketball  Coach;  Track 
Coach. 

B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1950;  Pennsylvania  State  Uni- 
versity, 1955. 

J.  ROBERT  McHENRY,  1964-;  Basketball  Coach;  Cross  Country 
Coach;  Lacrosse  Co-Coach. 

WILLIAM  D.  McHENRY,   1961-;  Football  Coach,  Lacrosse  Co- 
Coach. 

GERALD  PETROFES,   1963-;  Athletic  Trainer;  Wrestling  Coach; 
Golf  Coach. 

KENNETH  L.  SNYDER,   1966-;  Assistant  Football  Coach. 
B.S.,  Gettysburg  College,  1965. 

MRS.  JACQUELINE  WALTERS,  19 65-;  Women's  Hockey  Coach. 

COLLEGE  RELATIONS  AREA: 

Development  Offices 

ROBERT  M.  WONDERLING,  1967-;  Director  of  Development. 
B.S.,  Clarion  State  College,   1953;  M.Ed.,  University  of  Pitts- 
burgh, 1958. 

179 


ADMINISTRATIVE  STAFF 

WALTER  L.  SMITH,   1961-;  Assistant  Director  of  Development; 
Coordinator  of  Conferences. 
B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1961. 

MRS.  DORIS  V.  ACHENBACH,  Secretary. 

MISS  COLLEEN  M.  SNELL,  Secretary. 

Public  Relations  Office 

RICHARD  V.  SHOWERS,  1965-;  Director  of  Public  Relations. 
A.B.,  Franklin  and  Marshall  College,  1942. 

MRS.  ANN  K.  MONTEITH,  Director  of  Publications. 
A.B.,  Bucknell  University,   1965. 

MRS.  EDNA  J.  CARMEAN,  196 1-;  Staff  Assistant. 
A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,   1959. 

MISS  BARBARA  C.  RHINE,  Secretary. 

MRS.  CHRISTINE  F.  BROUGH,  Secretary. 

Alumni  Office 

DAVID  M.  LONG,  1966-;  Director  of  Alumni  Relations  and  Indus- 
trial Placement. 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,   1959;  M.Ed.,  Temple  Univer- 
sity, 1961. 

MRS.  P.  RODNEY  KREIDER,  1951;  Assistant  Director  of  Alumni 
Relations. 
A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1922. 

MRS.  HELEN  L.  MILLER,  Secretary. 

BUSINESS  MANAGEMENT: 

Office  of  the  Controller 

ROBERT  C.   RILEY,    195 1-;  Controller,    1962-;   Vice  President, 
1967-. 

B.S.  in  Ed.,  State  College,  Shippensburg,  1941;  M.S.,  Columbia 
University,  1947;  Ph.D.,  New  York  University,  1962. 

IRWIN  R.  SCHAAK,  1957-;  Assistant  Controller,   1964-;  Student 
Financial  Aid  Officer,  1967-. 

LARRY  H.  MILLER,  1964-;  Accountant. 
B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1964. 

180 


FACULTY 

MRS.  CLARA  P.  MILLER,  Staff  Assistant. 

MRS.  PATRICIA  M.  GILLO,  Secretary. 

MRS.  LUCILLE  E.  HANNIGAN,  Switchboard  Operator. 

MISS  BARBARA  A.  WAMPLER,  Secretary. 

RONALD  E.  BLACKMAN,  Director  of  Administrative  Services 

MRS.  DONNA  D.  YOUNG,  Secretary. 

MRS.  DORIS  L.  HOWER,  Secretary. 

MRS.  DOROTHY  E.  LAFFERTY,  Secretary. 

MISS  SUSAN  J.  STEINER,  Secretary. 

MRS.  JANET  M.  BURKHOLDER,  Secretary. 

ROBERT  E.  HARNISH,  Manager  of  the  Book  Store  and  Snack  Bar. 
B.A.,  Randolph  Macon  College,  1966. 

Buildings  and  Grounds 
RALPH  B.  SHANAMAN,  1955-;  Superintendent  of  Buildings  and 
Grounds. 

AUSTIN  FLOOD,  1963-;  Housekeeping  Supervisor. 

Food  Service 
MRS.  MARGARET  MILLARD,  195 1-;  Dietitian. 
ROBERT  E.  HARNISH,  Manager  of  the  Snack  Bar. 


Faculty  1967-1968 

ALLAN  W.  MUND,  1967-;  Acting  President. 
LL.D.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1966. 

CARL  Y.  EHRHART,   1947-;  Dean  of  the  College,   I960-;  Vice 
President,  1967. 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1940;  B.D.,  United  Theological 
Seminary,  1943;  Ph.D.,  Yale  University,  1954. 

EMERITI: 

FREDERIC  K.  MILLER,  1939-1967;  President  Emeritus. 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1929;  M.A.,  University  of  Pennsyl- 
vania, 1931;  Ph.D.,  1948;  Litt.D.,  Muhlenberg  College,  1954; 
D.H.L.,  Dickinson  College,  1967. 

181 


FACULTY 

EMERITI: 

V.  EARL  LIGHT,  1929-1962;  Professor  Emeritus  of  Biology. 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1916;  M.S.,  1926;  Ph.D.,  Johns 

Hopkins  University,  1929. 

HELEN  ETHEL  MYERS,  1921-1956;  Librarian  Emeritus. 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,   1907;  Library  Science,  Drexel 
Institute  of  Technology.       ' 

ALVIN  H.  M.  STONECIPHER,  1932-1958;  Professor  Emeritus  of 
Latin  Language  and  Literature;  Dean  Emeritus. 
A.B.,  Vanderbilt  University,   1913;  A.M.,   1914;  Ph.D.,   1917; 
Litt.D.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1962. 

PROFESSORS: 

MRS.  RUTH  ENGLE  BENDER,  1918-1922;  1924-;  Adjunct  Pro- 
fessor of  Music  Education. 

A.B.,   Lebanon   Valley   College,    1915;   Oberlin   Conservatory; 
graduate  New  England  Conservatory. 

BARNARD  H.  BISSINGER,  195 3-;  John  Evans  Lehman  Professor 
of  Mathematics;  Chairman  of  the  Department  of  Mathematics. 
A.B.,  Franklin  &  Marshall  College,  1938;  M.A.,  Syracuse  Uni- 
versity, 1940;  Ph.D.,  Cornell  University,  1943. 

D.   CLARK  CARMEAN,    1933- ;   Professor  of  Music   Education; 
Director  of  Admissions,  1949-. 

A.B.,  Ohio  Wesleyan  University,  1926;  M.A.,  Columbia  Univer- 
sity, 1932. 

CLOYD  H.  EBERSOLE,  195 3-;  Professor  of  Elementary  Education, 
Chairman,  Department  of  Education. 

A.B.,  Juniata  College,  1933;  M.Ed.,  Pennsylvania  State  Univer- 
sity, 1941;  D.Ed.,  Pennsylvania  State  University,  1954. 

CARL  Y.  EHRHART,  1947-;  Professor  of  Philosophy;  Dean  of  the 
College,  Vice  President 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1940;  B.D.,  United  Theological 
Seminary,  1943;  Ph.D.,  Yale  University,  1954. 

DONALD  E.  FIELDS,  1947-;  Librarian;  Josephine  Bittinger  Eberly 
Professor  of  Latin  Language  and  Literature. 
A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1924;  M.A.,  Princeton  Univer- 
sity, 1928;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Chicago,  1935;  A.B.  in  Lib.  Sci., 
University  of  Michigan,  1947. 

1X2 


FACULTY 

SAMUEL  O.  GRIMM,  19 12-;  Professor  of  Physics. 

B.Pd.,  State  Normal  School,  Millersville,  1910;  A.B.,  Lebanon 
Valley  College,  1912;  A.M.,  1918;  Sc.D.,  1942. 

JEAN  O.  LOVE,  1954-;  Professor  of  Psychology;  Chairman  of  the 
Department  of  Psychology. 

A.B.,  Erskine  College,   1941;  M.A.,  Winthrop  College,   1942; 
Ph.D.,  University  of  North  Carolina,    1953. 

HOWARD  A.  NEIDIG,  1948-;  Professor  of  Chemistry,  Chairman 
of  the  Department  of  Chemistry. 

B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1943;  M.S.,  University  of  Dela- 
ware, 1946;  Ph.D.,  1948. 

SARA  ELIZABETH  PIEL,  Jan.,   I960-;  Professor  of  Languages; 
Chairman  of  the  Department  of  Foreign  Languages. 
A.B.,  Chatham  College,  1928;  M.A.,  University  of  Pittsburgh, 
1929;  Ph.D.,  1938. 

JACOB  L.  RHODES,  1957-;  Professor  of  Physics;  Chairman  of  the 
Department  of  Physics. 

B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1943;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Penn- 
sylvania, 1958. 

ROBERT  C.  RILEY,  195 1-;  Professor  of  Economics  and  Business 
Administration;  Controller;  Vice  President. 
B.S.,  in  Ed.,  State  College,  Shippensburg,  1941;  M.S.,  Columbia 
University,  1947;  Ph.D.,  New  York  University,  1962. 

RALPH  S.  SHAY,  1948-1951;  Feb.,  1953-;  Professor  of  History; 
Chairman  of  the  Department  of  History  and  Political  Science; 
Assistant  Dean;  Director  of  Auxiliary  Schools;  Acting  Registrar. 
A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1942;  A.M.,  University  of  Penn- 
sylvania, 1947;  Ph.D.,  1962. 

GEORGE  G.  STRUBLE,  193 1-;  Professor  of  English;  Chairman  of 
the  Department  of  English;  Secretary  of  the  Faculty. 
B.S.  in  Ed.,  University  of  Kansas,   1922;  M.S.  in  Ed.,   1925; 
Ph.D.,  University  of  Wisconsin,  1931. 

C.  F.  JOSEPH  TOM,  1954-;  Professor  of  Economics  and  Business 
Administration;  Chairman  of  the  Department  of  Economics  and 
Business  Administration. 

B.A.,   Hastings  College,    1944;  M.A.,   University  of  Chicago, 
1947;  Ph.D.,  1963. 

183 


FACULTY 

L.  ELBERT  WETHINGTON,  1963-;  Professor  of  Religion;  Chair- 
man of  the  Department  of  Religion. 

B.A.  Wake  Forest  College,  1944;  B.D.,  Divinity  School  of  Duke 
University,  1947;  Ph.D.,  Duke  University,  1949. 

FRANCIS  H.  WILSON,  1953-;  Professor  of  Biology;  Chairman  of 
the  Department  of  Biology. 
B.S.,  Cornell  University,  1923;  M.S.,  1925;  Ph.D.,  1931. 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS: 

HILDA  M.  DAMUS,  1963-;  Associate  Professor  of  German. 

M.A.,  University  of  Berlin  and  Jena,  1932;  Ph.D.,  University  of 
Berlin,  1945. 

MRS.  ANNA  DUNKLE  FABER,  1954-;  Associate  Professor  of 
English. 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1948;  M.A.,  University  of  Wis- 
consin, 1950;  Ph.D.,  1954. 

WILLIAM  H.  FAIRLAMB,    1947-;  Associate  Professor  of  Piano 
and  Music  History. 
Mus.B.,  cum  laude,  Philadelphia  Conservatory,  1949. 

^ELIZABETH  M.  GEFFEN,  195 8-;  Associate  Professor  of  History. 
B.S.  in  Ed.,  University  of  Pennsylvania,  1934;  M.A.,  1936; 
Ph.D.,    1958. 

ROBERT  E.  GRISWOLD,  I960-;  Associate  Professor  of  Chemistry. 
B.S.,  New  Bedford  Institute  of  Technology,  1954;  M.S.  in 
Chemistry,  Northeastern  University,  1956;  Ph.D.,  Massachu- 
setts Institute  of  Technology,  1960. 

THOMAS  A.  LANESE,  1954-;  Associate  Professor  of  Strings,  Con- 
ducting, Theory.  . 

B.Mus.,   Baldwin-Wallace  College,    1938;  M.Mus.,   Manhattan 
School  of  Music,  1952. 

KARL  LEE  LOCKWOOD,  1959-;  Associate  Professor  of  Chemistry. 
B.S.,  Muhlenberg  College,  1951;  Ph.D.,  Cornell  University, 
1955. 


*  Sabbatical  leave,  first  semester,  1967-68. 
184 


FACULTY 

RICHARD  D.  MAGEE,  1961-;  Associate  Professor  of  Psychology; 
Acting  Chairman  of  the  Department  of  Psychology,  1966-1967. 
B.A.,  Temple  University,  1955;  M.A.,  1957;  Ph.D.,  1964. 

ROBERT  W.  SMITH,  195 1-;  Associate  Professor  of  Music  Educa- 
tion, Chairman  of  the  Department  of  Music. 
B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1939;  M.A.,  Columbia  University, 
1950. 

FRANK  E.  STACHOW,  1946-;  Associate  Professor  of  Theory  and 
Woodwinds. 

Diploma,  clarinet,  Juilliard  School  of  Music;  B.S.,  Columbia 
University,    1943;  M.A.,    1946. 

JAMES  M.  THURMOND,  1954-;  Associate  Professor  of  Music 
Education  and  Brass  Instruments. 

Diploma,  Curtis  Institute  of  Music,  1931;  A.B.,  American  Uni- 
versity, 1951;  M.A.,  Catholic  University,  1952;  Mus.D.,  Wash- 
ington College  of  Music,  1944. 

ELEANOR  TITCOMB,  1964-;  Associate  Professor  of  French. 

A.B.,  Mount  Holyoke  College,  1938;  M.A.  Middlebury  College; 
Ph.D.,  Radcliffe  College,  1959. 

HARRY  P.  WE  AST,  1967;  Associate  Professor  of  Education. 

B.S.,  University  of  Pittsburgh,  1937;  M.Ed.,  1944;  D.Ed.,  1953. 


ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS: 

JAMES  O.  BEMESDERFER,  1959-;  Assistant  Professor  of  Religion; 
College  Chaplain. 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1936;  B.D.,  United  Theological 
Seminary,  1939;  S.T.M.,  Lutheran  Theological  Seminary,  Phila., 
1945;  S.T.D.,  Temple  University,  1951. 

O.  PASS  BOLLINGER,  1950-;  Assistant  Professor  of  Biology. 
B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1928;  M.S.,  Pennsylvania  State 
University,   1937. 

FAY  B.  BURRAS,  19 64-;  Assistant  Professor  of  Mathematics. 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1960;  M.A.,  Smith  College,  1961. 

185 


FACULTY 

CHARLES  T.  COOPER,  1965-;  Assistant  Professor  of  Spanish. 
B.S.,  U.S.  Naval  Academy,  1942;  M.A.,  Middlebury  College, 
1965. 

*GEORGE  D.  CURFMAN,  1961—;  Assistant  Professor  of  Music 
Education. 

B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1953;  M.M.,  University  of  Michi- 
gan, 1957. 

MARTHA  C.  FAUST,  1957-;  Assistant  Professor  of  Education; 
Dean  of  Women. 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1937;  M.A.,  Syracuse  Univer- 
sity, 1950. 

ALEX  J.  FEHR,  1951-;  Assistant  Professor  of  Political  Science. 
A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1950;  M.A.,  Columbia  Univer- 
sity,  1957. 

FRANCES  T.  FIELDS,  1947-;  Assistant  Professor  of  Spanish;  Cata- 
loging Librarian. 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1929;  A.B.  in  Library  Science, 
University  of  Michigan,  1947;  M.A.,  Universidad  de  San  Carlos 
de  Guatemala,  1960. 

ARTHUR  L.  FORD,  1965-;  Assistant  Professor  of  English. 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1959;  M.A.,  Bowling  Green 
State  University,   1960;  Ph.D.,   1964. 

MRS.  ELIZABETH  V.  GARTHLY,  1966-;  Assistant  Professor  of 
Art. 

B.F.A.,  University  of  Pennsylvania,  1936;  M.S.,  Temple  Uni- 
versity, 1957. 

PIERCE  A.  GETZ,  1959-;  Assistant  Professor  of  Organ. 

B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1951;  M.S.M.,  Union  Theological 
Seminary  School  of  Sacred  Music,  1953;  A.M.D.,  Eastman 
School  of  Music,  1967. 

PAUL  FRANCIS  HENNING,  JR.,  1959-;  Assistant  Professor  of 
Mathematics. 

A.B.,  Gettysburg  College,  1954;  M.A.,  Pennsylvania  State  Uni- 
versity,  1957. 

*  Sabbatical  leave,  1967-68. 

186 


FACULTY 

MRS.  JUNE  EBY  HERR,  1959-;  Assistant  Professor  of  Elementary 
Education 

B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1943;  M.Ed.,  Pennsylvania  State 
University,    1954. 

PAUL  W.  HESS,  1962-;  Assistant  Professor  of  Biology. 

B.S.,  U.  S.  Merchant  Marine  Academy,  1944;  M.S.,  University 
of  Delaware,   1959;  Ph.D.,   1963. 

GEORGE  R.  MARQUETTE,  1952-;  Assistant  Professor  of  Physical 
Education,  Dean  of  Men,  1956—. 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1948;  M.A.,  Columbia  Univer- 
sity, 1951;  D.Ed.,  Temple  University,  1967. 

J.   ROBERT  McHENRY,    1964-;  Assistant  Professor  of  Physical 
Education. 
A.B.,  Washington  and  Lee  University,  1956. 

WILLIAM  D.  McHENRY,  1961-;  Assistant  Professor  of  Educa- 
tion, Director  of  Athletics;  Chairman  of  the  Department  of 
Physical  Education. 

B.S.,  Washington  and  Lee  University,  1954;  M.Ed.,  University 
of  Pennsylvania,    1960. 

J.  ROBERT  ODONNELL,  1959-;  Assistant  Professor  of  Physics. 
B.S.,  Pennsylvania  State  University,   1950;  M.S.,  University  of 
Delaware,    1953. 

WERNER  H.  PETERKE,  1967-;  Assistant  Professor  of  Economics. 
B.S.,  Cornell  University.  1959;  M. A.,  Kent  State  University,  1962. 

GERALD  J.   PETROFES,    1963-;  Assistant  Professor  of  Physical 
Education. 
B.S.,  Kent  State  University,  1958;  M.Ed..  1962. 

E.  JOAN  REEVE,  1957-;  Assistant  Professor  of  Piano. 

B.Mus.,  Beaver  College,    1956;  M.A.,   University  of  Pennsyl- 
vania, 1964. 

REYNALDO  ROVERS,  1945-;  Assistant  Professor  of  Voice. 
Graduate  Juilliard  School  of  Music. 

JAMES  N.  SPENCER,  1967-;  Assistant  Professor  of  Chemistry. 
B.S.,  Marshall  University,  1963;  Ph.D.,  Iowa  State  University, 
1967. 

187 


FACULTY 

PERRY  J.  TROUTMAN,    I960-;  Assistant  Professor  of  Religion 
and  Greek. 

B.A.,  Houghton  College,  1949;  B.D.,  United  Theological  Semi- 
nary, 1952;  Ph.D.,  Boston  University,  1964. 

HOMER  WEIDMAN  WIEDER,  1964-;  Assistant  Professor  of  Edu- 
cation; Director  of  Teacher  Placement. 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,    1926;  M.A.,  New  York  Uni- 
versity, 1936. 

PAUL  L.  WOLF,  1966-;  Assistant  Professor  of  Biology. 

B.S.,  Elizabethtown  College,    1960;  M.S.,  University  of  Dela- 
ware, 1963. 

INSTRUCTORS: 

ALLEN  D.  ARNOLD,  1967-;  Instructor  in  English. 

A.B.,  University  of  Scranton,  1965;  M.A.,  University  of  North 
Carolina,  1967. 

RICHARD  C.  BELL,   1966-;  Instructor  in  Chemistry. 

B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1941;  M.Ed.,  Temple  University, 
1955. 

NORMAN  B.  BUCHER,  JR.,  1966-;  Instructor  in  Religion. 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1950;  B.D.,  Lancaster  Theologi- 
cal Seminary,   1953;  S.T.M.,  Temple  University,   1958. 

GEORGE  L.  DARLINGTON,  1964-;  Instructor  in  Physical  Educa- 
tion. 
B.S.,  Rutgers  University,  1961;  M.A.,  Stanford  University,  1962. 

MRS.  E.  ELIZABETH  GARMAN,    1964-;  Instructor  in  Physical 
Education;  Director  of  Athletics  for  Women. 
B.S.,  Beaver  College,  1942. 

G.  THOMAS  GATES,  1963-;  Instructor  in  Business  Law. 

A.B.,  Brown  University,  1945;  LL.B.,  Boston  University,  1949. 

D.  JOHN  GRACE,   1958-59;   1961-;  Instructor  in  Accounting. 
B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,   1955;  C.P.C.U.,   1955;  C.P.A., 
1957. 

MRS.  GEILAN  HANSEN,  1963-;  Instructor  in  Russian. 

MICHAEL  G.  JAMANIS,  1966-;  Instructor  in  Piano. 
B.S.,  Juilliard  School  of  Music,   1962;  M.S.,-  1964. 

188 


FACULTY 

MRS.  FRANCES  VERI  JAMANIS,  1967-;  Instructor  in  Piano. 
B.S.,  Juilliard  School  of  Music,    1964;  M.S.,   1965. 

RICHARD  A.  JOYCE,  1966-;  Instructor  in  History. 

A.B.,  Yale  University,  1952;  M.A.,  San  Francisco  State  College, 
1963. 

WINIFRED  L.  KAEBNICK,  1966-;  Instructor  in  Sociology;  Acting 
Chairman,  Department  of  Sociology. 

B.A.,  Western  Reserve  University,    1952;  M.N.,    1955;  M.A., 
University  of  Pennsylvania,   1964. 

MRS.  BONNIE  F.  KELLER,  1966-;  Instructor  in  Piano. 

B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,   1962;  M.M.,  Peabody  Institute 
of   Baltimore,    1966. 

CHARLOTTE  F.  KNARR,   1966-;  Instructor  in  Psychology. 

B.A.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,    1964;  M.A.,  Kent  State  Uni- 
versity, 1966. 

MRS.  MARY  B.  LEWIN,   1963-;  Instructor  in  Mathematics. 

B.S.   in   Ed.,    Millersville   State   College,    1938;   M.S.    in   Ed., 
Temple  University,  1958. 

C.  LINDLEY  LIGHT,  1963-;  Instructor  in  Mathematics. 
B.S.,  Millersville  State  College,  1962. 

MRS.  SYLVIA  R.  MALM,  1962-;  Instructor  in  Biology. 

A.B.,  Mount  Holyoke,    1931;  M.A.,  Brown  University,   1934; 
Ph.D.,  Bryn  Mawr  College,  1937. 

HUNTER  C.  MARCH,  1967-;  Instructor  in  Music  Education. 
B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1960. 

JAMES  F.  McCRORY,  1966-;  Instructor  in  Physics. 

B.S.,  Dickinson  College,   1960;  M.S.,  Pennsylvania  State  Uni- 
versity, 1964. 

WILLIAM  R.  MINNICH,  1967-;  Instructor  in  History. 

B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1957;  M.Ed.,  Temple  University, 
1963. 

MRS.  AGNES  B.  ODONNELL,  1961-;  Instructor  in  English. 

A.B.,   Immaculata  College,    1948;  M.Ed.,   Temple  University, 
1953. 

JOHN  P.  RAMSAY,  19 66-;  Instructor  in  English. 

B.A.,  Albright  College,   1958;  M.A.,  University  of  Wisconsin, 
1960. 

189 


FACULTY 

CHARLES  A.  REED,   1967-;  Instructor  in  History  and  Political 
Science. 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1954;  A.M.,  University  of  Penn- 
sylvania,  1959. 

MRS.  MALIN  Ph.  SAYLOR,  1961—;  Instructor  in  French. 
Fil.  Kand.,  Universities  of  Upsala  and  Stockholm,  1938. 

MRS.  MARION  B.  SHOWERS,  1967-;  Instructor  in  Psychology. 
A.B.,  Hofstra  College,  1941;  M.S.,  Fordham  University,  1946; 
Ph.D.,  1956. 

WARREN  K.  A.  THOMPSON,  1967-;  Instructor  in  Philosophy. 
A.B.,  Trinity  University,  1957;  M.A.,  University  of  Texas,  1963. 

GLENN  H.  WOODS,  1965-;  Instructor  in  English. 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1951;  M.Ed.,  Temple  University, 
1962. 

MRS.  LEAH  M.  ZIMMERMAN,  1964-;  Instructor  in  Voice. 
Diploma,  Juilliard  School  of  Music,   1925. 

TEACHING  ASSISTANTS: 

HENRY  W.  SHUEY,  JR.,  1967-;  Teaching  Assistant  in  Geography. 
A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1957. 

Auxiliary  Schools 
MRS.  MARGRIT  SCHMIDTKE,  1967-;  Instructor  in  Psychology. 
B.S.,  Carnegie  Institute  of  Technology,  1962;  M.Ed.,  University 
of  Pittsburgh,   1965. 

FRANK  R.  MADDEN,  1967-;  Instructor  in  Sociology. 

B.S.,  University  of  Pittsburgh,  1950;  M.S.W.,  University  of  West 
Virginia,   1967. 

UNIVERSITY  CENTER  AT  HARRISBURG 

PAUL  R.  BAIRD,  1967-;  Instructor  in  Accounting. 

B.A.,  Pennsylvania  State  University,  1941;  M.A.,  1950. 

LEONARD  M.  COHEN,  1964-;  Instructor  in  Psychology. 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1948;  M.Ed.,  Pennsylvania  State 
University,  1950;  D.Ed.,  Temple  University,  1959. 

NILE  D.  COON,  1967-;  Instructor  in  Education. 

B.S.,  Clarion  State  College,  1949;  M.S.,  1957;  Ed.D.,  1966. 

190 


FACULTY 

CHARLES  O.  CRAWFORD,  1967-;  Instructor  in  Sociology. 

B.S.,  Pennsylvania  State  University,   1956;  M.S.,  1958;  Ph.D., 
Cornell  University,  1963. 

DONALD  U.  FRUTIGER,   1966-;  Instructor  in  Accounting. 
A.B.,  Gettysburg  College,  1949;  C.P.A.,  1959. 

JAMES  H.  HARTZELL,  1967-;  Instructor  in  History. 

B.S.,  Gettysburg  College,  1924;  M.A.,  Pennsylvania  State  Uni- 
versity, 1953. 

EDWIN  L.  HERR,  1967-;  Instructor  in  Psychology. 

B.S.,  Shippensburg  State  College,  1955;  M.A.,  Teachers  College, 
Columbia  University,  1961;  Ed.D.,  1963. 

RICHARD  C.  JOHNSON,  19 64-;  Instructor  in  Sociology. 
A.B.,  University  of  Michigan,   1949;  M.A..  1951. 

ERNEST  E.  LUNDY.  1967-;  Instructor  in  French. 

B.S.  in  Ed.,  Bloomsburg  State  College,  1958;  M.A..  Middlebury 
College,  1966. 

SAMUEL  R.  McHENRY,  JR.,  1967-;  Instructor  in  History. 

A.B.,  Grove  City  College,  1947;  M.A.,  University  of  Pennsyl- 
vania, 1949;  M.S.  in  Ed.,  1955. 

GARY  M.  NEIGHTS,  1967-;  Instructor  in  Education. 
B.S.,  Lycoming  College.  1960. 

ROBERT  A.  NORDBERG,  1967-;  Instructor  in  Psychology. 

B.A.,  Franklin  and  Marshall  College,  1962;  M.S.W.,  University 
of  Pennsylvania,  1965. 

HARRIS  W.  REYNOLDS,   1967-;  Instructor  in  Education. 

B.S.  in  Ed.,  Lock  Haven  State  College,  1934;  M.Ed.,  Pennsyl- 
vania State  University,   1940;  Ed.D.,   1959. 

IRWIN  RICHMAN,  1965-;  Instructor  in  History. 

B.A.,  George  Washington  University,  1957;  M.A.,  University  of 
Pennsylvania,  1958;  Ph.D.,  1965. 

JOSEPH  P.  SHETTIG,  19 66-;  Instructor  in  Accounting. 
B.S.,  St.  Francis  College,  1951;  C.P.A. 

HORST  SYLVESTER,  1966-;  Instructor  in  Economics. 

A.B.,  Gettysburg  College,  1962;  M.B.A.,  University  of  Michigan, 
1963. 

191 


FACULTY 

LAURENCE  WAITE,  19 64-;  Instructor  in  Spanish. 

A.B.,  Franklin  and  Marshall  College,    1949;  M.A.,  Columbia 
University,  1951. 

COOPERATING  TRAINING  TEACHERS: 

The  student  teaching  program  is  organized  to  give  the  begin- 
ning teacher  as  wide  and  varied  experiences  as  possible. 

Extreme  care  is  used  in  the  assignment  of  the  cooperating  teacher 
with  the  student  teacher.  The  selection  is  made  in  a  cooperative  man- 
ner between  the  administration  of  the  local  school  and  the  supervisor 
of  practice  teaching  at  the  College. 

Student  teaching  in  Music  Education  is  done  in  the  Derry 
Township  Consolidated  Schools,  the  Annville-Cleona  Joint  Public 
Schools  and  the  Milton  Hershey  School.  Student  teaching  in  other 
areas  of  Elementary  and  Secondary  Education  is  done  in  schools 
within  reasonable  traveling  distance  of  the  College. 

Names  of  cooperating  teachers  and  subjects  taught  are  available 
in  the  offices  of  the  departments  of  Education  and  Music. 


DEPARTMENTAL  ASSISTANTS — 1 967 1 968 

Chemistry Karl  Guyler,  1969 

Economics  and  Business  Administration    .  .Franklin  Shearer,  1969 

Education Barbara  Turkington,  1969 

English    Mary  Alice  Hostetter,  1968 

Foreign  Languages    Morris   Cupp,  1970 

Health  and  Physical  Education Janet  Hill,  1968 

Joseph  Myers,  1970 

History  and  Political  Science.  .  1st  Semester — William  Watson,  1968 

2nd  Semester — LesErick  Achey,  1970 

Mathematics    David  Brubaker,  1969 

Music  Education    1st  Semester — John  Spangler,  1969 

2nd  Semester — Dale  Schimpf,  1969 

Philosophy    Jill  Bigelow,  1968 

Physics    Bruce  Bean,  1968 

Psychology   Susan  Shanaman,  1968 

Religion    William   Thompson,  1969 

Sociology    Rebecca   Fackler,  1968 

192 


FACULTY 

TEACHING  INTERNS — 1967-68 

Economics   Paul  Foutz,  1968 

English   James  R.  Newcomer,  1968 

Mathematics David  Brubaker,  1969 

Physics   John  H.  Heffner,  1968 

Religion    Mimi    Meyer,  1968 


COMMITTEES  OF  THE  FACULTY— 1 967-1 968 

Committee  on  Academic  Affairs 

Departmental  Chairmen;  The   Dean   of  the  College, 

Dr.  Ehrhart,  Chairman 


Biology,  Dr.  Wilson 
Chemistry,  Dr.  Neidig 
Economics  &  Bus.  Ad.,  Dr.  Tom 
Education,  Dr.  Ebersole 
English,  Dr.  Struble 
Foreign  Language,  Dr.  Piel 
Health  &  Phys  Ed., 
Mr.  McHenry 


History  &  Pol.  Science,  Dr.  Shay 
Mathematics,  Dr.  Bissinger 
Music,  Mr.  Smith 
Philosophy,  Dr.  Ehrhart 
Physics,  Dr.  Rhodes 
Psychology,  Dr.  Magee 
Religion,  Dr.  Wethington 
Sociology,  Miss  Kaebnick 


Dr.  Rhodes 
Mr.   Fehr, 

Chairman 
Dr.  Magee 
Dr.  Lockwood 
Mrs.  O'Donnell 


Committee  on  Faculty  Affairs 

Elected  by  the  Faculty  Term  expires  1968 

Elected  by  the  Faculty  Term  expires  1969 

Elected  by  the  Faculty  Term  expires  1970 

Appointed  by  the  President  Term  expires  1968 

Appointed  by  the  President  Term  expires  1970 


Dr.  Piel 

Dr.  Troutman, 

Chairman 
Mr.  Bollinger 
Miss  Burras 
Mr.  Getz 


Committee  on  Student  Affairs 

Appointed  by  the  President 
Appointed  by  the  President 

Appointed  by  the  President 
Appointed  by  the  President 
Appointed  by  the  President 


Term  expires  1968 
Term  expires   1968 

Term  expires  1969 
Term  expires  1970 
Term  expires   1970 

193 


FACULTY 

Committee  on  Public  Relations 

Dr.  Griswold 

Appointed  by  the  President 

Term 

expires 

1968 

Mrs.  Lewin 

Appointed  by  the  President 

Term 

expires 

1968 

Mr.  Smith 

Appointed  by  the  President 

Term 

expires 

1969 

Mrs.  Garman, 

Appointed  by  the  President 

Term 

expires 

1970 

Chairman 

Dr.  Hess 

Appointed  by  the  President 
Administrative  Advisory  Committee 

Term 

expires 

1970 

*Dr.  Love, 

Elected  by  the  Faculty 

Term 

expires 

1968 

Chairman 

*Dr.  Magee 

Elected  by  the  Faculty 

Term 

expires 

1969 

*Dr.  Rhodes 

Elected  by  the  Faculty 

Term 

expires 

1970 

Chairmen  of  the  other  four  committees 

Honors  Council 

Dr.  Jacob  L.  Rhodes,  Chairman 

Mr.  William  H.  Fairlamb 

Dr.  C.  F.  Joseph  Tom 

Dr.  Karl  L.  Lockwood 

-y  group  to  President  and  Dean  of  the  College 

*  Special  adviso 

Degrees  Conferred 


Degrees  Conferred  January  25,  1967 


BACHELOR  OF  ARTS 

Alma  Louise  Payne  Bobb,  History 
Roger  Wesley  Hatch,  II,  English 
Sister  Joseph  Augustine  Harvey, 
Sociology 


Harold  S.  Ade  Hedd, 

Political  Science 
Eileen  Cecelia  Patrick,  English 
Martha  May  Kuen  Tjhin,  Sociology 


BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE 


Alan  S.  Donaldson, 
Elementary  Education 

Lynn  V.  Dubbs, 

Elementary  Education 

Frank  T.  Geier,  Economics  and 
Business  A dministration 


David  Ray  Rogers,  Economics  and 

Business  A  dministration 
Michael  R.  Steiner,  Biology 
Terry  R.  Weight,  Biology 


Degrees  Conferred  June  4,  1967 


BACHELOR 

David  Larry  Bachtell,  Music 
Margaret  Joan  Barto,  Mathematics 
Richard  Whilldin  Buek,  Jr.,  History 
Harold  Lee  Burkholder,  History 
Kathleen  Marie  Cairns,  Psychology 
Richard  Elwood  Campbell, 

Mathematics 
Joan  Margaret  Carissimi,  Sociology 
Charlene  Cassel,  Psychology 
Joanne  Maxine  Cochran,  Spanish 
Charles  Joseph  Curley,  Philosophy 
Jane  Elizabeth  Doll,  Psychology 
Joseph  Nathaniel  Foster, 

Psychology 
George  Newton  Fulk, 

Political  Science 
Robert  William  Geiger,  Jr., 

Foreign  Language 
Susan  Jane  Green,  Mathematics 


OF  ARTS 

Marilyn  Anne  Gulley,  Mathematics 
Clarence  Ernst  Hoener,  Jr., 

English 
Helaine  Ruth  Hopkins,  Psychology 
Sue  Ann  Horton,  French 
Jack  Kauffman,  Political  Science 
David  Larry  Keperling,  Psychology 
Linda  Darlene  Keperling,  Sociology 
Doris  Joan  Kimmich,  Mathematics 
Howard  Leo  Lake,  Philosophy 
Duane  Henry  LeBaron,  Jr., 

Political  Science 
LeAnn  Alice  Leiby,  English 
Ann  Marie  Leidich,  Psychology 
John  Cornelius  Linton,  Psychology 
F.  Clinton  McKay, 

Political  Science 
William  Kutz  Miller,  Music 
Bonnie  Caroline  Mills,  French 


195 


DEGREES  CONFERRED 

Charles  William  Mowrer,  Psychology  John  Eli  Shuey,  Jr., 

Paul  Cuthbert  Murphy,  Political  Science 

Poltical  Science  Damon  Lee  Silvers,  III,  Psychology 

Carol  Ochoa,  Sociology  Mary  Patricia  Smith,  Biology 

Larry  Jacob  Painter,  Sociology  William  Harry  Spinelli,  English 

Craig  Hulburt  Renshaw,  Psychology  Janet  Carol  Stein,  Biology 

Bradley  Eugene  Rentzel,  Religion  Elizabeth  Beer  Stevens,  Biology 

Rita  Irene  Rice,  Political  Science  Gale  Marion  Thompson,  Biology 

Linda  Ellen  Rohrer,  French  Nancy  Susan  Bender  Treftz,  English 

Kiyofumi  Sakaguchi,  Mathematics  Edward  Joseph  Updegrove,  Jr., 

Mary  Jane  Serf  ass,  German  English 

Patricia  Elaine  Shaw,  Psychology  Pamela  Lowman  Wile, 

Tomoko  Shimada,  Spanish  Political  Science 

Judith  Nadine  Shober,  Psychology  Bonita  Jean  Young,  Sociology 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE 

With  a  Major  in  Economics  and  Business  Administrator 

Daniel  Felix  Chambers  William  James  Lamont,  Jr. 

Kenneth  Wolfe  Conrad  James  Crawford  Mann 

Philip  Malcolm  Cormany  Michael  Benard  Petosa 

Clifford  LaRue  Heizmann  Charles  Robert  Seibert 

Robert  Hambright  Hoerrner  Walter  Lewis  Smith,  3rd 

Glen  Irvin  Horst  Francis  Marion  Stearn,  IV 
Samuel  Alfred  Willman 

With  a  Major  in  Elementary  Education 

Elaine  Ann  Brenner  Phyllis  Adelaide  Pickard 

Carol-Ann  J.  Burian  Lois  Elaine  Quickel 

Donna  Lee  Curry  Sandra  Joan  Renninger 

Patricia  Thornton  Dellinger  Patrice  Arlynn  Todd 

Donna  Kay  Diehl  Carol  Lynn  Toth 

Ellen  Marie  Jackson  James  Morgan  Waring 

With  a  Major  in  Music  Education 

Joel  Peter  Behrens  Gretchen  Ann-Elizabeth  Long 

Louis  Joseph  D'Augostine  Daniel  Lee  Maurer 

Rachel  Louise  Gibble  Carol  Ann  Naugle 

Robert  Wayne  Goodling  Robert  Wayne  Posten 

Mamie  Marie  Kamara  Jack  Seyler  Schwalm 

Ellen  Rae  Kauffman  Thomas  Harry  Shonk 

Donald  Bryant  Kitchell  Carol  Ann  Stowe 

Kathleen  Margaret  Krikory  Ronald  Terry  Trayer 

Lucy  Amy  LeFevre  Paula  Kathryn  Ward 
Laura  Marie  Luise  Wubbena 

196 


DEGREES  CONFERRED 

With  a  Major  in  Science 

Barbara  Ann  Beltz  Jerrold  Council  Kopenhaver 

Kenneth  Scott  Berry  Ellen  Pauline  Kreiser 

Gary  Nicholas  Brauner  Rayanne  Dee  Behney  Lehman 

Richard  Joseph  Carlson  Julia  Elizabeth  Looker 

John  Simpson  Denelsbeck,  Jr.  Barbara  June  Macaw 

JoAnn  Dill  Robert  John  Martalus 

Judith  Ellen  Donmoyer  Sue  Ann  Martin 

John  E.  Dougherty,  III  Robert  Paul  Matsko 

Arthur  Raymond  Dunn,  Jr.  James  Mark  McKinney 

Thomas  Russell  Embich  Ronald  Dawson  Newmaster 

Robert  Edwin  Enck  Concetta  Marie  Perlaki 

William  Daniel  Furst  Robert  Allen  Roth 

John  Milton  Galat  Reynaldo  Tilton  Rovers 

Carol  Jane  Grace  Elaine  Swonger  Smith 

David  Paul  Ingalls  Ward  Owen  Smith,  III 

Michael  Muturi  Kamuyu  Cheryl  Jane  Speer 

James  Samuel  Knarr  John  Alton  Wiest,  Jr. 


BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  CHEMISTRY 

Roberta  Jean  Gable  Barry  Lee  Knier 

Harold  Frazee  Giles  Donna  Frances  Simmers 

Paul  George  Tietze 


BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  MEDICAL  TECHNOLOGY 

Bonnie  Lynn  Moyer  Caroline  Elisabeth  Trupp 

Carol  Clay  Yocom 


BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  NURSING 

Sylvia  Grimm  Linardi 

GRADUATION  HONORS 

SUMMA  CUM  LAUDE 
Lois  Elaine  Quickel 

MAGNA  CUM  LAUDE 

JoAnn  Dill  Robert  William  Geiger,  Jr. 

Roberta  Jean  Gable  Carol  Jane  Grace 

Linda  Ellen  Rohrer 

197 


DEGREES  CONFERRED 

CUM  LAUDE 
David  Larry  Bachtell  Doris  Joan  Kimmich 

Joanne  Maxine  Cochran  Gretchen  Ann-Elizabeth  Long 

Clarence  Ernst  Hoener,  Jr.  Sandra  Joan  Renninger 

Ellen  Marie  Jackson  Robert  Allen  Roth 

Carol  Lynn  Toth 

Elected  to  Membership 

PHI  ALPHA  EPSILON 

Honorary  Scholarship  Society 

Joanne  Maxine  Cochran  John  Milton  Lafferty 

JoAnn  Dill  Gretchen  Ann-Elizabeth  Long 

Roberta  Jean  Gable  Lois  Elaine  Quickel 

Carol  Jane  Grace  Sandra  Joan  Renninger 

Ellen  Marie  Jackson  Linda  Ellen  Rohrer 

Doris  Joan  Kimmich  Carol  Lynn  Toth 

Stephen  Noll  Wolf 

COLLEGE  HONORS 

Charles  Curley  Lois  Quickel 

Linda  Rohrer 

DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 

Lois  Quickel In  Elementary  Education 

Linda  Rohrer In  French 

Charles  Curley In  Philosophy 

Helaine  Hopkins In  Psychology 

HONORARY  DEGREES 

Conferred  June  4,  1967 

Curtis  Allen  Chambers Doctor  of  Divinity 

Thomas  G.  Fox,  Jr Doctor  of  Science 

Earl  Wayne  Reber Doctor  of  Science 

Arthur  William  Stambach Doctor  of  Divinity 

Degrees  Conferred  September  1 ,  1967 
BACHELOR  OF  ARTS 

Paul  Alexy,  III,  Political  Science  Tilman  Roger  Frye,  Philosophy 

Carol  J.  Clark,  English  Mary-Ann  Halladay,  Biology 

Mary  Margaret  Dowling,  Paul  Franklin  Keefer,  Psychology 

Psychology  Ellen  Marie  Latherow, 

Robert  B.  Evans,  Political  Science  Mathematics 

Mary  Jane  Hall  Rojahn,  English 

198 


DEGREES  CONFERRED 


BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE 


Charles  Lawrence  Doyle,  Biology 
Robert  Rowe  Jenkins,  Chemistry 
Sarah  Walters  Moffitt 
Elementary  Education 


Linda  Lee  Pierce,  Biology 
William  James  Schucker,  Jr. 

Elementary  Education 
Richard  William  Wentzel 

Elementary  Education 


BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  MEDICAL  TECHNOLOGY 

Donna  Doreen  Bridge 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  NURSING 

Janet  L.  Almond  Ruth  B.  Hatter 

Sally  Ann  Breidenthal  Patricia  A.  Jones 

Bonnie  Lou  Miller 


COLLEGE  HONORS 

Mary  Jane  Hall  Rojahn 

DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 

Mary  Jane  Hall  Rojahn 


In  English 


Student  Awards,  1967 

Senior  Awards 

Baish  Memorial  History  Award — 
Harold  Lee  Burkholder,  Harrisburg 

Established  in  1947  in  memory  of  Henry  H.  Baish  by  his  wife  and  daughter,  Mar- 
garet. Awarded  to  a  member  of  the  Senior  Class  majoring  in  history;  selected  by  the 
Chairman  of  the   History   Department   on   the  basis   of   merit. 

Andrew  Bender  Memorial  Chemistry  Award — 
Roberta  Jean  Gable,  Baltimore,  Md. 

Established  in  1952  by  the  Chemistry  Club  of  the  College  and  alumni.  Awarded  to  an 
outstanding    senior    majoring    in    Chemistry. 

The  Salome  Windgate  Sanders  Award  in  Music  Education — 
Gretchen  Ann  Elizabeth  Long,  Atlantic  Highlands,  N.  J. 

Established  in  1957  by  Robert  Bray  Wingate,  Class  of  1948,  in  honor  of  his  grand- 
mother, Salome  Wingate  Sanders.  Given  annually  to  the  senior  who  exemplifies  excel- 
lent character,  potential  usefulness,  high  academic  standing,  and  who  evidences  loyalty 
to  his  Alma   Mater. 

The  David  E.  Long  Memorial  Ministerial  Award — 
Bradley  Eugene  Rentzel,  Mt.  Wolf 

Established  in  1956  by  the  Reverend  Abraham  M.  Long,  Class  of  1917,  in  memory  of 
his  father,  the  Reverend  David  E.  Long,  Class  of  1900.  This  award  is  given  annually 
to  a  student  preparing  for  the  ministry,  selected  by  the  members  of  the  Department 
of  Religion  on  the  basis  of  merit. 

Pi  Gamma  Mu  Scholarship  Award — 
William  Kenneth  Watson,  Lebanon 

Authorized  by  the  National  Social  Science  Honor  Society  Pi  Gamma  Mu,  incorporated 
and  established  at  Lebanon  Valley  College  in  1948  by  the  Pennsylvania  Nu  Chapter 
of  the  Society  for  the  promotion  of  scholarship  in  the  Social  Sciences.  Granted  upon 
graduation  to  a  senior  member  of  Pennsylvania  Nu  Chapter,  selected  by  the  Chapter's 
Executive  Committee,  for  outstanding  scholarship  in  economics,  government,  history,  or 
sociology,  and  high  proficiency  or  other  distinction  attained  in  pursuit  of  same  during 
his  or  her  years  at  the  college. 

The  Pennsylvania  Institute  of  Certified 
Public  Accountants  Award — 
Not  awarded  this  year 

Awarded  to  a  senior  on  the  basis  of  accounting  grades  and  qualities  of  leadership  on 
campus. 

The  Wallace-Light-Wingate  Award  in  Liberal  Arts — 
Roberta  Jean  Gable,  Baltimore,  Md. 

Established  in  1967  by  Robert  Bray  Wingate,  Class  of  1948,  in  honor  of  Dr.  P.  A.  W. 
Wallace  and  Dr.  V.  Earl  Light.  Given  annually  to  the  senior  student  who  best  exempli- 
fies the  aims  of  liberal  arts  education,  namely,  a  broad  interest  and  training  in  both  the 
arts  and  sciences. 

200 


STUDENT  AWARDS 

The  Harrisburg  Chapter  of  the  National  Association  of 
Accountants  Award — 
Not  awarded  this  year 

Granted  to  the  student  demonstrating  outstanding  achievement  in  the  introductory 
accounting  course.  The  award  consists  of  a  student  subscription  to  NAA  Bulletin  and 
Research    Reports   of   the    NAA. 

Southeastern  Pennsylvania  Section, 
American  Chemical  Society  Award — 
Roberta  Jean  Gable,  Baltimore,  Md. 

Presented  to  the  outstanding  senior  Chemistry  major  in  each  of  the  colleges  in  the 
area  based  on  demonstrated  proficiency  in  Chemistry.  The  award  consists  of  a  book 
entitled   A    German-English   Dictionary  for   Chemists. 

The  M.  Claude  Rosenberry  Memorial  Award — 
Laura  Marie  Louise  Wubbena,  Dover,  Del. 

Given  to  an  outstanding  senior  in  Music  Education  who  is  entering  the  teaching  field 
in  the  State  of  Pennsylvania,  and  who  has  demonstrated  unusual  ability  and  promise 
as  a  potential  teacher. 

B'nai  B'rith  Americanism  Award — 
Bradley  Eugene  Rentzel,  Mt.  Wolf 

Awarded  to  a  member  of  the  graduating  class  who  throughout  the  year  by  his  actions 
best  exemplified  the  philosophies  of  our  American  Democracy — those  precepts  of  toler- 
ance— brotherhood,  citizenship,  respect  for  his  fellow  students  regardless  of  race,  color 
or  creed;  one  who  abhors  prejudice  and  discrimination  and  who  by  his  very  actions  has 
earned  the  respect  and  admiration  of  his  fellow  students  by  putting  into  practice  the 
very  tenets  taught  to  all  of  us  in  our  institutions  of  learning  for  the  sole  purpose  of 
making  this,  our  country,   a  better  land  in  which  to  live. 

Governor  James  H.  Duff  Award — 
Bradley  Eugene  Rentzel,  Mt.  Wolf 

Established  in  1960  by  Governor  James  H.  Duff  (Pennsylvania)  to  promote  interest 
in  state  government.  Awarded  annually  to  a  senior  who  by  participation  in  campus 
government  or  in  debating  demonstrates   a   facility   and   interest   in   government   service. 

The  Sigma  Alpha  Iota  Honor  Certificate  Award — 

Gretchen  Ann  Elizabeth  Long,  Atlantic  Highlands,  N.  J. 

Awarded  to  the  senior  music  major  with  the  highest  scholastic  average  over  her  four 
years   of   study.    The   award   consists   of   an   honor   certificate. 

Outstanding  Senior  of  Delta  Alpha  Chapter,  SAI — 
Gretchen  Ann  Elizabeth  Long,  Atlantic  Highlands,  N.  J. 

Awarded  by  the  Philadelphia  Alumnae  Chapter  of  Sigma  Alpha  Iota  to  the  girl 
selected  by  her  sister  members  as  the  outstanding  senior  of  Delta  Alpha  Chapter. 
The   award  consists   of   a   life   subscription   to  Pan  Pipes,   the   fraternity   magazine. 

The  Chuck  Maston  Award — * 

Samuel  Alfred  Willman,  Mt.  Wolf 

Established  in  1952  by  the  Knights  of  the  Valley.  This  award  is  made  annually  to  a 
male  member  of  a  varsity  team  who  has  displayed  the  exceptional  qualities  of  sports- 
manship,   leadership,    cooperation,    and    spirit. 

201 


STUDENT  AWARDS 

The  American  Association  of  University  Women  Award — 
Not  awarded  this  year 

Awarded  annually  by  the  Annville  Chapter  of  the  American  Association  of  University 
Women  to  a  senior  woman  on  the  basis  of  scholarship  and  campus  service. 

The  John  F.  Zola  Athletic  Award — * 
Larry  Jacob  Painter,  Palmyra 

Established  in  1962  by  the  LV  Varsity  Club.  To  be  awarded  to  the  football  player 
showing  qualities  of  desire,  attitude,  sportsmanship,  and  initiative, — the  qualities  that 
John  displayed.  This  award  is  open  to  members  of  all  classes  and  the  winner  is  elected 
by   the   members   of   the   football   team. 

Childhood  Education  Club  Award — 
Ellen  Marie  Jackson,  East  Orange,  N.  J. 

An  award  to  an  outstanding  student  in  the  Department  of  Elementary  Education  who 
has  demonstrated  qualities  of  character,  scholarship,  leadership,  and  service,  and  who 
has  successfully  completed  one  semester  of  student  teaching. 

Who's  Who  in  American  Universities  and  Colleges — 

David  Larry  Bachtell  Doris  Jean  Kimmich 

Barbara  Ann  Beltz  John  Cornelius  Linton 

Gary  Nicholas  Brauner  Gretchen  Ann  Elizabeth  Long 

Richard  Wildin  Buck,  Jr.  Barbara  June  Macaw 

Charles  Joseph  Curley  Lois  Elaine  Quickel 

JoAnn  Dill  Bradley  Eugene  Rentzel 

George  Newton  Fulk  Linda  Ellen  Rohrer 

Roberta  Jean  Gable  John  Alton  Wiest,  Jr. 
Robert  Wayne  Goodling 

Recognition  in  Who's  Who  Among  Students  in  American  Universities  and  Colleges  is 
awarded  annually  on  the  basis  of  grades,  personal  character,  and  campus  leadership. 
Final   selection   is   made   by   the    publishers. 

General  Awards 

Alumni  Scholarships  Awards — 

Kathleen  Margaret  Hannon,  Trenton,  N.  J. 
Susan  Kay  Sitko,  Annville 
Barbara  Ann  Tezak,  Harrisburg 
Jan  Helmut  Wubbena,  Dover,  Del. 

These  awards,  authorized  by  the  Alumni  Association  of  Lebanon  Valley  College  in 
June  1953,  were  established  with  the  resources  of  the  alumni  Life  Membership  Fund. 
These  scholarships  are  granted  annually  to  deserving  students  on  the  basis  of  character, 
academic  achievement,  and  need;  the  recipients  of  these  scholarships  to  be  designated 
Alumni    Scholars. 


*  Not    always    awarded    to   seniors. 

202 


STUDENT  AWARDS 

Maud  P.  Laughlin  Social  Science  Scholarship  Award — 
Paul  Back  Foutz,  Thomasville 
William  Kenneth  Watson,  Lebanon 
Mark  George  Holtzman,  Harrisburg 

Awarded  in  recognition  of  excellence  in  scholarship,  academic  progress,  campus 
citizenship,   service  to  the   institution,   participation   in   extra-curricular   activities. 

John  F.  Zola  Memorial  Scholarship  Award — 
Michael  Daniel  Curley,  Oceanside,  N.  J. 

Awarded  by  the  Knights  of  the  Valley  to  a  full-time  student,  on  the  basis  of  character 
and  financial  need. 

The  Biological  Scholarship  Award — 
Suzanne  Lee  Bennetch,  Newmanstown 

Established  in  1918  by  alumni  and  friends.  Awarded  annually  by  the  chairman  of  the 
Biology    Department   on    the    basis    of   merit. 

Medical  Scholarship  Award — 
Not  awarded  this  year 

Established   in    1918   by   alumni   and   friends.    Awarded   annually   cm   the   basis   of   merit. 

Phi  Lambda  Sigma  Scholarship  Award — 
James  Thomas  Evans,  Lebanon 

Established  in  1962  by  Phi  Lambda  Sigma  and  awarded  on  the  basis  of  need,  academic 
achievement,    and   contribution   to    the    goals    of    the    College. 

Bradford  Clifford  Alban  Memorial  Scholarship — 
Kathleen   Margaret   Hannon,    Trenton,   N.    J. 

Established  in  1964  by  Phi  Lambda  Sigma  and  awarded  on  the  basis  of  need,  academic 
achievement,  and  contribution  to  the  goals  of  the  College. 

The  Woman's  Club  of  Lebanon  Scholarship  Award — 
Judy  Ann  Gettle,  Lebanon 

An  award  given  annually  by  the  Woman's  Club  of  Lebanon  to  a  person  from  Lebanon 
County  enrolled  as  a  full-time  student;  the  choice  to  be  based  on  financial  need, 
scholarship,    and    character. 

Alice  Evers  Burtner  Memorial  Award — 
Barbara  Lynn  Pinkerton,  Ronks 

Established  in  1935  in  memory  of  Mrs.  Alice  Evers  Burtner,  Class  of  1883,  by 
Daniel  E.  Burtner,  Samuel  J.  Evers,  and  Evers  Burtner.  Awarded  to  an  outstanding 
member  of  the  Junior  Class  selected  by  the  faculty  on  the  basis  of  scholarship,  charac- 
ter, social  promise,   and  need. 

Delta  Alpha  Chapter  of  Sigma  Alpha  Iota  Award — 
Barbara  Lynn  Pinkerton,  Ronks 

Established  in  1963  in  memory  of  Marcia  M.  Pickwell,  instructor  in  piano.  Given 
annually  to  a  sophomore  or  junior  woman  student  majoring  in  music;  selected  on  the 
basis  of  need,  musicianship,  and  future  promise  in  her  chosen  profession. 

Student  Pennsylvania  State  Education  Association  Award — 
Lois  Elaine  Christman,  Lancaster 

Established  in  1967  by  the  local  chapter  of  the  Student  Pennsylvania  State  Education 
Association.  Given  to  a  member  on  the  bases  of  service  to  the  organization  and  portrayal 
of  qualities  necessary  for  successful  teaching. 

203 


STUDENT  AWARDS 

Wall  Street  Journal  Award — 

George  Joseph  King,  Somers  Point,  N.  J. 

Established  in  1948  by  the  Wall  Street  Journal  for  distinguished  work  in  the  Depart- 
ment of  Economics  and  Business.  The  award  consists  of  a  silver  medal  and  a  year's 
susbcription  to  the  Wall  Street  Journal. 

Sophomore  Achievement  Award  in  Chemistry — 
Ronald  James  Zygmunt,  Laureldale 

Awarded  to  a  member  of  the  sophomore  class  majoring  in  chemistry  who  has 
demonstrated  outstanding  work  in  the  field  of  Chemistry.  This  award  was  originated 
by   the    Student   Affiliate    Chapter   of   the    American    Chemical    Society. 

Sophomore  Prize  in  English  Literature — 
Linda  Lee  Eicher,  Princeton,  N.  J. 
Albert  Linden  Clipp,  Hagerstown,  Md. 
Miriam  Irene  Brandt,  Lebanon 

Established  by  the  Class  of  1928.  Awarded  to  the  three  best  students  in  Sophomore 
English,  taking  into  account  scholarship,  originality,  and  progress. 

Physics  Achievement  Award — 
David  Arthur  Diehl,  York 

Awarded  to  the  outstanding  student  of  the  freshman  or  sophomore  class  in  the  First 
Year  Physics  course.  The  award  consists  of  a  copy  of  the  "Handbook  of  Chemistry 
and  Physics." 

The  Max  F.  Lehman  Memorial  Mathematics  Prize — 
Henry  Dale  Schreiber,  Lebanon 

Established  by  the  Class  of  1907,  in  memory  of  a  classmate.  Awarded  to  that  member 
of  the  freshman  class  who  shall  have   attained   the   highest   standing   in   mathematics. 

Florence  Wolf  Knauss  Memorial  Award  in  Music — 
Mary  Patricia  Horn,  York 

Awarded  annually  to  the  freshman  girl  who  displays  the  following  basic  qualities:  (1) 
musicianship  with  performing  ability;  (2)  reasonably  high  academic  standing;  (3)  co- 
operation, dependability,  and  loyalty  to  the  college. 

Mathematics  Achievement  Award — 
Sara  Elizabeth  Foltz,  Lebanon 

Awarded  to  a  member  of  the  freshman  class  for  the  best  work  in  mathematics  through- 
out the  freshman  year.  The  award  consists  of  a  copy  of  the  new  edition  of  the  Chemical 
Rubber  Company's  book  on  "Standard  Mathematical  Tables." 

Freshman  Achievement  Award  in  Chemistry — 
Henry  Dale  Schreiber,  Lebanon 

Awarded  to  a  member  of  the  freshman  class  majoring  in  chemistry  who  has  demon- 
strated outstanding  work  in  the  field  of  chemistry.  This  award  was  originated  by  the 
Student   Affiliate   Chapter   of   the   American   Chemical    Society. 

Freshman  Girl  of  the  Year  Award — 
Mary  Patricia  Horn,  York 

Given  annually  by  the  Resident  Women's  Student  Government  to  the  outstanding  fresh- 
man girl  on  the  basis  of  scholarship,  leadership,  campus  citizenship,   and  personality. 

204 


STUDENT  AWARDS 

Sigma  Alpha  Iota — The  Dean's  Honor  Award — 
Carol  Elaine  Eshelman,  Manheim 

Awarded  to  a  member  of  Delta  Alpha  Chapter  on  the  basis  of  scholarship,  musician- 
ship and  fraternity  service  and  in  recognition  of  her  outstanding  achievement  and 
contribution  to  the  fraternity. 

Sigma  Alpha  Iota  Scholarship  Award — 
Lynda  Sue  Senter,  Freehold,  N.  J. 

Awarded  annually  by  the  Philadelphia  Alumnae  Chapter  of  Sigma  Alpha  Iota  to  a  junior 
member   of    Delta   Alpha   Chapter   on   the   basis   of   talent   and   need. 

Pickwell  Memorial  Music  Award — 
Sonja  Lorraine  Hawbaker,  Fort  Louden 

Established  in  1963  in  memory  of  Marcia  M.  Pickwell,  faculty  member  of  the  Depart- 
ment of  Music.  Awarded  annually  to  a  junior  music  major  who  has  demonstrated 
outstanding   pianistic   ability   and   promise. 

Achievement  Scholarship  Award  in  Economics 
and  Business  Administration — 

Paul  Beck  Foutz,  Thomasville 

Alan  Proctor  Hague,  Morrisville 

Mark  George  Holtzman,  Harrisburg 

Franklin  Richard  Shearer,  Wernersville 

Awarded  to  student  majoring  in  Economics  and  Business  Administration  for  out- 
standing scholarship  in  economics  and  business  administration  and  for  good  campus 
citizenship.  Established  in  1965  by  the  People's  National  Bank  of  Lebanon,  Pennsyl- 
vania. 

La  Vie  Collegienne  Award — 

Paul  Frederic  Pickard,  New  York  City 

The  LA  VIE  COLLEGIENNE  Award,  established  in  1964  by  the  Rev.  Bruce  C 
Souders  '44,  a  former  editor  of  LA  VIE  COLLEGIENNE,  seeks  to  acknowledge  the 
contribution  of  students  to  good  campus  public  relations  through  leadership  and  re- 
sponsibility in  the  publication  of  the  campus  newspaper.  It  is  awarded  annually  to  an 
upperclassman  on  the  staff  of  the  newspaper. 

Foreign  Language  Achievement  Awards — 
French:     Deborah  Ann  Sherman,  Lebanon 

Karen  Marie  Karhumaa,  Stow,  Mass. 

Bonnie  Carolyn  Mills,  Willow  Grove 

Linda  Ellen  Rohrer,  Hagerstown,  Md. 
German:  Sarah  Elizabeth  Foltz,  Lebanon 

Karen  Sue  Klick,  Lebanon 

Henry  Dale  Schreiber,  Lebanon 

Mary  Jane  Serfass,  Stroudsburg 
Spanish:    Elizabeth  Catherine  Stachow,  Annville 

Franklin  Richard  Shearer,  Wernersville 

Robert  William  Geiger,  Jr.,  Lebanon 

Awarded  annually  by  the  Consulates  of  France,  West  Germany,  and  Spain  for  out- 
standing achievement  in  the  study  of  French,  German,  and  Spanish  languages 
respectively. 

205 


correspondence  Directory 


To  facilitate  prompt  attention,  inquiries 
should  be  addressed  as  indicated  below-. 

Matters  of  General  College  Interest   President 

Academic  Program Vice  President  and  Dean  of  the  College 

Admissions    Director  of  Admissions 

Alumni  Interests Director  of  Alumni  Relations 

Business  Matters,  Expenses Vice  President  and  Controller 

Campus  Conferences Coordinator  of  Conferences 

Development  and  Bequests   Director  of  Development 

Evening  and  Summer  Schools Director  of  Auxiliary  Schools 

Financial  Aid  to  Students Student  Financial  Aid  Officer 

Placement: 

Teacher  Placement Director  of  Teacher  Placement 

Business  and  Industrial Director  of  Industrial  Placement 

Publications  and  Publicity Director  of  Public  Relations 

Religious  Activities Chaplain 

Student  Interests Dean  of  Men  or  Dean  of  Women 

Transcripts,  Academic  Reports   Registrar 

Address  all  mail  to: 

Lebanon  Valley  College 
Annville,  Pennsylvania     17003 

Direct  all  telephone  calls  to: 

Lebanon  Valley  College 

Annville,   Pennsylvania 

Area  Code  717         Local  Number  867-3561 

Regular  office  hours  for  transacting  business: 

College  office  hours  are  from  8:30  A.M.  to  5  P.M.  Monday 
through  Friday.  Members  of  the  staff  are  available  for  interviews  at 
other  times  if  appointments  are  made  in  advance. 

206 


index 


Page 

Absence    38,  46 

Academic  Classification 44 

Academic   Offices    176 

Academic    Probation     47 

Academic    Procedures    42 

Academic    Program    53 

Academic     Requirements     54 

Accreditation     13 

Activities    Fee     36 

Activities,    Student    83 

Actuarial   Science,   Outline  of 

Course    59 

Actuarial    Science,    Plan    of    Study 

in     137 

Administration    Building     19 

Administrative     Officers     and     As- 
sistants       176 

Administrative   Regulations    46 

Admissions   Deposit    36 

Admissions,   Requirements   and   In- 
formation      32 

Advanced   Standing    35 

Advisers,  Facultv 44 

Aid,    Student     .'. 40 

Aims  of  the   College    16 

Alpha   Phi   Omega    89 

Alpha   Psi    Omega    89 

American    Chemical    Society,     Stu- 
dent   Affiliate     90 

American  Guild  of  Organists,   Stu- 
dent  Group    90 

American      Institute      of      Physics, 

Student   Section    90 

Application   Fee    36,   37 

Application    for   Admission    32 

Art,   Courses   in    97 

Assistant  to  the  President    176 

Assistants,     Student     Departmental  192 

Athletic  Fields    22 

Athletics     91 

Athletics,   Aims   and   Objectives    .  .  93 

Attendance,   Chapel    46 

Attendance,    Class    46 

Auditing  Courses   43 

Auditions,   Department  of  Music    .  33 

Auxiliary    Schools    49,    190 

Auxiliary   School   Fees    37 

Awards   Conferred,    1967    200 

Baccalaureate,   Attendance   at    ...  .  57 

Balmer  Showers  Lectures 85 

Band,     All-Girl     89,   148 

Band,    Symphonic     89,   148 

Baseball    91 

Basketball     91 

Beta  Beta  Beta 88 

Biology,  Courses  in   99 

Board  Fees    36 

Board  of  Trustees   170 

Board  of   Trustees,   Committees    .  .  174 

Board  of  Trustees,  Officers    170 

Bookstore      22 

Breakage    Deposits,    Laboratories    .  36 

Breakage    Deposits,    Rooms    36 

Buildings  and  Equipment 19 

Business     Administration,     Courses 

in     108 

Business    Management    180 


Page 

Campus    Employment     40 

Campus   Evening  Classes    50 

Campus,   Buildings  and  Equipment  19 

Campus    Organizations    88 

Carnegie   Lounge    20 

Cars,  Student  Rules  Concerning   .  .  47 

Centennial      29 

Centennial    Fund    29 

Certification,   Requirements,   Public 

School  Teachers    74 

Change   of    Registration    42 

Chapel     22 

Chapel  Attendance   46 

Chapel    Choir    89 

Charges     36 

Chemistry,    Courses   in    102 

Chemistry,  Outline  of  Course   ....  62 

Class  Absence 46 

Class  Attendance    46 

Christian    Associations    84 

Christian  Vocation  Week   85 

Clubs,     Departmental     90 

College    Band    90,  148 

College    Bookstore    22 

College  Calendar,  1967-1968 2 

College  Calendar,  1968-1969   3 

College  Chorus   89,   148 

College   Dining  Hall 22 

College   Entrance   Examination 

Board   Tests    34 

College    History    9 

College  Honors   Program    80 

College    Profile    7 

College  Relations  Area   179 

Commencement,    Attendance    at    .  .  57 

Committees,   Board   of  Trustees    .  .  174 

Committees,   Faculty    193 

Comprehensive   Fees    36 

Concert    Choir     89,   148 

Conducting     150 

Concurrent    Courses     43 

Contingency   Deposit    37 

Control  and  Support   23 

Cooperative  Programs   68 

Cooperating   Training   Teachers    .  .  192 

Correspondence    Directory    206 

Counseling    and    Placement    44 

Course    Credit     55,  96 

Course   Discontinuance    43 

Course    Numbering    System     96 

Courses    of    Study    96 

Credits   Earned   at   Another 

Institution    34 

Cross    Country    91 

Cum  Laude  Graduates,   1967 199 

Day    Student   Accommodations    ...  22 

Deferred    Payments     38 

Deficient    Students     34 

Degrees   Conferred,   1967    195 

Degrees,   Requirements   for    54,   58 

Delta   Lambda   Sigma    88 

Delta  Tau   Chi    86 

Dentistry      69 

Departmental    Assistants    192 

Departmental    Clubs    90 

Departmental  Honors,  1967   199 

Departments,  Courses  of  Study  by  97 

Deposits      36 

Development   Office    179 

207 


Page 

Dining   Hall    22 

Directories     169 

Discontinuance   of    Courses    43 

Dismissal      . 47 

Dramatic   Organizations    89 

Economics    and    Business    Adminis- 
tration,  Courses   in    ..  ..  105 

Economics    and    Business    Adminis- 
tration,   Outline   of    Course    ....  64 

Education,    Courses    in    Ill 

Education  Independent  Study   ....  Ill 

Elementary   Education,    Courses   in  113 
Elementary    Education,    Outline    of 

Course    66,   74 

Emeriti   Professors     182 

Endowment    Funds    23 

Engineering,  Cooperative  Program, 

Outline    of    Course    68,   137 

English,    Courses    in    116 

Engle   Hall 22 

Entrance  Requirements 32 

Environment    18 

Epsilon  Zeta  Phi    89 

Equipment    19 

Evangelical  United  Brethren 

Church    14 

Evening    Classes     SO 

Examinations     55 

Examinations,    College   Entrance 

Board    34 

Examinations,    Competitive 

Scholarship     40 

Examinations,    Graduate    Record.  .  55 

Expenses    36 

Extension  Courses    49 

Extra-Curricular  Activities    83 

Facilities     19 

Faculty     181 

Faculty    Committees    193 

Faculty-Student    Government     ....  87 

Fees      36 

Financial  Aid    40 

Football 91 

Foreign   Languages,   Courses  in    .  .  120 

Foreign  Language  Requirement    .  .  58 

Forensic  Organizations   89 

Forestry,    Cooperative    Program, 

Outline  of   Course      68 

French,    Courses    in    121 

Freshman    Orientation    42 

Furnishings,   Residence   Halls    ....  32 

Future,   Looking   to  the    29 

General   Information    31 

General    Requirements    58 

Geography,    Course    in    125 

Geology,   Course  in    126 

German,    Courses   in    122 

Golf     91 

Gossard   Memorial   Library    19 

Governing    Bodies    87 

Grade   Point   Average    55 

Grading  and   Quality   Points, 

System    of     55 

Graduate    Record    examinations    .  .  55 

Graduation    Requirements    54 

Greek,    Courses    in    123 

Gymnasium      21 

Hazing      47 

Health  and  Physical  Education, 

Courses  in   127 

Health    Reports    47 

Health   Services    21 


Page 
History  and   Political   Science, 

Department   of    129 

History,  College   9 

History,    Courses    in    129 

Honorary   Degrees,    1967    199 

Honorary    Organizations     89 

Honors     Program     80 

Hours,   Limit  of   Credit    44 

Independent     Study     44 

Independent    Study,    Chemistry     .  .  102 

Independent  Study,  Economics   .  .  .  106 

Independent  Study,  English  ....  116 
Independent   Study,   Foreign 

Languages      120 

Independent   Study,   History    130 

Independent    Study,    Political 

Science   133 

Independent     Study,     Mathematics  136 

Independent    Study,    Philosophy    .  .  152 

Independent    Study,    Physics     ....  156 

Independent   Study,   Psychology    .  .  159 

Independent    Study,    Religion    ....  162 

Independent    Study,    Sociology    .  .  .  165 

Individual  Music  Instruction  ....  150 
Industrial   Mathematics   Society 

Affiliate     90 

Infirmary   21 

Installment  Payments    38 

Instructors     188 

Insurance   Plan   and  Fee    37 

Junior  Year  Abroad    78 

Kappa  Lambda  Nu    88 

Kappa   Lambda   Sigma    88 

Keister    Hall     21 

Knights   of  the  Valley    88 

Kreider    Hall    20 

Laboratory   Fees  and   Deposits    ...  36 

Lacrosse      91 

Late    Registration     37,  42 

Latin,    Courses   in    123 

Laughlin    Hall    20 

La    Vic    Collcgicnnc    89 

Library    Facilities     ' 

Limit  of   Hours    44 

Loans    40 

Location   and   Environment    32 

L.V.    Varsity   Club    91 

Lynch    Memorial    Building    22 

Major  Requirements    55 

Map,    Campus     Back    Cover 

Map,   Mileage    1° 

Mary  Capp  Green  Hall   20 

Mathematical    Physics,    Plan    of 

Study   in    J-37 

Mathematics,   Courses   in    136 

Meals    ^9 

Medical    Examinations    46,   127 

Medical  Technology,   Cooperative 

Program,    Outline    of    Course    .  .  68 

Medicine      69 

Music,  Courses  in   141 

Music    Department    Annex    21 

Music    Education,    Outline    of 

Course    72 

Music  Fees    36 

Music,  Individual  Instruction  ...  150 
Music,    History    and    Appreciation 

of 149 

Music,  Methods  and  Materials    .  .  .  145 

Music,    Outline    of    Course    70 

Music,    Preparatory    Courses    151 


208 


Page 

Music,    Theory   of    142 

Musical   Organizations    148 

Night    Classes     50 

North    College     20 

Nursing,    Cooperative    Program, 

Outline  of  Course    69 

Objectives   of   the   College    16 

Office  of  the  President   19,   176 

Officers,     Administrative     176 

Officers,  Board  of  Trustees 170 

Opportunities    for    self-support    ...  41 

Organ    Rental    Fees    37 

Organs,   Specifications  of    151 

Organizations,    Student     88 

Orientation      42 

Parking,   Student  Rules  on    47 

Part-Time    Student   Fees    36 

Pavment  of  Fees    37 

Phi  Alpha  Epsilon   88,   199 

Pennsylvania  State  Education 

Association,   Student    

Phi   Lambda   Sigma   88 

Phi    Mu    Alpha    89 

Philosophy,    Courses    in    152 

Physical    Education,    Courses    in    .  127 

Physical   Education   Requirement    .  127 

Physical    Examinations     127 

Phvsics,    Courses    in    155 

Pi    Gamma    Mu    88 

Placement     44 

Political    Science,    Courses   in    ....  129 
Practice  Teaching   ..   67,  76-77,  114,  115,   146 

Pre-Dental    Curriculum     69 

Pre-Medical    Curriculum     69 

Preparatory    Courses,    Music     ....  151 

Presidents   of   the   College    15 

Pre-Veterinary    Curriculum     69 

Principles   and   Objectives    16 

Private  Music  Instruction    150 

Prizes   Awarded,    1967    200 

Probation,     Academic      47 

Procedures,    Academic     42 

Professional    Curricula,    Special 

Plans    for     60 

Professors      184 

Professors,    Assistant    187 

Professors,    Associate    186 

Professors,    Emeriti     184 

Professorships    23 

Psi    Chi    88 

Psychology,    Courses   in    158 

Public    Relations    22,   182 

Public    School    Certification    Re- 
quirements       75 

Public   School  Music,   Outline  of 

Course     72 

Publications,     Student     89 

Quality   Points,    System   of    55 

Quittapahilla,   The    89 

Readmission      48 

Rebates     38 

Recitals,     Student     151 

Recognition    Groups     88 

Recreation      93 

Refunds    38 

Registration     42 

Regulations,     Administrative     ....  46 

Religion  and   Life   Lectureships    .  .  85 

Religion,   Courses  in    162 

Religious    Emphasis    Week    84 

Religious    Life    84 


Page 

Repetition    of    Courses    43 

Requirements,  Admission   32 

Requirements,  Degrees    54,  58 

Residence   Halls    20 

Resilence    Halls,    Regulations    ....  38 

Residence    Requirement    55 

Room    Reservations    39 

Russian,    Courses   in    124 

Savior  Hall   22 

Schedules,   Arrangement  of    44 

Scholarships    40 

Science  Hall    22 

Secondary  Education,  Courses  in  .  115 
Secondary   Education,   New   Course 

Requirements     75 

Semester  Hours    54 

Semester  Hour  Limitations    54 

Service    Organizations     89 

Sheridan  Hall 20 

Showers    Lectures,    Balmer    85 

Sigma  Alpha   Iota    89 

Social   Organizations    89 

Social  Sciences,  Courses  in    129 

Societies   88 

Sociology,  Courses  in 165 

South    Hall    20 

Spanish,    Courses   in    124 

Special   Fees    36 

Special  Plans  of  Study   59 

Statistics,  Plan  of  Study   137 

Student  Activities  and  Fee    36 

Student    Aid    40 

Student   Awards,    1967    200 

Student  Christian  Association   ....  84 

Student  Department  Assistants   .  .  .  192 

Student     Organizations     88 

Student  Recitals 151 

Student  Teaching   ..   67,  76-77,  114,  115,    146 

Student  Teaching  Fees   36 

Summary  of  College  Year, 

1966-1967     51 

Summary  of  College  Year, 

1967-1968;   First  semester    51 

Summer  School 49 

Sunday   Church   Services    84 

Support  and  Control   23 

Suspension   48 

Symphonic    Band    148 

Symphony  Orchestra   89,  148 

Teacher  Placement 45 

Teaching,    Certification    Require- 
ments       74 

Teaching    Interns     193 

Track    91 

Transcripts     47 

Transfer  Students    34,   56 

Trustees,    Board  of    170 

Tuition   Rebates    38 

UCAH    50,   190 

Veterinary  Medicine    69 

Vickroy  Hall 20 

Warthocj,  the  13th   89 

West  Hall   20 

Whitehats     89 

Wig   and    Buckle    89 

Withdrawal    48 

Withdrawal  Refunds   38 

Women's  Athletic  Association   .... 

Wrestling     91 


209 


Notes 


210 


Notes 


211 


Notes 


212 


Notes 


213 


Notes 


214 


LEGEND   -   LEBANON   VALLEY   COLLEGE,    ANNVILLE,    PENNSYLVANIA 


Administration  Building 

Carnegie  Lounge  —  Student  Personnel 

Gossard  Memorial  Library 
iKreider  Hall  (Men) 
|  Science  Hall 

Maintenance  Building 
I  College  Book  Store 

Central  Heating  Plant 

Laughlin  Hall  (Women) 
[ISouth  Hall  (Admissions  &  Registrar) 


©  Evangelical  United  Brethren  Church 

©  Engle  Hall  (Department  of  Music) 

®  Chapel 

®  Lynch  Memorial  Building  (Gymnasium) 

©  Sheridan  Hall  (Women) 

©  Music  Department  Annex 

©  West  Hall  (Men) 

®  College  Dining  Hall 

®  Mary  Capp  Green  Hall  (Women) 

©  Vickroy  Hall  (Women) 


©  Infirmary  and  Faculty  Offices 

®  North  College  (Women) 

®  Saylor  Hall  (Alumni,  Development, 
Public  Relations) 

®  Keister  Hall  (Men) 

©  Hammond  Hall  (Men) 

®  Womens  Day  Student  Hall 

©112  College  Ave.,  Faculty  Offices 

©  East  College  (Men) 


Parking 


Walks 


14012